Illustrative Situations

/. Study these example situations:

1. That (or which), subject, for things:

This is the plane that took me to Switzerland

These are two of the steamers that take people round the lake.

2. That (or which), subject, for animals: This is the dog that bit him.

This is the kitten that was found yesterday

3. Who (or that), subject, for persons: That's the man who loves Jane.

A man who drives a car when he is tired may be a dangerous driver. Accidents sometimes happen to people who are usually careful.

4. That (or which), object, for things or animals:

Here are some of the things (that) you may hear in a London

bus.

These are the books (that) I borrowed from Mr Brown.

5. That (or whom), object, for persons:

The man (that, whom) you saw in my office was Mr Green Is she the woman (that, whom) we met yesterday?

6. That (or which), prepositional object, for things: This is the hotel (that) I stayed in.

This is the hotel in which I stayed. That's the hut (that) we slept in.

7. That (or whom), prepositional object, for persons:

The man (that) 1 lent my dictionary to hasn't brought it back. The man to whom I lent rny dictionary hasn't brought it back. Who was the woman (that) you were talking to when I saw you yesterday?

Who was the woman to whom you were talking when I saw you yesterday?

8. Whose, possessive, for persons:

Those are the people whose house I stayed at.

That is the man whose daughter John is going to marry.

// Listen to the conversations and learn them.

At a Party Steve: Look, that's the man who knows Jeff well. His

name's Carver.

Jill: And who is the woman who is talking to Mary?

Steve: 1 think she's the woman who works in Mary's

office. Бе careful, Jill. Don't sit on that chair. It's the one that's wet. I spilt beer on it! I'm going to have some of that food now.

jiU- Don't eat too much. Those are all things which

will make you fat. Steve: But I like food that makes me fat.

At a Bookshop

Customer: I bought two expensive dictionaries here half an

hour ago, but I forgot to take them with me. Manager: Who served you, sir?

Customer: The lady who is standing behind the counter. Manager: Did you serve this gentleman half an hour ago,

Miss Roberts? He says he's the man who bought

these books. Miss Roberts: I can't remember, sir. The man whom I served was

wearing a hat.

Manager: Have you got a hat, sir? Customer: Yes, I have. Manager: Would you put it on, please? Customer: All right.

Manager: Is this the man that you served. Miss Roberts? Miss Roberts: Yes, sir. I recognize him now.

Back from Australia

Bill: Look, Bob. This is a photograph I took during my trip to Australia.

Bob: Let me see it, Bill.

This is a good photograph. Who are these people?

Bill: They're'people I met during the trip. That's the ship we travelled on.

Bob: What a beautiful ship! Who is this?

Bill: That's the man I told you about. Remember?

Bob: Ah yes. The one who offered you a job in Austra­lia.

Bill: That's right.

Bob: Who's this?

Bill: Guess!

Bob: It's not you, is it?

Bill: That's right. I grew a beard during the trip but I shaved it off when I came home.

Bob: Why did you shave it off?

Bill: My wife didn't like it!

277

Practice

/. Join the sentences. Use "who", "whom" or "which": e.g. She is the girl. She met me yesterday.

She is the girl who met me yesterday. e.g. She is the girl I met her yesterday.

She is the girl whom 1 met yesterday. e.g. This is the book. I bought it yesterday. This is the book which I bought yesterday.

1. This is the car. The mechanic repaired it yesterday. 2. He's the man. I invited him to the party. S.These are the things. I boughi them yesterday. 4. He's the man. He came here last week. 5. He is the policeman. He caught the thieves. 6. She is the nurse. She looked after me. 7. I'm the person. I wrote to you. 8. They are the people. I saw them yesterday. 9. They are the trees. We cut them down yesterday.

//. Join the sentences. Use "that":

e.g. That's the doctor. He gave me the tablets.

That's the doctor that gave me the tablets, e.g. That's the car. It won the race.

That's the car that won the race.

1. That's the man. He stole my car. 2. That's the football club. It won every game last year. 3. That's the school. It has the best reputation. 4. That's the factory. It makes good cameras. 5. That's the shop. It sells foreign books. 6. That is the girl. She told me about you. 7. That's the teacher. He is going to give the lesson. 8. That is the word. It sounds unnatural.

///. Join these sentences together:

e.g. She is the girl. I met her yesterday.

She is the girl I met yesterday, e.g. This is the book. I bought it yesterday.

This is the book I bought yesterday, e.g. This is the ship. I travelled on it.

This is the ship I travelled on.

1. She is the woman. I drove her to London. 2. That's the film. I saw it. 3. That's the man. I spoke to him. 4. They are the thieves. The police caught them. 5. These are the letters. I typed them. 6. The­se are the people. You asked me about them. 7. These are the shoes. The boy took them off. 8. This is the man. I served him. 9. That's the house. He's going to buy it. 10. That is the girl. I dan­ced with her. 11. That's the book. She's been reading it. 12. That is the man. I love him. 13. That's the plane. I flew in ft. 14. There's the house. We used to live in it. 15. There's the bridge. We crossed it. 16. This is the man. I want to see him. 17. This is

278

the girl. 1 want to marry her.->18v-This is the word. I don't know it. 19. That's the thing. I don't understand it. 20. That's the school. I study at it.

IV, Make progressive substitutions:

e.g. That's the man that makes chocolate. who= That's the man who makes chocolate.

10. the shop that

11. the man that

12. who

13. gives money away

14. the organisation that

15. helps old people

1. sells chocolate

2. the shop that

3. buys old books

4. the student that

5. who

6. the teacher who

7. has a good reputation

8. the firm that

9. repairs radios

V. Answer the questions:

e.g. There is Judy. She works in the newsagent's. There is Ruth. She works in an office. Which girl is Judy? She is the girl who works in the newsagent's.

1. There is my car. It is outside the garage. There is Bob's car. It is outside the theatre. Which car is Bob's car?

2. There is Tom. He is always hungry. There is Bob. He does not talk much. Which man is Bob?

3. There is John's house. It has a lot of windows. There is Pat's house. It has four floors. Which house is John's house?

4. There is our hotel. It looks expensive.

There is the Hunts' hotel. It has seventy-five bedrooms. Which hotel is your hotel?

5. There is Guy's coat. It is on the chair. There's Mike's coat. It seems old.

Which coat is Guy's coat?

6. There is Sue. She is coming out of the shop. There is Judy. She is going into the shop. Which girl is Judy?

7. There is Mum. She is talking to the waiter.

There is Aunt Ann. She is drinking a glass of water. Which woman is Aunt Ann?

8. There are Simon's football boots. They are under the table.

279

There are Peter's football boots. They are on the chair. Which football boots are Peter's?

VI. Put a relative pronoun "who", "whom", "which" or "that" into these sentences (if necessary):

1. The only games ... I play are football and tennis. 2. We don't know the man... lives here. 3. He is the only student...understands English well. 4. Have you sent the book ... I left on this tablet 5. The policeman is looking for the man ... left his car in the street. 6. I gave him the book ... I was reading. 7. This is the hotel at ... we are staying. 8. Is this the money ... you lost? 9. The car. he is driving is not his. 10. This is the man... we saw at the sta­tion yesterday. 11. Those... have finished their work may go home. 12. This is the horse... won the race. 13. He is the sort of person... everybody admires. 14. This is the plane ... took me to Pa ris. 15. Mr West put the bag ... he was carrying on the table 16. The table ... he put the bag on was near the door. 17. Both the letters... came this morning are bills. 18. That's the music, .is popular. 19. That is the city ... I was born in. 20. This is the island ... was bought by a millionaire. 21. This is the hotel ... was built last year. 22. The book... you lent me is not very interesting 23. The flowers... I love best are roses. 24. The man ... you met yesterday is an actor.

Fluency

/. Listen to the conversation "Holidays in Switzerland" and answer the questions:

George: Good evening, Mary. I'm glad to see you. Come in.

Mary: Hullo, George! I haven't seen you for several weeks. You've been away from home, haven't you?

George: I've been in Switzerland. I got back yesterday.

Mary: I hope you had a good holiday. Did you enjoy yourself?

George: Very much. Shall I show you some of my photographs?

Mary: Oh, do, please. I like looking at photographs.

George: Here they are. This is the plane that took me to Switzer­land.

Mary: Oh, you went by air, did you? Do you like flying?

George: Yes, I like flying. I think it's much better than going by rail and steamer. The air-liners of British European Air­ways are very comfortable. They've carried millions of passengers quite safely. And of course flying is much quicker. Here's another photograph.

Mary: That's you, isn't it? Who's the girl at your side?

George: That is a girl who was with me in the plane. We became

280

quite friendly and spent a lot of time together. Mary: And who is the girl in this photograph? George: She is a girl who was staying at my hotel in Interlaken.

I became quite friendly with her, too.

Mary: Well, here's another girl! That's three! Who's this girl? George: She's a girl who went up several mountains with me.

She was staying at my hotel too. She's very fond of climb­ing, so we often went climbing together. Mary: You like the girls and the girls like you. What's this?

It's a train, isn't it? George: Yes, that's a train on the railway that goes up the

Jungfrau. Mary: You said you went climbing! Did you go up the Jungfrau

by train? That isn't climbing. George: The railway doesn't go to the top! We climbed from the

end of the railway.

Mary: Here's a photograph of a steamer. George: That's a lake steamer. It takes passengers round one

of the two lakes at Interlaken. Interlaken is between the

two lakes. Mary: That's what the name Interlaken means, isn't it? Who

are these three men? George: The man on the left is an Italian who has climbed most of

the mountains in the Swiss Alps. The man in the middle is

a Frenchman who has done a lot of climbing in the

Pyrenees. The third man, on the right, is a Swiss guide.

He's the man who took us up several mountains. You

must have a good guide in the Alps. It is dangerous to

climb alone.

Mary: And what's this? George: That's one of the mountain huts we slept in when we

were doing a two-day climb. Mary: And this? It's a hotel, isn't it? George: Yes, that's the hotel I stayed in while I was in Geneva

for a few days.

Mary: That's a pretty little village. George: Isn't it? It's a place where I stayed for two days after

my longest climb. I was very tired. Mary: And who are these people?

George: They're the people at whose house I stayed in the village. Mary: Well, you certainly had a good holiday. George: Yes, I enjoyed every minute of it. I hope I shall be able to

go again next summer.

Questions: Where did George spend his holidays? Did he have a good time? What did he do during his holidays?

281

//. Listen to the conversation again and pick out the relative clauses.

III. Role play the conversation.

IV. Situation: You've just returned from your holidays. You had a very good time. At the moment you are speaking to your friend about your holidays and showing him/her your photographs.

V. Listen to the texts describing pictures, learn the texts and describe your own pictures in the same way.

1. Nick Owen is a guide for Britannia tours. Some new tourists have just arrived in Exmouth. He's showing them around the town.

"I'm sure you'll enjoy your stay here. There's the beach that's the safest for swimmers. The other beaches aren't as good. And that's the shop that sells picnic lunches. Over there's the shop that sells souvenirs. I'll meet you back here at four o'clock.

2. Paul's showing Angela some holiday photos.

"Look... this is the hotel I stayed in... and here's the restaurant I used to go to. I used to eat there every day. This is the beach we used to lie on. It was a marvellous holiday."

3. Anne's just had an accident. She's telling a policeman about it.

"The car in front of me stopped suddenly. I managed to stop, but the van behind me didn't. It hit my car and pushed it into the car in front. There's my car. There's the van that hit my car. And that's the car my car hit."

4. Paul's showing Angela an old school photo.

"The headmaster's in the middle. He's the one that taught us Latin. His lessons were very boring. The fat one on the left is Mr Bunter. He's the one that used to hit us with a cane. Mr Cher­ry's on the right. He's the one that taught us French ... and football. 1 was never bored at his lessons."

5. This is a picture of Ronald Rigg. He's the man the police arrested yesterday. He's standing next to P. C. Martin. Mar­tin's the policeman that caught him.

VI Listen to the conversation "A Court Case", read and role-play the conversation:

A few months ago there was a bank robbery in Stanford The police arrested a man and a woman. They're in court now A woman saw the robbery. She's standing in the witness box. The judge and the twelve members of the jury are listening to her A lawyer is asking her some questions.

Lawyer: Now, Miss Dexter. You saw the bank robbery,

didn't you?

282

Miss Dexter: Yes, I did.

Lawyer: You saw a man, didn't you?

Miss Dexter: That's right. I saw him when he went into the bank

and when he came out.

Lawyer: Now, look around the court... can you see that man?

Miss Dexter: Yes'. He's the man I saw.

Lawyer: He wasn't alone when he went into the bank, was he?

Miss Dexter: No, he was with a woman. Lawyer: Now, look around the court again... can you see

that woman?

Miss Dexter: Yes, there! She's the woman ! saw. Lawyer: I see, Miss Dexter. Now look at the man and woman

again. This is very important. Are you absolutely

sure about them?

Miss Dexter: Absolutely sure. They're the people I saw. Lawyer: Now, Miss Dexter. What was the man wearing

when he went into the bank? Miss Dexter: I don't remember everything ... but I remember his

hat and his bag.

Lawyer: Look at the hat on the table. Is that the hat?

Miss Dexter: Yes, that's the hat he was wearing. Lawyer: ... and the bag?

Miss Dexter: Yes, that's the bag he was carrying. Lawyer: Do you remember anything about the woman?

Miss Dexter: Yes. She was wearing a blonde wig and black plat­form shoes.

Lawyer: How do you know it was a wig, Miss Dexter?

Miss Dexter: Because it fell off when she was running to the car. Lawyer: Look at the wig on the table. Is that the wig?

.Miss Dexter: Yes, that's the wig she was wearing. [.Lawyer: ... and the shoes... look at the shoes.

I Miss Dexter: Yes, they're the shoes she was wearing. Lawyer: Thank you, Miss Dexter.

Self check /. Translate into English:

I. Это дом, в котором я живу. 2. Это кольцо, которое он мне подарил. 3. Машина, которая была найдена вчера, принадлежит ее брату. 4. Вазу, которая здесь стояла, вчера разбили. 5. Муж­чина, с которым она разговаривает, мой начальник. 6. Девушка, которая принесла телеграмму, выглядела очень усталой. 7. Это гостиница, которая была построена в прошлом году. 8. Чело­век, о котором вы говорите, находится в соседней комнате. 9. Вот тот студент, которого мы видели вчера в театре. 10. Книга, кото-

283

рую я читаю, очень интересная. 11. Вчера я встретил ста­рого школьного приятеля, которого я сразу узнал 12. Он самый интересный человек, которого мне когда-либо приходилось встре­чать. 13. Это вещь, которая мне нужна. 14. В нашем учреж­дении есть много людей, которые хорошо говорят по-англий­ски. 15. Студент, чью тетрадь я вам показал, учится очень хо­рошо. 16. Где письмо, которое я дал тебе почитать? 17. Он под­нял сверток, который она уронила. 8. Вот деньги, которые вы потеряли. 19. Это город, в котором я родился. 20. Это чело­век, который помог мне. 21. Это новость, которая всех удивила 22. Кто та девушка, на которую ты смотришь? 23. Это школа, в которой я училась.

КЛЮЧИ К УПРАЖНЕНИЯМ

UN IT I

Exercise I, p. 18

1. I have done; 2. The delegation has already arrived... we haven't spoken; 3. I read... I haven't read; 4. Have you made; I haven't made; 5. She has gone; 6. Have you ever been; I have been; 7. I have played ... the summer began; 8. We haven't seen... we saw; 9. He has had; He has broken; 10. Have you finished; I have just begun; 11. have you brought; 12. Have you ever found; I haven't; 13. Has Mr West sold; he has; He sold; Has he moved.

Exercise II, p. 19

1. Have you ever played chess with Victor? Does he play chess well? — I don't know. I have never played chess with him. 2. How is Ann? I haven't seen her lately.— She is fine, thank you.— And how is your son? Has he finished school? — Yes, he is a student already. 3. I must pack the suitcase.— Don't worry, I have already packed it. 4. My nephew is only 5, but he has already learnt to read well. 5. Have you ever been to England? — Yes, I was there two years ago. 6. What h^s happened? — I have broken my favourite cup. 7. We have bought a new TV set. I like it very much. 8. Nina is very upset. She hasn't passed her exam. 9. Will Nick come to the party? — No, he has gone away on business. 10. Shall we watch TV tonight? — I haven't repaired it yet. 11. Have you signed the documents? — Yes, you may take them.

Exercise I, p. 25

1. Have you heard; He has broken; How did that happen; 2. I have just returned; Did you go; How long did you stay. 3. Have you had; Did you cut; Ann cut; 4. Somebody has spilt; it wasn't me; it was; 5. Did you see; 6. Somebody has taken; 7. I didn't eat... I didn't feel; 8. Why didn't Jim want; He was; 9. he has gone out; did he go out; 10. Have

325

you seen, I have; I saw; did you think; I didn't like; 11 I went; Have you ever been; Barbara has already been; She loved, she has never eaten; What did you order, I had...Mary tried; They were both, 12. I have never been; I went; I did; Have you ever been; a friend of mine stayed; He enjoyed.

Exercise II, p. 25

I. I have never been to China, but I have been to Japan. It was three years ago. 2. Where is my textbook? I have just left it here. Has anybody been here? 3. Kate went to the cinema two hours ago and she hasn't come back yet. 4. Has Victor repaired the TV set? — Not yet. 5. Have you booked the tickets yet? — Not yet.-—Why didn't you do that yesterday? — I forgot all about that. 6. Have you ever been to the Bolshoi theatre? — Yes.— What did you see? — "Swan Lake".— Did you enjoy the ballet? — Yes, the music is wonderful, the dancing was superb.

UNIT 2 Exercise VIII, p. 29

1. They seem to know each other. 2. He seems to be very clever. 3. I'm looking forward to meeting you. 4. Nick ottered me his tent, but I refused. 5. I suggested starting on Friday mor­ning. My friends agreed. 6. Tomorrow I'm going away on business Nina has offered to look after my son. 7. His offer to help surprised us. 8. Ann suggested spending our holidays in Yalta. I liked her suggestion.

Exercise I, p. 34

A. what are you and your sister going; I don't know; What are you doing; We are going; Where do you go; We have tried... we prefer; Do you take. . stay; we are taking: It'll be; it is; I'll talk., she thinks.

B. Postcards always spoil; I went; I visited...sat; A friendly waiter taught; he lent; I read... I didn't understand; I thought; My holidays passed... I didn't send; I made; I got up ...bought; I spent... I didn't write.

Exercise II, p. 35

— Hullo, Andrew! Glad to see you.— Hullo, Victor! I haven't seen you for ages. Where have you been all this time? — You see, I've just returned from England. Have you ever been there? — I'm sorry but I haven't been there. But I'm going there next year. Did you enjoy your trip? — Certainly. London is one of the most beautiful cities I've ever seen. I stayed there for two weeks and

326

I had a good time. Come to see me one of these days. I'll show you my pictures.— All right. See you soon.

UNIT 3 Exercise I, p. 44

1. Victor has just returned from London. I haven't seen him since last year. 2. How long have you been married? — Three years. 3. Have you ever read English books in the original? — No. I have been studying English only half a year. 4. Where have you been? I have been waiting for you since five o'clock. 5. What are you doing now? — I have been typing for two hours already. 6. I haven't seen your sister lately.— She has been in the Crimea the whole month. 7. Who has taken my dictionary? I have been looking for it for half an hour. 8. I'm tired. I have been working in the garden all day long. 9. How long have you been preparing for your exams? — For a month already. 10. Robert is absent today. He has been ill for two weeks. 11. How long have you been collecting stamps? — For ten years. 12. What have you been doing all this time? — I have been watching TV. 13. Have you been sitting here long? — Since 10 o'clock. 14. My brother is in Moscow. I haven't heard from him for a month. 15. I haven't met Paul since we passed the last exam. 16. The students have just left. They have been here all day long.

Exercise I, p. 48

1. Somebody has broken; 2. John has forgotten; I have been expecting; 3. What has happened; 4. Haven't you finished; You have been reading; 5. I have been cooking; 6. What have you been doing; I have been sitting; 7. I have lost; 8. Have you been working; 9. He has appeared; 10. I've been cleaning; I have cleaned; 11. I haven't been waiting.

Exercise II, p. 48

1. The whole evening I've been typing. I have already typed ten pages. 2. We have been writing the test paper for 45 minutes already. Some of the students have already finished it. 3. Have you been waiting for me long? — No, I have just come. 4. What have you been doing this morning? — We have been planting trees in the garden.— How many trees have you planted? — Seven. 5. I have been translating the article for two hours, but I haven't translated it yet.

Exercise I, p. 51

1. Mr Clark worked; 2. She has lived; 3. They have been

327

married; 4. we were... the weather was; 5. The weather has been, 6. I have never met; 7. We spoke; 8. I haven't spoken.

Exercise II, p. 51

1. Ann and I agreed to go to the cinema yesterday. I waited for her outside the cinema half an hour, but she didn't come. I don't know what has happened to her. 2. When did you last see Robert? — I haven't seen him for two weeks. 3. How long have you been mar­ried? — I got married three years ago. 4. Where did you rest last summer? — In the Caucasus.— How long did you stay there? — About a month. 5. Yesterday I came home from work at 6 o'clock, rested about an hour, and then I went to visit my friend. 6. Where is the key? I've been looking for it (for)half an hour already. 7. How long have you you been here? — I came here an hour ago.— Did you meet Nick? — Yes, we talked for ten minutes and then he left.

8. How long have you had this car? — Five years. 9. How long have you lived in Minsk? — Since 1978.

Exercise I, p. 54

1. It was still raining... I came; It has been raining; 2. I have been sitting; I have already drunk; ,3. What have you been doing; I haven't seen; 4. They haven't been working; They have been. 5. It hasn't rained; 6. I have been going; 7. Peter has been writing; He has already written; 8. I have been sleeping... I haven't woken;

9. I bought... I haven't worn; 10. He has already seen; He saw., he was; 11. When did you meet; I met; 12. Have you ever spoken; I spoke; 13. Peter has lived; He lived... he went; 14. I have just had; I finished; 15. I have made; I made; 16. I have never played... I played... I was; 17. I haven't heard... she went; 18. I lay. 19. Have you ever travelled; I went; 20. Have you lived; I have lived; I was born; Have you been; I went; 21. How long have you been; I arrived; I have been; Have you seen; 22. Williams live; They have only lived, They arrived... arranged; They haven't

made.....they think; The neighbours have been...Mr Williams has

invited... he will hold; His friends are coming (will come); The Williams family lived... they came; Mr Williams didn't like; he was visiting... he met... who offered; Mrs Williams wanted... they arrived... the sun was shining... she began; 23. Jack looked; Jili arrived; I have been waiting; he said; Were you; Jack went; he said; I got...you were not; I came... waited... you didn't come; What have you been doing; Jack asked; I have just been.

Exercise II, p. 55

1. Mr Smith is waiting for you.— How long has he been wai­ting? — About twenty minutes.— Let him come in. 2. Where are the

328

letters? I want to send them today.— The secretary has just brought them. She has been typing the whole day. 4. Can (May) I speak to Mr Voronov? — I'm afraid not. He has just gone out. 4. Let's go to the cinema. We haven't been at the cinema for ages.— Good idea. Nick says, that he has seen an interesting detective at the "Moscow" cinema. Would you like to see it? — Yes, I'm very fond of detectives. 5. When did you graduate from the Institute? — In 1975.— How long have you worked at this plant? — Five years.— Where did you work before? — At a research institute.

UNIT 4

Exercise VI, p. 62

1. Hullo! Haven't seen you for ages! How are you? — Fine, thank you. And you? — Quite well, thank you. 2. Good morning! Is the chief in? — No, he is at a meeting. Come at 12.—Thank you. Good-bye. 3. I must be off. I have an appointment at 9 o'clock. Remember me to your wife and parents.— Thank you. Good-bye. 4. Glad to see you. How are you getting on? — All the same, thank you. And how are you? — Not too good I'm afraid. My wife has fallen ill with flue.— Sorry to hear that. 5.Hullo! How are you? — Not too bad, thank you.— And how is your brother getting on? — He is fine.— Glad to hear that. 6. I hear Eve Brown is going to get married.— That's interesting news. It will be her third marriage. 7. I haven't seen your sister lately. How is she getting on? — Very well, thank you. She is now abroad, in Italy.— How long is she going to stay there? — A year and a half.— Give my regards to her.— Sure. 8. How are you, Victor? — Not too good, I'm afraid.— What's wrong? (What's the matter?) — I haven't passed my exam in biology.— Sorry to hear that. I'm sure you will soon pass it.— I hope so. I have been preparing for it for a week already.

Exercise I, p. 66

1. some; any; no; 2. something; everything; anything; nothing; 3. somebody; anybody; nobody; everybody; 4. somewhere; every­where; anywhere.

Exercise II, p. 67

1. a little; 2. a few; 3. a few; 4. a little; 5. a few; 6. a little;

7. a few; 8. a few; 9. few; 10. little.

Exercise III, p. 67

1. much; 2. much; 3. many; 4. much; 5. many; 6. much; 7. many;

8. many; 9. much; 10. many; 11. many; 12. much.

329

Exercise IV, p. 67

Neither; both; neither; all; none.

Exercise V, p. 67

1. itself; 2. themselves; 3. myself; 4. himself; 5. herself, 6. yourself; 7. yourself; 8. ourselves; 9. yourself; 10. themselves; 11. himself; 12. herself.

UN IT 5

Exercise XVI, p. 78

1. Could you hand her this message? — Gladly. 2. Will you please wait for me a little? — All right. 3. Shall we drop in at this cafe? — Good idea.— What would you like — tea or coffee? — Tea with lemon.— Shall we eat anything? You must be hungry.— Yes. I'd like to try the beefsteak.— Anything else? — No, that's all.— So, we can make our order. Waiter! — Yes, sir? — Please, bring us two beefsteaks and tea with lemon.— All right, sir. 4. Could you give me a lift to the station? — With pleasure. 5. Could you do me a favour? I want to call at the post-office for the parcel. Will you, please, look after Ann while I'm out? — Certainly, I'll come in no time.

Exercise I, p. 82

to; past; at; to; near; from; of; on; for; for; with; of; of; for; out of; at.

Exercise II, p. 83

-; a; -; the; -; -; the; the; the; the; -; -; -; -; -; -; -; a; a; -; -; the; -; -; a; -; -; the; -; a; the; .the; the; a; the.

Exercise III, p. 83

Have you had dinner? — Not yet.— Neither have I. I'm very hungry. Let's have dinner somewhere together.— All right. Shall we go to the cafe in Main Street? — I'd love to. I have been there several times. I like that cafe very much. The cooking and the service are good there.

(In the cafe)

— What is on the menu today? — There are a lot of dishes to my taste. I'd like chicken soup, beefsteak and a glass of orange juice. And you? — As for me, I'll have a mutton chop and a bottle of beer. I don't want soup today.— Do you want ice-cream? — No, I don't like ice-cream.— Would you like anything to drink? — Let's have a bottle of dry wine.— Anything else? — No, that's all Let's call the waiter and make our order.

330

UNIT 6 Exercise I, p. 87

So am I; So did I; neither did 1; 'So were the rest of us; neither does Monika; so am I; neither have I; So has Monika; so are the people.

Exercise II, p. 88

1. Nick speaks English well.— So does his wife. 2. I haven't seen this film.— Neither have I. 3. We are going on an excursion on the week-end.— So are we. 4. Ann didn't come to the concert yesterday.— Neither did her brother. 5. I can't play golf.— Neither can I. 6. Yesterday I had to work hard.— So did I. 7. John likes figure skating.— So does his wife. 8. I don't know his address.— Neither do I. 9. Robert will come.— So will Victor. 10. I have already booked a ticket.— So have I. 11. Yesterday I saw Nick.— So did I. 12. I didn't like the concert.—Neither did I. 13. I'm glad to see you.— So am I. 14. I shan't be present at the meeting.— Neither shall I.

Exercise I, p. 90

aren't you; aren't you; don't you; don't you; didn't you; were you; aren't you; didn't you; weren't you; did you; didn't you; do you; didn't you; didn't you; weren't you; didn't you; wasn't there; do you; am I; isn't it.

Exercise II, p. 91

1. You live in Main Street, don't you? — Yes, I have lived there for five years.— You know Oleg Lobov, don't you? — Yes, he is my neighbour.— Can you hand him my message? — Sure. 2. Nick left for Moscow last week, didn't he? — Yes, he did.— He hasn't come back yet, has he? — No, he hasn't.— But he will come by Saturday, won't he? — I think so. 3. You ran't play chess, can you? — No, I can't.— But you play draughts, don't you? — Yes, I do.— Then let's play a game of draughts.

UNIT 7 Exercise I, p. 100

1. she and Arthur had held; 2. Peter was going... he saw... he hadn't met; 3. I hadn't fallen... I heard; 4. ! spoke... I thought... I had met; 5. we got... we found... the train had already left; I was waiting I was reading; 6. they had gone... I went; 7. I got back... they had sold; 8. He was...he had been working; 9. she opened... she read; 10. They had been sitting... the taxi finally arrived; 11. They left... he had finished; 12. He quickly forgot... he

331

had learnt; 13. we came... the Smiths had already lived; 14. He told... he had been fishing... he had never caught; 15. she (had) heard... she phoned; 16. he looked... he understood... he had got off; 17. Jack had done; He went; The weather was; It had stop­ped... the moon was shining. 18. Judy's father had managed; They caught... spent; They arrived... joined; they realised they had left.

Exercise II, p. 101

1. When I came to see Victor, he wasn't at home. He had gone to the station to meet his friend. 2. The tourists had been waiting for the bus very long, so when it arrived, it was already too late and they didn't want to go anywhere. 3. When I had told him every­thing he understood what had happened. 4. She looked at the watch. It was about 12 o'clock. She had been working at her report for 6 hours. 5. By the end of June 1 had passed all my exams and was free. 6. On Friday he wasn't at work. The day before he had gone away on business. 7. When I called Nick, I learnt that he had been ill for two weeks. 8. I had worked at a plant before I entered the Institute. 9. The meeting hadn't begun yet, when we came. 10. When i came home, the children were already sleeping. My wife said that they had been sleeping since 9 o'clock. 11. Victor said that he had reserved a room at the Ukraine hotel. 12. He had lived abroad for three years, before he came to Minsk.

Exercise I, p. 103

1. We shall have finished; 2. The lesson will have started;

3. he will have been living (will have lived); 4. he will have begun; 5. They will have been travelling; 6. She will have had; 7. They will have built; 8. I will have spent; 9. We shall have been flying; 10. The play will have begun; 11. they will have completed; 12. I will have been working.

UNIT 8

Exercise V, p. 106

1. Don't make iip. work so hard. She is tired of this work. 2. I made the typist type the letter again, because there were a lot of mistakes in it. 3. Why did you make him go there so late?

4. I'll do all I can to help her. 5. The film is different from the book. It is much more interesting. 6. She is proud of her son. He is very hard-working and does very well at school.

Exercise I, p. 120

to; to; on; with; outside; at; at; for; at; in; for; for.

332

Exercise II, p. 120

What are you doing tonight? — Nothing special, why? — Would you like to go to the cinema? — That's not a bad idea. I ha­ven't been at the cinema for several weeks.— The Moscow cinema is showing "Gone with the Wind" based on Mitchel's novel.— My friend has already seen it. He says it is a wonderful film. Of course, we mustn't miss it.— Then I shall buy two tickets for the eight o'clock show. Does this time suit you? — Perfectly, thank you. And where shall we meet? — Let's meet at my house at 7 o'clock.— All right. See you soon.

UNIT 9

Exercise I, p. 129

1. I wonder where they usually spend their holidays. 2. I think that she hasn't come yet. 3. I hope that he won't miss the train, though he left for the railway station late. 4. I remember that I went away on business in September. 5. I wonder whether he will speak at the meeting. 6. She says that she doesn't like theatre. 7. I don't know when they will come back. 8. He says he was late for the lecture yesterday. 9. She wants to know at what ho­tel they are staying. 10. She says she has been teaching English for 20 years already. 11. He asks why you don't phone him. 12. Do you know when the train arrives in Warsaw? 13. Do you remember where we rested in 1980? 14. I'm afraid they missed the six o'clock train. 15. Ask her when she will come. 16. Tell him where she lives. 17. I don't know why Robert doesn't write to me. 18. I am not sure whether I shall see her tomorrow. 19. Do you know if there is a post-office not far from here? 20.1 think she will have typed the documents by 5 o'clock. 21. I've no idea what he is doing here. 22. I'm afraid that she has lost her way.

Exercise I, p. 135

1. the train stopped I looked... didn't see; I had sent... I thought... they would meet; they were waiting; We went... didn't find; We thought... something had happened; We had been waiting... we understood... they would not come; they had received... could not; 2. he had gone... who was coming; 3. I went; I took... looked; a waiter came... \ had chosen; I had chosen; I would take; 4. she had enjoyed ... she would spend; 5. I offered, She said... she had a headache... didn't want.

Exercise II, p. 135

1. Yesterday evening my brother called me and asked whether I wanted to go to the cinema. I agreed and I wasn't disappointed.

333

I liked the film very much. 2. I hoped that I would catch the last train, but I missed it. 3. Yesterday on my way home I called on Nick. He said he had just received a telegram from his mother and in an hour he was going to the station to meet her. 4. When I saw Nina, I understood, that she was upset by something. She said that her mother had fallen ill. 5. The other day I met John. He said he had bought himself a new car. 6. When I cal­led on my friend, her mother said that she was not at home: she was taking an exam but she would be back soon. 7. In June my sister and I are leaving for the Caucasus. Our brother said that he would join us as soon as he passed his exams. 8. Yester­day I asked Steve to repair my iron. He said that his friends were waiting for him and he couldn't help me. He promised that he would repair the iron today.— Last month he promised to repair my bicycle, but he never did.— I hope that he will keep his promise this time. 9. I was surprised when I learnt that Robert hadn't passed his exam. He said that he had been preparing for it for a long time. 10. Peter said that he would be waiting for me at the entrance to the stadium and asked me not to be late.

UNIT 10 Exercise V, p. 138

1. Victor wants me to repair his car. 2. I want you to phone Nina and invite her to the party. 3. I don't want him to go with us 4. Do you want me to help you? 5. We didn't want the children to swim in such cold weather. 6. My brother wanted me to book the tickets in advance.

Exercise I, p. 149

It was raining... I woke; It always rains; We had planned... we decided; We had missed...arrived; We had arranged... he had been waiting... we got; The play had already started... we went; I am working; I have been sitting... I haven't done; I feel; I have already had; I went... it rained; I shall book.

Exercise II, p. 150

1. Do you want to go to the theatre on Saturday? — I'd love to. I haven't been at the theatre for a long time. What performance do you suggest? — I'd like to listen to "Carmen".—Who sings the part of Carmen? — Helena Obraztsova.— She is a wonderful actress. Do you think we shall be able to get tickets? — M> friend promised me to get two tickets.— Thank you. That's very nice of you to invite me. I shall be looking forward to the performance.

334

UNIT 11 Exercise VI, p. 154

1. Sorry for bothering you.— That's OK. 2. Sorry, I promised to return the book today but I forgot.— Never mind. You may bring it back tomorrow. 3. I'm sorry I'm late.— Never mind, we'll be on time. 4. I am very sorry that I didn't warn you about my arrival in advance.—That's all right. I'm always glad to see you. 5. Sorry, I have lost your dictionary. I shall buy you a new one.— Don't worry. I've got one more dictionary. 6. Excuse my calling you so late.— Never mind. I have just come home myself. 7. I'm sorry that I didn't help you.— Never mind. I mana­ged myself. 8. Sorry that I didn't call for your coat at the laundromat.— It doesn't matter. You may do it tomorrow 9. I'm so sorry that I have broken your favourite vase.— Forget it.

Exercise VII, p. 158

1. Shall I help you translate the article? —Thank you, I can manage. 2. Shall I switch off the TV set? — Please, do, it's late already. It's time to go to bed. 3. Shall I give you a lift home? — No, thank you. I'd like to walk. 4. May I switch on the tape-recorder? — Please, don't. I'm tired and I want to sleep. 5. Shall I wake you up in the morning? — No, there is no need, thank you.

11 think I shall wake up myself. 6. May I use your pen? — Certainly. 7. Let me help you.— There is no need, thank you. 8. Shall I buy so­me bread on the way home? — Do, please. 9. Shall I repair your

I TV set? — Yes, please, thank you. That's very nice of you.

UNIT 12 Exercise I, p. 172

I rang up... he was preparing; He said., he had packed... he hadn't bought; I promised.. I would help; I was free... I could; He thanked... added... he would be grateful; I brought... my friend started.

Mrs Hudson was...she began; She went... told... she hadn't been feeling; The doctor asked ... she had; She said she had; Her husband had died, Mike had fallen... she was afraid he wouldn't get, Earnest had joined; The doctor advised; her heart was; it wouldn't be .. she would do.

an old lady happened; she stopped; they had talked... the lady observed... she didn't think he was; The man assured...he certainly wasn't; He said... his relatives had sent; The old lady promised... she would look... went; a big piece of wood hit; She turned... saw; she asked what was wrong; he merely wanted.

335

John Robinson had just returned... was having; Dobson rang, he was... his friend had arrived; he felt... was not sure he would be able.

UNIT 13

Exercise I, p. 183

1. Excuse me, sir. Does the 27 bus stop here? — Yes. Where do you want to go? — To the airport.— The 27 will take you there.— Thank you. 2. Excuse me, sir, I'm afraid I'm lost. Can you help me? — Where do you want to go? — To the Minsk hotel.— It is five blocks away from here. Go along this street as far as the traffic lights. Do you see it? — Yes.— Then turn left at the traf­fic lights, walk three blocks and you will see the Minsk hotel.— Thank you.— Not at all. 3. Excuse me, how do I get to the Central Department Store? — Take a number 84 bus and go as far as the Central Department bus stop. It will take you about twenty minutes to get there. Ask somebody to tell you where to get off.— Thank you.— That's О. К. 4. Excuse me, does this bus go to the station? — No, you need the number 31. It will take you straight to the station. 5. What trolley-bus do you take to get to work? — I don't go by trolley-bus. First I take a bus, and then I change for the underground. 6. Could you tell me if there is a post-office not far from here? — Yes, there is one at the end of the street.

UNIT 14

Exercise I, p. 195

Victor asked George where he and his family were going to spend their holidays. George answered that they would go to one of the seaside towns in the Crimea. Victor wanted to know if they had booked the tickets. George said that he was going to do it on the next day. Victor asked how long they wanted to stay there. George answered that they were going to stay there about a month. In his turn George asked Victor where he would rest. Victor said that he wanted to go on a camping trip in the Alps. George was sure that Victor would have a good rest. Victor hoped he would

Exercise II, p. 195

The hostess asked her guest if he would like a cup of tea. The guest said that he would and thanked the hostess. The hostess asked the guest how he would take it and whether he preferred his tea strong or weak. The guest answered that he liked his tea strong and very hot. The hostess wondered how many lumps of sugar he took in his tea. The guest answered that he took four

336

or five lumps of sugar, for he liked his tea very sweet. The hostess asked if he liked milk in his tea. The guest said that he liked milk in his tea when he couldn't get cream.

Exercise I, p. 207

1. Fred asked a porter if the train for London had left and the porter answered that it had left ten minutes before. 2. John told Mary she was the most beautiful girl in the world... and told him not to talk such nonsense. 3. asked him what was wrong with it; told me to throw it away and buy a new one. 4. I asked her if she wanted to go to the cinema with me; she said she had already seen that film. 5. The manager asked me if I liked my work and I answered him that I did. He then asked me why 1 wanted to leave it then, so I told him I was moving to Glasgow. 6. I told him to take the first turning to the left and go as far as the post office. The man asked me how far it was and I told him it was about half a mile at the most.

Exercise II, p. 208

Mr Robinson greeted the Thompsons saying he was glad to see them in London. He asked his friends how long they had been there. Mr Thompson answered that they had been there only a few days, since Monday and he was sorry to say they had to return the follo­wing day. Mr Robinson asked if it was their first visit to London. Mr Thompson answered that it was his wife's first visit, but he had been there several times before. He had to come over at least once a year on business and felt quite at home in London. Mr Robin­son asked Mrs Thompson what she thought of London. Mrs Thomp­son thought it was a wonderful place. Mr Robinson asked the Thompsons about their plans for that night and invited them to his place. Mr Thompson thanked Mr Robinson but he refused saying they were leaving the following morning and they had got a lot of things to do. He said that they might visit the Robin­sons some other time.

Exercise III, p. 208

An old lady was going to take a taxi. She asked the driver to take her to the station. The driver agreed to do so. The lady told the driver that he must drive slowly and carefully. She warned him not to go until the policeman lowered his arm and not to rush round the corners as the road was very wet. The taxi-driver got angry with the woman because of her instructions and he asked her sarcastically what hospital she would like to be taken to if they did have an accident.

337

Exercise IV, p. 208

1. Yesterday I had a day off. I suggested to Ann going to the cinema, but she refused saying that she was getting ready for her exam in German. We agreed to go to the cinema next week. 2. The teacher asked me why I had missed so many lessons. I answered, that I had gone away on business. 3. When I was going to leave, my brother reminded me to bring him a Russian-Spanish dictionary next time. He said that he had to translate an article on electronics. I answered that I would call on him in two days and promised that I wouldn't forget about his request. 4. When I came home, my son was already sleeping. I wanted to talk to him but my wife told me not to wake him up because he was very tired as he had been repairing the car the whole evening. 5. The doctor advised me to spend more time in the open air and not to go to bed late. 6. Nina asked whether I would go to the party, and I answered that I would.

UNIT 15

Exercise I, p. 223

— Hello. My name is Kent. Last week I reserved a single room in your hotel.— Jast a moment. Yes, sir, we got your letter. I can offer you room 46 on the third floor.— Is there a shower in the room? — Yes, there is a bath and a shower.— That's fine. I hope there is a telephone in the room.— Yes, all the rooms in our hotel have got telephones.— That's very convenient. I must make some telephone calls. How much is the room? — 50 dollars a night.— All right. I'll take the room.—Then will you please fill in (out) the registration form? — All right. When do you serve breakfast? — From 7 to 9.30.— Is there a post-office in the hotel? — No, but it's quite near, on the other side of the street.—Thank you.

UNIT 16 Exercise IX, p. 229

1. What foreign language is taught at your Institute? 2. I won­der where this journal is published. 3. I think these books are sold in all shops. 4. What is produced at this factory? 5. This list of articles is recommended for your work. 6. Foreign films are often shown at our Institute. 7. What time is the library closed? 8. We are not allowed to take books out of the reading hall. 9. Is the mail delivered here by plane? 10. Many guests are expected today. 11. He is often sent letters. 12. What is sold at this shop? 13. How much are you paid? 14. Where are meetings usually held? What

338

problems are discussed at the meetings? 15 Where are the docu­ments kept? Who are the documents signed by?

Exercise VIII, p. 231

1. Last year he wasn't sent abroad. 2. When were the tickets booked? 3. When was the post delivered? 4. The agreement was - signed on the tenth of March. 5. Why wasn't he informed about her departure? 6. Where was the conference held? 7. When was the station built? 8. How many letters were received yesterday? 9. We were not invited to the party 10. I wasn't offered a ticket for the concert. 11. Who was this work done by? 12. The guests were shown the laboratories of the institute. 13. This question was discussed at our last meeting. 14. The documents were typed on Friday. 15. The letter was written by my secretary two days ago. 16. The film was much spoken of (about). 17. Who was the article translated by?

Exercise V, p. 233

1. You will be shown a lot of places of interest in our city. 2. Will the letter be sent by air mail? 3. When will the tickets for the concert be sent? 4. When will dinner be served? 5. In what journal will this article be published? 6. She said that the tickets would be booked in a week. 7. The talks will be held in October. 8. I think you will be given a good room at this notel. 9. I hope the work will be completed in time. 10. I am sure that he will be invited to the conference. 11. Where will the meeting be held? 12. I wonder what film will be shown tomorrow. 13. The documents will be sig­ned tomorrow. 14. She won't be told about that.

Exercise I, p. 235

1. Our tourist group arrived; A bus took; we were invited; We 'wanted ...none of us had been; We were shown and told; our tour came... we had learnt; 2. It will be posted; 3. were you taught... you studied; 4. Why didn't they come; I don't know; They were sent; 5. When will the tickets be booked; 6. I reached... I was stopped; 7. Are students allowed; dictionaries are not allowed; 8. A new stadium was built; 9. Are you looking; some gloves were picked up and given; 10. The mother was told; He will be exa­mined; Everything will be; 11. Alice will be invited; 12. When are examinations held; They are held; 13. The old man fell down and broke; He was taken; 14. I was woken; 15. Mr Smith doesn't write... they are written; 16. Are these textbooks used; 17. Where are the journals kept; 18. Everything will be done; 19. Drinks are not served; 20. Who is this article written by; 21. An interesting article will be published; The author of the article has been working; 22. which were received; You will be given; 23. He

339

was asked; He was given; 24. This book will be discussed; A lot ot students will take part; 25. Where is; She was called; 26. He ls always attentively listened to.

Exercise II, p. 235

1. The tourists were shown St. Paul's Cathedral, one of the most beautiful buildings in London. 2. We were taken to the airport by bus. 3. Where will the talks be held? — In Geneva. 4. This novel was translated into Russian two years ago. 5. The delegation was met at the station. 6. Yesterday he was offered an interesting job at a research institute. 7. Go to the desk clerk. You will be given the key to your room. 8. Yesterday I was offered a ticket for this concert but I refused. 9. When will the telegram be delivered? -In two hours. 10. What language is spoken in Australia? — English. 11. When will he be sent a visa? 12. We were given all the necessary instructions. 13 She is highly spoken of. 14. What prob­lems will be discussed at the conference? 15. When was the floor painted?

Exercise IV, p. 237

1. What is going on in the sitting-room? — The TV set is being repaired there. 2. There is nobody in the lobby. The guests are being shown the Institute. 3. Can I have a look at the test paper? — No, it is still being typed. 4. The room is untidy. The things are still being packed. 5. A new stadium is being built in our town.

6. Your proposal is still being discussed. 7. Why is it so cold here? — The hall is being aired. 8. Don't enter the room. The floor is being painted there.

Exercise VI, p. 238

1. The lecture was very interesting, and the speaker was being listened to with great attention. 2. When I returned to Minsk the Palace of Sports was still being built. 3. When Pr. Brown came his proposal was being discussed 4. An interesting concert was being broadcast at 5 o'clock yesterday. 5. When I joined the group of tourists, they were just being told about the history of the town. 6. When I returned my article was still being typed

7. There were a lot of people in the street. A government delega­tion was being met.

Exercise VII, p. 241

1. The letter hasn't been posted yet. 2. The doctor has already been sent for. 3. Have the newspapers been delivered yet? — Not yet. 4. Has your house ever been repaired? — Yes, it was repaired five years ago. 5. May I take the documents? — I'm afraid not.

They haven't been typed yet. 6. Be careful. The doors have just been painted. 7. Nina is pleased She has been offered an inte­resting job. 8. The telegram has just been received. It's on the desk. 9. Ann is leaving for Italy. She has already been sent a visa.

Exercise IV, p. 242

1. I was very glad when I learned that my son had been invited to take part in the international conference on electronics in Ge­neva. 2. I had to wait. The secretary said that the documents hadn't been signed yet. 3. Yesterday I met Ann. She said she had been sent a parcel and she was going to the post-office to get it. 4. By the evening all the things had been packed. 5. Little Kate was happy. She had been given a box of chocolate. 6. She was disappointed. She hadn't been sent an invitation to the party. 7. When I returned the article had already been translated.

Exercise III, p. 243

1. The work will have been done by the end of the month.

2. The letters will have heen typed by the time you return.

3. By the time you come back the experiment will have been comple-ted. 4. Come at 5. The documents will have been signed by that

time. 5. All the invitations will have been sent by the end of the week. 6. The telegram will have been delivered by II o'clock.

Exercise I, p. 246

1. Where is; It is being; It will be brought; 2. the door had already been locked; 3. tractors are produced; 4. Not a word was said; 5. Her favourite record has been broken; 6. The house has been painted; 7. my watch has been stolen; it will be found; 8. The results of the experiment are being discussed; 9. the documents hadn't been signed; 10. his device was being tested; 11. I have just been offered; 12. were you sent; 13. Where was the conference held; how long did it last; Did you hear; 14. It has never been used; 15. The school will have been built; 16. The article will have been translated; 17. John lives in Manchester. His girl­friend Mary is studying; She has been staying; John went; He is; He has just received; It was; you had gone I felt; I really enjoyed: I took... it was; The papers are being marked; I pass I'll get; I'll be able to get; You didn't tell; You said you were working; we had; We went...that was opened; Everyone was... the course had been completed; I'm going to miss... I've made here; you'll meet.

341

Exercise II, p. 247

1. Don't worry. Your children will be looked after if you return late. 2. Have the journals been brought yet? — Yes, they were brought two hours ago. 3 When I came, the guests were being shown the laboratories of the institute. 4. By the end of the week all the books had been sold. 5. We were expected on Wednesday but we came on Monday. 6. Meetings are held in this hall. 7. What question was being discussed when you came? 8. A new bridge is being built near the railway station 9 As soon as the documents are signed, we shall send them to Moscow. 10. The floor in this room has never been painted. 11. I shall be glad if my article is typed in your journal 12. He was glad because he had been promised help. 13. When and where will the conference be held? 14. I was sure that he wouldn't come unless he was invited. 15. I was offered a ticket for the concert, but I refused. 16. Stu­dents of medical institutes are taught Latin. 17. We were being shown slides when the dean came

UNIT 17

Exercise I, p. 256

of; on; -; to; on; by; at; before; on; at; at; to; for; to; from; into; to; -; in; -; at.

Exercise II, p. 256

— Good afternoon. — Good afternoon. What can I do for you? — Are there any trains to Moscow today? — Yes, there are two night trains.— When do they start? — At 9 and 11 o'clock.— When does the nine o'clock train arrive in Moscow? — At 7 a. m.— That time suits me. Are there any tickets for that train? — Yes, there are some first class tickets.— I'm lucky.

UNIT 18

Exercise I, p. 269

1. went...who was coming; I arrived...went ...sat; it was announ­ced... the plane was... I decided; I was just walking... I saw; We talked... went... we had; I remembered; We rushed; I was told... the plane from Paris had arrived; I hurried .. got... drove; I arrived... I found.

Exercise II, p. 269

— Good morning! Will you tell me if there is a flight to London on the 25 th of October? — Yes, there are two flights — in the morning and in the evening.— When is the morning flight? —

342

At 6 a. m.— No, it's too early. I shall have a sleepless night if I go by that plane. When is the evening flight? — At 8 p. m.— When does the plane arrive in London? — At 10 p. m.— This time suits me. Are there any tickets for that flight? — Yes, there are some first class tickets.— I'd like a return ticket. I'm coming back on the 30 th of October.

UNIT 19

Exercise IV, p. 273

— I haven't passed my English exam.— 1 think you should work harder.— Yes, certainly. 2. I have a heavy suitcase.— You should leave it in the left luggage office.— I'll do that. 3. I'm get­ting overweight. I don't like it.— Why don't you go in for sports? — Thank you. That's a good idea. 4. I'd like to go to Brest for the weekend.— You should book a ticket in advance.— Thank you. I'll do that. 5. You'd better translate the text tomorrow morning. It's too late now.— I want to finish it today. 6. You shouldn't spend so much time on reading. You'd better spend more time in the open air.— You are right. 7. I'm going to phone Robert tomorrow.— Why don't you phone him today? — He won't be at home. He said he was going away on business for a couple of days and would be back only tomorrow. 8. You must help Ann with mathematics.— Yes, certainly. 9. Why don't you buy a house at the seaside? — We are just going to do that. 10. You look very pale. You ought to consult a doctor.— I'll certainly do that.

Exercise I, p. 283

1. This is the house I live in. 2. This is the ring he gave me. 3. The car which was found yesterday belongs to her brother. 4. The vase that was standing here was broken yesterday. 5. The man she is talking to is my boss. 6. The girl who brought the telegram looked very tired. 7. This is the hotel which was built last year. 8. The man you are speaking about is in the next room. 9. That is the student we saw at the theatre yesterday. 10. The book I'm reading is very interesting. 11. Yesterday I met my old school mate whom I recognized at once. 12. He is the most interesting man I've ever met. 1Э. This is the thing I need. 14. There are a lot of people in our office who speak English well. 15. The student whose notebook I showed you studies very well. 16. Where is the letter I gave you to read? 17. He picked up the parcel which she had drop­ped. 18. Here is the money you lost 19. This is the town I was born in. 20. He is the man who helped me. 21. This is the news that surpri­sed everybody. 22. Who is the girl you are looking at? 23. This is the school I studied in.

343

UNIT I GRAMMAR: REVIEW OF TENSES

Present Continuous and Simple Present

Present Continuous is used to:

— talk about something which is in progress at the moment of speaking

"Where are the children?" "They're playing in the gar­den."

"What are you doing at the moment?" "I'm writing a letter."

You can switch off the TV. I'm not watching it. Look, there's Sally. Who is she talking to? "Where is Margaret?" "She's having a bath." Let's go out now. It isn't raining any more, (at a party) Hello, Ann. Are you enjoying the party?

— talk about something which is in progress around the present, but not necessarily at the moment of speaking

She's looking for a job at the moment.

Please don't take that book. Ann is reading it.

Andrew is spending a lot of time in the library these days,

as he's writing an article.

Have you heard about Tom? He's building his own house.

— talk about something which is in progress for a limited period around the present (temporary state, current situ­ations)

Robert is on holiday this week. He's staying with his sis­ter in Bournemouth.

"You're working hard today." "Yes, I have a lot to do." They are living in Hong Kong for the time being. I can't phone Peter. The phone isn't working. Dick is a student, but he's working as a barman during the holidays.

— talk about situations which are changing or developing around the present

Your children are growing up very quickly. Computers are becoming more and more important in our lives. The population of the world is rising very fast.

— talk about planned future arrangements

She's arriving at the airport tomorrow at noon. I'm having lunch with Helen tomorrow. We're spending next winter in Australia. We're leaving at ten o'clock on Friday. I'm meeting Janet later this evening.

— express a habit, to talk about something that happens more often than is normal, (repeated actions with adverbs like always, forever, constantly and continually) It can express a pleasant habit.

I like Peter. He's always smiling. He's always giving people things.

However, there's usually an element of criticism.

She's always grumbling. (I find it annoying.)

You're forever losing things. (You lose things too often.)

He's constantly complaining about something.

The secretary is always phoning her friends during office

hours. (She phones her friends too often.)

It is also possible to say: The secretary always phones her friends during office hours.

This is a more neutral comment and not necessarily a criticism. We put always, forever, constantly and continually before the main verb.

Jenny is constantly (always, forever, continually) arguing with her father.

— give a commentary on a performance or activity She's taking off her tracksuit and ...

Comment on the uses of the Present Continuous.

1. I'm always paying for your coffee. Why can't you pay for a change? 2. We're spending next winter in Australia. 3. Don't rush me. I'm working as fast as I can. 4. We're enjoying our holiday here very much. 5. Young people are becoming more and more politically aware these days. 6. Ben and Patty are in London on holiday. They are staying at a small hotel near Hyde Park. 7. I'm meeting Sue on Saturday evening. 8. You are constantly panicing, aren't you? Calm down. 9. Is he arriving tomorrow? 10. What are you drinking? It looks awful. 11. She is always helping people. 12. She is still waiting to see the boss. 13. He is always upsetting people by asking personal questions. 14. She is running 1,500 metres in the next Olympics. 15. What is Maria doing these days? — She is studying English at a school in London. 16. She is forever forgetting to lock the front door. 17. He's hurrying to catch his train. 18. Prices are rising all the time. Everything is getting more and more expensive. 19. Tom isn't playing football this season. He wants to concentrate on his studies. 20. Is your English getting better? 21. I'm having treatment on my bad back for a few weeks. 22. He's always lying. You can't believe a word he says. 23. Let's go out now. It isn't raining any more. 24. Please be quiet. I'm trying to concentrate. 25. My sister is very busy these days. She's writing an article. 26. I'm learning English at evening classes this year. 27. Jennifer's always losing her key. 28. Are you seeing Nigel tomorrow? 29. I'm living with friends until I find a place of my own. 30. You are spending a lot of money these days.

Simple Present is used to:

— talk about repeated actions or habits (habitual actions)

I have a shower every morning.

Most evenings my parents stay at home and watch TV.

Do you go to the cinema very often?

What time does Kate finish work?

How often do you go to the dentist?

In summer Tom usually plays tennis twice a week.

Ann doesn't often drink coffee.

— talk about situations which are permanent (continuing for a long time)

Mr and Mrs Shaw live in Bristol. (That is their permanent

home.)

Barry works in a shop.

She wears expensive clothes.

— talk about general truths

Summer follows spring.

The River Amazon flows into the Atlantic Ocean.

It rains a lot in Britain in March and April.

— give instructions

You turn left at the corner. First you weigh the ingredients.

— tell a joke or a story, to describe the dramatic action of a play (dramatic use)

The Englishman goes to the Irishman and says...

— talk about fixed future events (timetables, calendar)

Our plane leaves at nine. The course ends in two weeks. The World Cup begins tomorrow. What time does the film start?

— make suggestions

Why don't they go on a day-trip? Why don't you join us?

— make commentaries

Becker serves (подаёт мяч) to Lendl.

— make observations and declarations

I hope so. I love you. It says here that...

Simple Present is also used with certain verbs not normally used in the continuous forms. These verbs are called stative. They refer to states rather than actions.

These are the groups of verbs:

1. verbs of the mind and thinking: believe, think, consider, understand, suppose, expect, agree, know, remember, forget, doubt, mean, mind

What do you think of that book?

I believe you are the man I'm looking for.

She knows now what she has done wrong.

Paul doesn't mind if you use his car.

Do you remember me now?

I see the point. = I understand the point.

He feels that he is right. = He is of the opinion that he

is right.

2. verbs of emotion and feeling: like, dislike, hate, love, want, wish, prefer, care

I like playing football.

I hate getting up early in the morning.

3. verbs of the senses :see, smell, taste, hear

I hear the sound of gun-fire. The cake smells good. The wine tastes sweet.

4. verbs of possession: have, possess, belong to, own

I have two sisters.

He owns a Rolls Royce.

The book belongs to me.

She doesn't possess a thing in the world.

5. certain other verbs: concern, depend on, include, need,

owe,seem and others

I need a bath.

. That doesn't concern me. A newspaper costs about 20 p.

Some of these verbs can be used in the continuous tenses when the verb expresses an activity, not a state. However the meaning changes slightly.

Compare:

I think it's a great idea, (think as opinion, i.e. a state) He's thinking of emigrating, (think as mental process, i.e.an activity)

The soup tastes delicious, (a state) I'm tasting the soup to see if it needs more salt, (an acti­vity)

I expect you'd like something to eat. (expect meaning suppose)

She's expecting a baby. (She's pregnant.) Jane has a car. (possession)

The Browns are having dinner at the moment, (an acti­vity),

Some of the stative verbs can be used in the continuous form when they show that a process is taking place gradually or that a situation is temporary or unusual:

I'm on holiday in Blackpool and I'm loving every minute of it.

I'm slowly remembering all the details of the accident. You're being very silly.

Comment on the uses of the Simple Present.

1. Nurses look after patients in hospitals. 2. Why don't you give up smoking? 3.1 am weighing myself. I weigh 65 kilos. 4. This coat belongs to you. 5. She drives to London once a week. 6. Can he manage? — I hope so. 7. She loves her baby more than anything. 8.1 occasionally eat meat. 9. Do you see that bird over there? 10.1 wear old clothes at home. 11. The car stops outside the National Bank. Three men get out and the driver stays in the car. The three men walk into the bank and take out their guns. 12. Vegetarians don't eat meat or fish. 13. Let me explain what you have to do. First you take the photos and sort them into categories. Then you file them according to subject. 14.1 often forget things. 15. Why doesn't he take up tennis? 16. Gases expand when heated. 17. Something smells strange. 18. We drink a lot of tea. 19. My uncle works in a factory. 20. The coach leaves at 6 this morning. 21. You know what I mean. 22. Do you like the

10

music? — Yes, it's nice. 23.1 always go out on Sundays. 24. The concert starts at 7 next Friday. 25. They pay $60 a week rent. 26.1 need two notebooks. 27. We sit here every evening. I sometimes read a book. 28. He laughs a lot. 29. Ellis throws the ball in to Snow, but he loses it. 30. Watson gives the ball to Tanner. Tanner goes past two men, he shoots, but the ball hits a Liverpool player. 31. Does he seem unfriendly? 32. He never gets up early. 33. I have a car, but I don't use it very often. 34. How many cigarettes do you smoke a day? 35. What time do banks close in England? 36. If you need money, why don't you get a job? 37. I play the piano, but I don't play very well. 38. The earth goes round the sun. 39. How often do you write to your parents? 40. You cook it for five minutes, and then you put the onions in. 41. What do you think of the film? 42.1 cry at sad films. 43. The sun rises in the east. 44. I think you are right. 45. My car doesn't go very fast. 46. Does Brazil export cocoa? 47. Hot air rises. 46. It's not right, you know — I agree. 49.1 hear a bird. It is singing. 50. I'm hungry. I want a sandwich. 51. The conference starts on June 3 rd and finishes on June 10th. 52. She works from Mondays to Fridays. She doesn't work at weekends. 53. How often do you go swimming?— I go about once a week. 54. Loud music gives me a headache.

Present Continuous (I'm doing) or Simple Present (Ido)?

Present Continuous (/ am doing) Simple Present (/ do)

Use the Present Continuous to talk Use the Simple Present to talk

about something which is happening about things m general or things

at or around the time of speaking: which happen repeatedly:

The kettle is boiling. Can you rum Water boils at 100 degrees Celsius.

it off?

Listen to those people. What Excuse me, do you speak English?

language are they speaking?

"Where's Tom?" "He's playing Tom plays tennis on Saturday.

tennis."

(you find a stranger in your room) What do you usually do at weekends?

What are you doing here? What do you do? (= What's your job?)

Silvia is m Britain for three Most neonle learn to swim when

months. She's learning English. they are children.

Use the Present Continuous for Use the Simple Present for a

a temporary situation: permanent situation:

I'm living with some friends until My parents live in London. They

I can find a flat. have been there for 20 years.

The machine isn't working. It That machine doesn't work. It hasn't

broke down this morning. worked for years.

I'm sleeping on a sofa these days I always sleep eight hours every

because my bed is broken. night.

Self check

I. Complete the following dialogues by using the words in parentheses. Also give short answers to the questions as necessary. Use the Simple Present or the Present Continuous.

1. A: (Mary, have) a bicycle?

B: Yes,.... She (have) a ten-speed bike.

2. A: (It, rain) right now?

B: No,... . At least, I (think, not) so.

3. A: (You, like) sour oranges? B: No,... . I (like) sweet ones.

4. A: (Your friends, write) a lot of letters?

B: Yes,.... I (get) lots of letters all the time.

5. A: (The students, take) a test in class right now? B: No,.... They (do) an exercise.

6. A: (You, know) Tom Adams? B: No,.... I've never met him.

7. A: (Your desk, have) any drawers? B: Yes,.... It has six drawers.

8. A: (Jean, study) at the library this evening?

B: No,.... She (be) at the student union. She (play) pool

with her friend.

A: (Jean, play) pool every evening? В: No,.... She usually (study) at the library. A: (She, be) a good player?

B: Yes,.... She (play) pool three or four times a week. A: (You, know) how to play pool? B: Yes,.... But I (be, not) very good.

12

A: Let's play sometime.

B: Okay. That sounds like fun.

П. Complete the sentences by using the words in parentheses. Use the Simple Present or the Present Continuous. Some of the sentences are negative. Some of the sentences are questions. Supply the short answer to a question if necessary.

1. A: Shhh. I (hear) a noise. (You, hear) it too? B: Yes,.... I wonder what it is.

2. A: Ron, (be) this your hat?

B: No,.... It (belong, not) to me. Maybe it (belong) to Kevin.

Why (you, not, ask) him? A: Okay.

3. A: Johnny, (you, listen) to me?

B: Of course I..., Mom. You (want) me to take out the gar­bage. Right? A: Right! And right now!

4. A: (You, see) that man over there?

B: Which man? The man in the brown jacket?

A: No, I (talk) about the man who (wear) the blue shirt.

B: Oh, that man.

A: (You, know) him?

B: No, I (think, not) so.

A: I (know, not) him either.

5. A: Shhh.

B: Why? (The baby, sleep)?

A: Uh-huh. She (take) her afternoon nap.

B: Okay, I'll talk softly. I (want, not) to wake her up.

6. A: A penny for your thoughts. /О чем вы задумались?/ В: Huh?

A: What (you, think) about right now?

B: I (think) about English grammar. I (think, not) about

anything else now. A: I (believe, not) you! B: But it's true.

III. Complete the sentences. Use the Simple Present or Present Continuous.

Г. Alice (take, not) the bus to school every day. She usually (walk) instead. (Take, you) the bus to get to school every day, or

13

(walk, you)? 2. It (rain, not) right now. The sun (shine). (Rain, it) a lot here? 3. Right now I (look) at the board. (I, see) some words on the blackboard. 4. I (need) to call my parents today and tell them about my new apartment. They can't call me because they (know, not) my new telephone number. 5. The tea is good. I (like) it. What kind is it? I (prefer) tea to coffee. How about you? 6. Right now the children (be) at the beach. They (have) a good time. They (have) a beach ball and they (play) with it. They (like) to play catch. Their parents (sunbathe). They (try) to get a tan. . They (listen) to some music on a transistor radio. They also (hear) the sound of sea gulls and the sound of the waves. 7. Right now I (think) about sea gulls and waves. I (think) that sea gulls are beautiful birds. 8. Sam is at the library. He (sit) at a table. He (write) a composition. He (use) a dictionary to lookup the spelling of some words. The dictionary (belong, not) to him. It (belong) to his roommate. Sam (look) up words in the dictionary because he (want) to make sure that he doesn't have any misspelled words in his paper.

9. A: Which colour (prefer, you), red or blue? B: I (like) blue better than red. Why? A: According to this magazine article I (read) right now, people who (prefer) blue to red (be) calm and (value) ho­nesty and loyalty in their friends. A preference for the colour red (mean) that a person (be) aggressive and (love) excitement. B: Oh? That (sound) like a bunch of nonsense to me.

10. A: (Believe, you) in flying saucers? B: What (talk, you) about?

A: You know, spaceships from outer space with alien crea­tures aboard. B: In my opinion, flying saucers (exist) only in people's

imagination.

11. Janice: What (write, you) in your notebook?

Diane: I (make) notes about questions I want to ask the

teacher.

Janice: (Prepare, you, always) so thoroughly for every class? Diane: I (try, always) to.

12. Bob: Jack really makes me angry! Sue: Why?

Bob: Well, for one thing, he (interrupt, always) me. I can

14

barely get a whole sentence out of my mouth. Sue: Is that all? Bob: No. He (ask, always) me to do his homework for him.

I have enough homework of my own without doing

his homework too!

13. Mother: Susie! Get your fingers out of the dessert! What

(do, you)?

Susie: I (taste) the cake. It (taste) good. Mother: Well, you'll just have to wait until dinnertime. You

can have some then.

14. This morning it (rain). I can see Janet from my window. She (stand) at the corner of 5th and Pine. She (hold) her umbrella over her head. She (wait) for the bus. 15. Right now I (look) at Janet. She (look) angry. I wonder what's the matter. She (have) a frown on her face. She certainly (have, not) any fun right now. 16.1 can't afford that thing. It (cost) too much. 17.1 (own, not) an umbrella. I (wear) a waterproof hat on rainy days. 18. The house is in a mess, because we've got the workmen in. The plumber (put) in a new bath, the electricians (rewire) the system, and the carpenter (build) us some new bookshelves. 19. You (hear)ihe wind? It (blow) very strongly tonight. 20. You (see) my car keys anywhere? — No, I (look) for them but I (not see) them. 21. Why you (walk) so fast today? You (walk, usually) quite slowly. — I (hurry) because I (meet) my mother at 4 o'clock and she (not like) to be kept waiting. 22. You (recognize) that man? — I (think) I have seen him before but I (not remember) his name. 23. Look at that crowd. I (wonder) what they (wait) for. 24. Stop! You (not see) the notice? — I (see) it but I can't read it because I (not wear) my glasses. What it (say)? — It (say), "These premises are patrolled by guard dogs." 25. You (need) another blanket or you (feel) warm enough? 26. It (save) time if I (take) the path through the wood? — No, it (not matter) which path you take. 27.1 (save) up because I (go) abroad in July. 28.1 (think) it is a pity you don't take more exercise. You (get) fat. 29. The plane that you (look) at now just (take) off for Paris. 30. Tom never (do) any work in the garden; he always (work) on his car. — What he (do) in his car now? — I (think) he (polish) it. 31. That film (come) to the local cinema next week. You (want) to see it? 32. How Peter (get) on at school? — Very well. He (seem) to like the life. 33. Why Mrs Pitt (look) so angry? — Mr Pitt (smoke) a

15

cigarette and (drop) the ash on the carpet. 34. This is our itinerary. We (leave) home on the 8th, (arrive) in Paris on the 9th, (spend) the day in Paris, and (set) out that night for Venice. — That (sound) most interesting. You must tell me all about it when you (get) back. 35. This story is about a boy who (make) friends with a snake which he (find) in his garden. Then he (go) away but he (not forget) the snake and some years later he (return) and (look) for it. He (find) the snake who (recognize) its old friend and (coil) round him affectionally. But, unfortunately, the snake is by now a full-grown boa-constrictor and its embrace (kill) the poor boy. — The snake (feel) sorry about this? — I (not know). The story (end) here. 36. How you (end) a letter that (begin), "Dear Sir"? — I always (put), "Yours truly", but Tom (prefer) "Yours faithfully". 37. What the word "catastrophe" (mean)? — It (mean) "disaster". 38. What you (wait) for? — I (wait) for the shop to open. — But it (not open) till 9.00. — I (know) but I (want) to be early as their sale (start) today. 39. Why you (smoke) a cigar, Mrs Pitt? You (not smoke) cigars as a rule. —-I (smoke) it because I (want) the ash. This book (say) that cigar ash mixed with oil (remove) heat stains from wood. 40. Who (own) this umbrella? — I (not know). Everybody (use) it but nobody (know) who (own) it. 41. You (mind) if I (ask) you a question? — That (depend) on the question. — It (concern) your brother. — I (refuse) to answer any questions about my brother. 42. The last train (leave) the station at 11.30. 43. You (enjoy) yourself or would you like to leave now? — I (enjoy) myself very much. I (want) to stay to the end. 44. How you (get) to work as a rule? — I usually (go) by bus but tomorrow I (go) in Tom's car. 45. Why you (put) on your coat? — I (go) for a walk. You (come) with me? — Yes, I'd love to come. You (mind) if I bring my dog? 46. You (belong) to your local library? — Yes, I do. — You (read) a lot? — Yes, quite a lot. — How often you (change) your books? — I (change) one every day. 47. You (like) this necklace? I (give) it to my daughter for her birthday tomorrow. 48. These workmen are never satisfied; they always (complain). 49. You (write) to him tonight? — Yes, I always (write) to him on his birthday. You (want) to send any message? 50. Tom and Mr Pitt (have) a long conversation. I (wonder) what they (talk) about. 51. You (believe) all that the newspapers say? — No, I (not believe) any of it. — Then why you (read)

16

newspapers? 52. This car (make) a very strange noise. You (think) it is all right? — Oh, that noise (not matter). It always (make) a noise like that. 53. The fire (smoke) horribly. I can't see acfoss the room. — I (expect) that birds (build) a nest in the chimney. — Why you (not put) wire across the tops of your chimneys? — Tom (do) that sometimes but it (not seem) to make any difference. 54. The children are very quiet. Go and see what they (do). — They (cut) up some $ 5 notes. 55. What you (wait) for? — I (wait) for my change; the boy just (get) it. 56. I can't hear what you (say); the traffic (make) too much noise. 57. She always (lose) her glasses and(ask) me to look for them. 58. Someone (knock) at the door. Shall I answer it? — I (come) in a minute. I just (wash) my hands. 59. You (do) anything this evening? — No, I'm not. — Well, I (go) to the cinema. Would you like to come with me? 60. We (have) breakfast at 8.00 tomorrow as Tom (catch) an early train. 61. They (dig) an enormous hole just outside my gate. — What they (do) that for? — I don't know. Perhaps they (look) for oil. 62. What (make) that terrible noise? — It's the pneumatic drill. They (repair) the road. 63. (You sit) comfortably? Good! I (hope) you (study) this text carefully because I (have) news for you. The Guiness Book of Records (not include) records for eating any more. People who (try) to swallow 47 hard boiled eggs in half a minute will have to do it for pleasure and not to get into the record book. "We (regard) these records as unhealthy," said the book's editor, Mr Donald McFarlan. 64. We (hope) you (enjoy) this marvellous weather as much as we are. We (sunbathe) and (go) swimming every day. Next week we (go) boating. 65. The play is set m London in 1890. The action (take) place in Sir Don Wyatt's mansion. When the curtain (go) up, the hero and heroine (sit) in the lounge. They (argue).

66. Ann sees Tom putting on his coat and says: Where you (go), Tom?

Tom: I (go) to buy some cigarettes. You (want) an evening paper?

Ann: No, thanks. You always (buy) cigarettes, Tom. How many you (smoke) a day?

Tom: I (not smoke) very many—perhaps 20. Jack (smoke) far more than I (do). He (spend) £10 a week on ciga­rettes.

67. Mary (see) Peter standing at the bus stop.

Mary: Hello, Peter. What bus you (wait) for?

Peter: Hello, Mary. I (wait) for a 9 or a 14.

Mary: You usually (go) to work by car, don't you?

Peter: Yes, but the car (belong) to my mother and she some­times (want) it. She (use) it today to take Bob to the dentist.

Mary: I usually (go) by car too. Jack (take) me because he (pass) my office on his way to the factory. But this week he (work) in a factory in the opposite direction, so I (queue) like you.

Peter: Here's a 9 now. You (come) on it or you (wait) for a 14?

Mary:I (think) I'll take the 9. If I (wait) for a 141 may be late, and if you (be) late at my office everyone (look) at you.

68. Mary and Ann (wait) outside a telephone box. Inside the box a boy (dial) a number.

Mary: You (know) that boy?

Ann: Yes, he's a friend of my brother's. He (phone) his

girl friend every day from this box. Mary: Where he (come) from? Ann: He (come) from Japan. He's a very clever boy; he

(speak) four languages. Mary: I (wonder) what he (speak) now. Ann: Well, his girl friend (come) from Japan too; so I

(suppose) he (speak) Japanese.

69. It is 8.30. Tom and Ann (have) breakfast. They both (open) their letters.

Tom: No one ever (write) to me. All I (get) is bills! You (have)

anything interesting? Ann: I've got a letter from Hugh. He (say) he (come) to

London next week and (want) us to meet him for

lunch.

70. Peter: You (have) traffic wardens in your country? Pedro: No, I (not think) so. You (not see) them in my town

anyway. What exactly a traffic warden (do)? Peter: He (walk) up and down the street and if a car (stay) too long at a parking place or (park) in a no-parking area he (stick) a parking ticket to the wind­screen. Look! He (put) a ticket on Tom's car. Tom

18

will be furious when he (see) it. He (hate) getting parking tickets.

71. What (happen) in your class? The teacher (give) lectures every day? No. He (give) one lecture a week, and on the other days he (show) films or (discuss) books with us.

72. Why that man (stand) in the middle of the road? —

He (try) to get across. He (wait) for a gap in the traffic. — Why he (not use) the subway? —

Lots of people (not bother) to use the subway. They (prefer) to risk their lives crossing here.

73. You (wear) a new coat, aren't you? — Yes. You (like) it? —

The colour (suit) you but it (not fit) you very well. It's much too big.

74. Ann (on telephone): You (do) anything at the moment, Sally?

Sally: Yes. I (pack); I (catch) a plane to New York in three

hours' time. Ann: Lucky girl! How long you (stay) in New York?

75. Jack: I just (go) out to get an evening paper.

Ann: But it (pour)! Why you (not wait) till the rain (stop)?

76. Mrs Jones: My daughter never (write) to me so I never

(know) what she (do). Your son (write) to you, Mrs Smith? Mrs Smith: Yes, I hear from him every week. He (seem)

to like writing letters. 77.1 (see) my solicitor tomorrow; I (change) my will. —

You always (change) your will. Why you (not leave) it alone?

78. You (look) very thoughtful. What you (think) about? — I (think) about my retirement. —

But you're only 25. You only just (start) your career. — I (know); but I (read) an article which (say) that a sensible man (start) thinking about retirement at 25.

79. Jack: How much longer you (stay) in England?

Paul: Only one more day. I (leave) tomorrow night. I (go)

to Holland for two weeks. Jack: And you (come) back to England after that or you

(go) home? Paul: It (depend) on my father. But if he (agree) to let me

go on studying here I'll certainly come back. And

I (expect) he will agree. By the way, Jack, Ann

19

(see) me off at Victoria tomorrow. Why you (not come) too? You could have coffee with her after­wards.

80. What all those people (do) in the middle of the street? And why they (wear) such extraordinary clothes? —

They (make) a film. Most of the crowd are local people who

(work) as extras. —

It (sound) great fun. You (think) I could get a job as a film

extra? —

I (not know) but I (see) Ann over there; when they (finish)

this scene I'll ask her if they still (take) on extras. —

Ann (act) in the film? —

She has a small part. She (not act) very well. I (imagine) she

got the part because she (know) the director.

81. Mrs Jones: What you (look) for, Tom?

Mr Jones: I (look) for the garage key. I always (look) for the garage key, because nobody ever (put) it back on its hook.

Mrs Jones: I always (put) it back on its hook. Why you (not try) your pockets?

82. Imagine that you (travel) by train, in a crowded compartment. One of the passengers (read) a newspaper; another (do) a crossword puzzle; another (look) out of the window. Suddenly the train (stop) with a jerk and your suitcase (fall) off the rack on to somebody's toes.

83.1 (hear) that you have bought a new house. —

Yes, but I (not live) in it yet. They still (work) on it, and the

work (take) longer than I expected. —

I (think) repair jobs always (take) longer than one (expect).

IV. Translate from Russian into English.

1. Позвони ему сейчас. Я думаю, он еще не спит. 2. Я сей­час много работаю. Я сдаю экзамены. 3. Он не видит, что я на него смотрю. Он читает что-то с большим интересом. 4. Где Нина? — У нее урок английского языка. У нее всегда анг­лийский по пятницам. 5. Давай пойдем прогуляемся. Дождя нет. 6. Мой брат работает инженером на заводе. Он говорит, ему очень нравится его работа. 7. Ваша дочь ходит в школу? — Да, она в пятом классе. — Вы помогаете ей по математике? —

20

Постоянно. 8. Мой отец хорошо знает английский язык. Он читает английские книги без словаря. 9. Послушай. Зво­нит телефон. 10. Мой сын плохо успевает в школе. Он тра­тит слишком много времени на спорт и слишком мало вре­мени на уроки. 11. Где ты обычно проводишь отпуск? — В Белоруссии. Мои родители живут там. — Там есть река или озеро? — Там есть большое и красивое озеро. Я хорошо про­вожу там время. 12. Мой брат живет далеко от меня. Я не часто его вижу. 13. Куда ты торопишься? — В кино. Мой друг ждет меня около кинотеатра. 14. Кому принадлежит этот дом? — Это дом моего дяди. 15. Сколько стоит этот магни­тофон? — 200 долларов. 16. С кем она разговаривает? — Со своим начальником. 17. Мой брат дипломат. Он часто ездит за границу. 18. Мужчина так пристально смотрит на вас. Вы его знаете? 19. Что ты слушаешь? — Я слушаю народные песни, я очень люблю их. 20. У моего брата есть автомо­биль, но я никогда им не пользуюсь. Я хочу купить свой ав­томобиль. 21. Позвони на вокзач и узнай, когда приходит по­езд из Берлина. 22. Я не люблю ее. Она постоянно ворчит. 23. Ты часто пишешь своим родителям? — Каждую неде­лю. 24. Не бери эту книгу. Мой брат читает ее. 25. Темне­ет. Включи свет. 26. Я никогда не езжу на работу. Я всегда хожу пешком. 27. Ты идешь в университет? — Нет. Я иду в библиотеку. 28. Она очень рассеянная. Она постоянно теря­ет вещи. 29. Моя сестра живет сейчас в Москве. Она там учится в Московском университете. 30. Дождь все еще идет? — Да. 31. Мы уезжаем в пятницу в 8 часов утра. Мы встречаем­ся на вокзале в 7.30. 32. За что он ей так нравится? — Она говорит, что он добрый и умный. 33. Вы помните меня? Мы вместе учились в институте. 34. Почему бы нам не поехать за город в воскресенье? — Хорошая идея. 35. Том сейчас очень занят. Он строит гараж. 36. Когда приезжает твой отец? — Через неделю. 37. Что ты думаешь об этом филь­ме? — Он скучноват. 38. О чем ты думаешь? — Я думаю о своем детстве. 39. В котором часу закрывается магазин? — В восемь. 40. Когда начинается спектакль? — В семь часов вечера. 41. Какие товары экспортируе г ваша страна⁹ 42 Над чем вы смеетесь? — Том рассказал нам смешную историю. 43. Он никогда не пропускает занятия без уважительных при­чин. 44. Мои родители сейчас на море. Они хорошо прово-

21

дят время. 45. Что ты ищешь? — Ключи от машины. 46. По­чему ты меня не слушаешь? Это очень важно. 47. Неужели ты не любишь футбол? Это такая захватывающая игра. 48. Я завтра встречаюсь с Аней. Мы играем в теннис. 49. Что ты здесь делаешь"? — Просматриваю новые журналы. Я делаю это каждую неделю. 50. Почему вы изучаете английский? — Собираюсь поехать за границу на несколько месяцев. Кроме того, английский мне нужен для научной работы. 51. О чем они говорят? — Думаю, они обсуждают итоги конференции. 52. Ты можешь выключить телевизор. Я не смотрю его. 53. Кто присматривает за твоими детьми, когда ты на работе? — Как правило, моя мать. Она сейчас не работает. 54. Почему ты так сердит? Почему ты кричишь на меня? 55. Она не любит мясо, она предпочитает рыбу. 56. В ее диктанте много оши­бок, хотя обычно она делает мало ошибок. 57. Конференция начинается 8 июня и заканчивается 14 июня. 58. Где Аня? — Она принимает душ. 59. Почему ты не пишешь ей? — Я не знаю ее адреса. 60. Она не знает, когда приедет ее брат. 61. Ты часто видишь Аню, не так ли? — Нет, она сейчас живет за городом. 62. Сколько иностранных языков знает Джон? — Если не ошибаюсь, два. А сейчас он учит арабский. — Прав­да? Он нужен ему для работы? — Да. Он собирается в Еги­пет. 63. Следующий поезд отправляется в 10 часов. Ты мо­жешь успеть на него, если поспешишь. 64. Интересно, чем она сейчас занимается.

Fluency

Listen, read and practise.

1. John: Do you see that man over at that table in the comer?

What's he doing? Ian: He's having an argument with the waiter. I think he's

complaining about his soup. John: You're right. He's shouting at the waiter. He's saying

that it tastes terrible. Can you hear what he's saying

now? Ian: Yes. He's telling the waiter there's a fly in his soup.

He doesn't see why he should pay for it.

22

2 Wife: Oh, don't put your coat on that chair! You' re al -ways leaving your clothes around. It's so un­tidy!

Husband: OK! OK! Calm down. Don't let's have an argu­ment. You are always complaining these days. Wife: I'm not surprised — living with you! Husband: Come on! You're forever telling me to relax. Why

don't you try it?

3. Tom: I'm flying to New York at the weekend. I'm stay­ing at a hotel with my Uncle Joe and Aunt Jane. He's an artist and she's a photographer. Nick: What's the hotel called?

Tom: The New York Tower. It has a restaurant at the top. The restaurant turns round eighteen times a day so you can see the whole city. An orchestra plays there in the evening.

A Week in Vlctor's life

John: Tell me, Victor, what do you do Sundays?

Victor: On Sunday I try to sleep late.

John: And on weekdays?

Victor: Unfortunately, I never have much peace on week­days, because I must work.

John: Work? You?

Victor: Yes, I'm a student of English — like you!

John: OK, Victor. What exactly do you do on weekdays?

Victor: On Monday morning I play golf.

John: Golf?

Victor: Yes. And on Monday afternoons I go swim­ming at the swimming pool. I need to relax after my game of golf.

John: Oh, yes.

Victor: On Tuesdays and Wednesdays, after my serious music lessons at the music school I am a singer in a rock group.

John: Stop! Stop! Please ... enough! What do you do on Thursdays?

Victor: I rest all day long. I wake up in the evening to set my alarm-clock for lunch-time on Friday. On

23

a letter

Fridays I go to the library to meet my friends to organise a picnic in the country among the birds and the bees and the flowers and the trees.

John: Please, Victor. But there's one thing I don't under­stand. When do you learn English?

Victor: A quarter of an hour every evening, in a com­fortable armchair, with my video English method and a large glass of orange juice!

A. Ask questions on the text.

B. Imagine you are Victor. Tell about your week routine. Your friends will ask you some more questions to get additional infor­mation.

C. Ask each other questions about a week in your lives.

D. Tell your partner what you usually do during the week. Your partner will ask you some questions to get some details.

E. Which of the members of your family is the busiest? What is his/her week like?

Dear Mum and Dad,

How are you? The camp is OK. The weather is horrible. It is raining. We are all writing letters. What's the weather like at home? We get up every morning at a quarter to eight and have a shower. The water is always cold. It's really horrible!

Then we get dressed and have breakfast at half past eight. Breakfast is nice. We have three different sorts of cereal, bacon and eggs, toast and marmalade and tea.

After breakfast we go riding or canoeing. We have a morning break at eleven o'clock. We usually have orange juice and biscuits. Then we have free activities.

We have lunch at half past one. We have hamburgers and chips or fish and chips but the chips aren't very nice. In the afternoon we usually play football or volleyball. Tea is at four o'clock and after tea we ride on the mini motorbikes. They are great!

We have supper at seven. After supper we watch a video or have a disco. We can play our own cassettes. Bedtime is at half

24

past nine. I am in a very big room with seven other girls. Our monitor is called Louise but we call her Lulu.

We're both all right and we aren't homesick! (I am a little bit, Andy.)

Love from Kate and Andy

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Describe the children's rest at the camp.

C. This is a passage from another letter. Tina's mother is writing a letter to a friend.

I'm sitting on the beach, eating an ice cream. Tina and Jack are swimming in the sea and Max is in the park, playing with a friend. Tom's listening to the radio and reading. We're having a fantastic holiday. Abercwim is a little fishing village in North Wales with a park, a castle, some Roman remains and some lovely gardens, and there's a little fishing port with a light-house. Everybody here is really friendly. I think we're lucky. This is our second holi­day this year and we're doing just what we want to do: sleeping, eating and playing games. The food is lovely too.

D. You 're on holiday in the south. Write a postcard to your friend describing a) your usual day b) what you and your family are doing at the moment.

Happy birthday to you

Mike: Hello?

Sue: Hello, Mike. I'm ringing you up to wish you a happy

birthday. Mike: Sue, what a fantastic surprise! Where are you phoning

from? I can hear you so clearly. I thought you were in

Spain.

Sue: Yes, I am. And I'm having a marvellous time here. Mike: What's the weather like? It's pouring with rain here. Sue: It's absolutely boiling. I'm living in my bikini, and

getting really brown. Mike: Lucky you. Hey, where are you ringing from? I can

hear people laughing and talking in the background.

25

Sue: Ah, that's because I'm in a cafe by the beach. Jill and I are having a drink here and writing our postcards. I'm sending you one, so that you can see what it looks like here. I wish you were here, Mike. I can see the beach from where I'm standing. There are thousands of people sunbathing, and there's ...

Mike: Hey, stop. You're making me jealous. There's nothing interesting happening here. Everybody's complaining and saying what an awful summer we're having.

Sue: Oh, dear — still, I expect you're getting a lot of work done. How's it going?

Mike: Oh, fine. I'm working on the last article now. Actually, at this very moment I'm having a break and making myself some coffee. Good God, that reminds me. Can you hold on a moment? The kettle's probably boiling. Just a tick.

Sue: Hey, Mike, don't go. I'd better ring off now. This is cos­ting me a fortune. I'll ring you again in a few days, OK?

Mike: Right. Thanks for remembering my birthday. I'm feeling better already. Look after yourself. Miss you.

Sue: Me too. Goodbye.

Mike: Bye.

A. Questions

1. Where is Sue at the moment? 2. What is she doing in Spain? 3. Is she alone there? 4. Why is Sue calling Mike? 5. Is Sue enj oying her holidays? 6. Why does Mike feel j ealous? 7. How is Mike doing?

B. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities.

C. Give the appropriate English phrases from the text.

Откуда ты звонишь? Береги себя. Я работаю над по­следней статьей. Скучаю по тебе. Ты вызываешь у меня зависть. Я звоню тебе, чтобы пожелать счастливого дня рождения. Какой замечательный сюрприз! Я думал, что ты в Испании. Я прекрасно провожу время. Какая пого­да? Здесь льет дождь. Все жалуются и говорят о том, ка­кое ужасное у нас лето. Здесь страшная жара. Спасибо, что не забыла о моем дне рождения. Я полагаю, что ты

26

продвигаешься со своей работой. Я уже чувствую себя лучше. Я позвоню тебе через несколько дней, хорошо? Я отчетливо гебя слышу. Жаль, что тебя здесь нет. Тысячи людей загорают на пляже. Подожди минутку. Тебе везет. Я слышу, как смеются и разговаривают люди. Мы здесь пьем напитки и пишем почтовые открытки. Здесь ниче­го интересного не происходит. Как продвигаются дела? В этот самый момент я отдыхаю. Это напомнило мне. Я лучше положу трубку. Мне это дорого стоит.

D. Give a brief account of the conversation.

E. Roleplay the conversation.

F. Situation: You are having your holidays at the seaside. At the moment you're phoning your mother. She wants to know whether you're having a good time.

G. Tell the class how you usually spend у our holidays.

What are you Doing here?

Barbara Cooper is in Milan on a business trip. She is sitting in a small cafe outside the central station waiting to catch a train to Florence. Suddenly she sees an old school friend, Martha Hunt, walking past the cafe.

Barbara: Martha! Martha: Barbara!

Barbara: What are you doing here? You live in Manchester, don't you?

Martha: Yes, that's right. I do. But I'm having a week's holiday

here. Barbara: What? Here in Milan?

Martha: Yes, I'm visiting a friend. You know him actually-

Roger.

Barbara: Yes. I remember Roger.

Martha: Well, he's working here as a freelance journalist. Barbara: Is he? That must be fun.

Martha: Well, he says he's enjoying it. What about you? What are you doing here? Having a holiday as well?

27

Barbara: No, not me. I'm working. I'm looking for some

new shoe designs for the shop. Martha: Oh, yes. I read about you in the Old Cliftonians'

magazine. You're the manageress of a shoe shop now,

aren't you?

Barbara: Yes, that's right. It's doing quite well, in fact. Martha: Which hotel are you staying at, by the way? Barbara: Well, I'm not staying in Milan any more. I'm catching the

train to Florence in half an hour. In fact I must go soon. Martha: Oh, that's a pity. Anyway, I must go too. I must try

and come and see you in Bristol one day. Barbara: Yes, do. And give my regards to Roger. Martha: Yes, I will. Well — look after yourself, don't work

too hard.

Barbara: No, I won't. Have a nice holiday, by the way! Martha: Thanks. Bye, Barbara.

A. Questions

1. Where are Barbara and Martha at the moment? 2. What are they doing in Milan? 3. How long are they staying in Milan?

B. Read the text and comment on the uses of the Simple Present and Present Continuous.

C. Give the appropriate English phrases from the text.

Должно быть, это интересно. У меня поезд во Фло­ренцию через полчаса. Передай привет своему другу. Между прочим, в какой гостинице ты остановилась? Меня больше не будет в Милане. Я здесь неделю от­дыхаю. Ты гаже здесь отдыхаешь? Ты заведуешь обув­ным магазином, не так ли? Фактически наш магазин преуспевает. Жаль. Я должна постараться навестить тебя в Бристоле когда-нибудь. Я навешаю друга. Я ищу новые образцы обуви для магазина. Он говорит, что ему это нравится. Позаботься о себе, не работай слиш­ком много. Хорошего тебе отдыха.

D. Ask detailed questions on the text. Your partner will answer the questions.

E. Give a brief account of the conversation.

28

F. Roleplay the conversation.

G. Situation: You are in London on business. You happen to meet your former classmate who has come to London to take part in a conference. You start talking.

Cathy and Steve

Cathy and Steve are engaged, but unfortunately Cathy lives in Sussex and Steve in Yorkshire. It is nine o'clock on Saturday morning, when the phone rings beside Steve's bed. He is still asleep.

Steve: Hello?

Cathy: Hello dear, where are you?

Steve: Where all civilized people should be at this time on a Saturday morning — in bed.

Cathy: Lazy thing!

Steve: What do you mean "lazy thing"? I earn my rest. I work jolly hard, you know.

Cathy: Of course you do, dear.

Steve: What about you? What are you doing?

Cathy: At the moment I'm drinking a cup of coffee and talking to my lazy fiance, but later I'm going shop­ping. That's what I want to talk to you about.

Steve: Mmm.

Cathy: I'm getting the curtains for the bedroom. Steve: Good.

Cathy: Do you like the idea of pale green? Steve: That sounds all right.

Cathy: Plain... then there won't be any problem when we come to buy the carpet. But I want to order the curtains today, because Aunt Phyllis is staying, and she's giving us the curtains as a wedding present. So we're going toge­ther to choose the material. Steve: That's a good idea. Cathy: What are you doing today? Steve: Well, this morning I've got a little shopping to do, then this afternoon I'm going to the football with Jim. Cathy: All right. Love, enjoy yourself. Bye. Steve: Same to you. Bye.

29

A. Questions

1 . Do Cathy and Steve see one another every day? If not, why not? 2. Why isn't Steve at work when the phone rings? 3. What does Cathy call Steve? 4. How does he defend himself? 5. What is Cathy doing while she's talking to Steve? 6. What is she planning to buy? 7. Is she planning to buy flowered material? S.Where is Steve going this afternoon?

B. Read the conversation. Comment on the uses of the Present Continuous and Simple Present.

C. Give a brief account of the conversation.

D. Roleplay the conversation.

old Arthur

Everyone knows him as Old Arthur. He lives in a little hut in the middle of a small wood, about a mile from the village. He visits the village store twice a week to buy food and paraffin, and occasionally he collects letters and his pension from the post office. A few weeks ago a reporter from the local newspaper interviewed him. This is what he said:

I get up every morning with the birds. There is a stream near my hut and I fetch water from there. It's good, clear, fresh water, better than you get in the city. Occasionally, in the winter, I have to break the ice. I cook simple food on my old paraffin stove; mostly stews and things like that. Sometimes I go to the pub and have a drink, but I don't see many people. I don't feel lonely. I know this wood very well, you see. I know all the little birds and animals that live here and they know me. I don't have much money, but I don't need much. I think I'm a lucky man.

A. Questions

1. Where does Old Arthur live? 2.Who interviewed him re­cently? 3. How far is it to the village? 4. How often does Arthur go into the village?-5. What does he buy from the village store? 6. What does he collect from the post office? 7. Where does he get his water from? S.What does he say about the water in the stream? 9. What does he cook on?

B. Give short answers to the following questions.

1 . Is Arthur quite old? 2. Is he a lonely man? 3. Is the store in the village? 4. Is the water in the stream clean? 5. Does old Arthur see many people? 6. Does he get his water from a tap? 7. Does he like the birds and animals in the wood? 8. Does the stream sometimes freeze in winter? 9. Does Arthur cook on an electric stove? 1 0. Does he get his pension from the post office?

C. Imagine that you are interviewing Old Arthur. These are the answers he gives to your questions. What were the questions you asked him?

1 . In a little hut in the wood. 2. At the village store. 3. On my old paraffin stove. 4. Yes, I go there occasionally for a drink. 5. From the stream. 6. No, I never feel lonely. 7. Not much, my eyes aren't too good. 8. No, I haven't got a radio. 9. No, I was an only child, and my parents died when I was quite young. 10. No, I don't believe in doctors.

D. Situation: You are interviewing Old Arthur on his life in the wood. Add more details about Arthur's life.

E. Make up negative statements.

eg He only sees a few people. not/many He doesn't see many people.

1 . He only visits the village store twice a week. not/every day

2. He only breaks the ice on the water occasionally. not/often

3. He only collects his letters from the post office once a month.

not/every week

4. He cooks on a paraffin stove. not/a gas stove

5. He lives in a hut in the wood. not/an ordinary house

6. He gets his water from the stream. not/ a tap

7. There is no television in his hut.

30

31

not/television

8. There is no radio in his hut. not/radio

9. He usually feels quite cheerful, not/miserable

10. He only has one cooking pot. not/complicated meals

F. Speak on Arthur's life. What do you think of this sort of life? Do you think Arthur is really a lucky man?

G. Speak on the advantages and disadvantages of living in a village.

H. Do you have any friends or relatives who live in a village? Who are they? What do they do? What is their life in the country like? Have you got a country house? Where is it? Have you got any conveniences in the house? Do you like life in the country?

David in the Snowstorm

In London it doesn't often snow, but when it does, life becomes very difficult for everyone. Cars have to go very slowly because the roads are covered in ice and wet snow, so there are traffic jams, and lots of people arrive late for work. The snow usually melts quickly and this makes the pavements dangerous and unpleasant to walk on. Only children really like the snow.

David works in the local library. He usually goes to work by bus, but this morning he's walking because there don't seem to be any buses. He is wearing his winter coat and a scarf, but it is still snowing and the wet snow is trickling down his neck, and making him feel very uncomfortable. He's looking forward to having a nice, hot cup of coffee.

A. Questions

1. Does it often snow in London? 2. What effect does the snow have on people's lives? 3. What happens to cars? 4. Do people arrive at work on time? 5. Does the snow melt quickly? 6. What is the result of the snow melting? 7. Who likes the snow very much? 8. Where does David work? 9. Why is he walking to work today? 10. What is he wearing? 11. What is trickling down

32

his neck? 12. What effect is this having on him? 13. What is David looking forward to?

B. Now dose the book and ask your own questions on the text.

C. What do you know about the English weather? What is the weather in your country like? What do you like winter (summer, autumn, spring) for? What don't you like about each season of the year?

D. Situation: David and you are talking about the weather inyour countries.

A. Dау in the life of Takashi Tackashimi

Takashi Takashimi, a fashion designer from Tokyo, talks to Margot Townsend.

I get up at about ten o'clock. I don't like getting up early. I never eat breakfast — I sometimes have a cup of tea. I eat nothing during the day. I just don't feel hungry at all.

I live about eight minutes from the office near Shibuya. I drive to the office every morning in my car — a black BMW. I always wear black or navy blue. I sometimes wear a white shirt or T-shirt but no bright colours.

I work from about noon till seven in the evening. I don't mind working late. Before a fashion show I usually work until eleven or twelve at night. I eat out in restaurants about six nights a week. I hate going to new restaurants. I usually go to a few old favourites.

I live with my daughter, who's eighteen. The house is always untidy. She doesn't like cooking or cleaning and nor do I! I spend no time at all in my house — it's not a big part of my life.

I usually stay in Tokyo at the weekend. I don't mind that because I hate making plans. The traffic in Tokyo is terrible but sometimes I just get in my car and drive.

I travel a lot. My work has taken me to different parts of the world.

A. Questions

1. Does Takashi get up early or late? 2. What colour clothes does he like wearing? 3. What sort of restaurants does he hate

going to? 4. Why is his home untidy? 5. Why does he spend his weekends in Tokyo? 6. Does he travel a lot?

B. What is Takashi's average day like? Is it very different from yours?

C. Situation: You and your friend are speaking about your daily routine.

Past Continuous and Simple Past

Simple Past is used to:

— talk about a past event which took place at a definite point in time

We went to the theatre last night.

Shakespeare died in 1616.

Did you have a good time on holiday?

When did she come?

Who saw Peter yesterday?

What did you do at the weekend?

Why didn't you phone me on Tuesday?

Why were you so angry?

Was Tom at work on Friday?

— describe past states and habits

I smoked forty cigarettes a day till I gave up. He lived in Rome for ten years, (but not now)

— narrate events in sequence

We got home, opened the door and found the house empty. He left the hotel, took a taxi and drove to the theatre. The manager entered the office, sat down at the desk and began to look through the morning mail. When I arrived at the railway station I went to the booking office and bought a ticket.

— report statements and questions

He said that he was a stranger. She asked if I knew her brother.

— tell a story

There was once a man who lived in a small house in the country. One day he left his house and went into town. On his way he met...

*

past Continuous is used to:

— talk about something which was in progress at a past time. The action had started but it had not finished at that time.

"What were you doing at 6 o'clock last night?"

"I was watching the news on television."

Between 10 and 11 this morning I was reading.

I saw you yesterday evening. You were waiting for a bus.

Was Sue working at ten o'clock yesterday morning?

— talk about temporary actions in progress in the past

I was living abroad in 1987. It was raining all night.

— talk about actions which were in progress when something else happened

As/Just as/When/While I was leaving, the phone rang. While/When/As/Just as she was paying for the petrol, a boy stole her wallet from her car.

These are often introduced by conjunctions like when, as, just as and while, but the shorter action can be introduced by when:

We were having supper when the phone rang.

— talk about actions in progress at the same time

While I was reading, Joan was playing the piano.

— give background to an event

I looked out of the window. It was raining.

It was a warm summer day. The sun was shining and the

birds were singing.

— talk about arrangements in the past

Everybody was excited because they were leaving for Paris the next day.

— talk about repeated actions that happened too often

When I worked here I was always making mistakes. She was constantly breaking the dishes.

Past Continuous is also used in polite inquiries.

I was wondering if you could give me a lift.

Used to (/ used to do)

We use used to+infinitive to talk about past habits which are now finished.

Robert used to play football when he was younger, but he stopped playing 20 years ago. (= Robert played football regularly in the past, but he does not play now.)

More examples:

Kate used to go swimming a lot, but she never goes swim­ming now.

"Do you go to the cinema very often?" "Not now, but I used to."

We also use used to for past states and situations which are no longer true.

Robert used to be very slim when he was younger. I used to live in London, but I moved in 1980.

We only use used to to talk about the past. The negative of used to is normally didn 't use to (= did not use to)

I didn't use to live in London.

Jack didn't use to go out very often until he met Jill.

We also use never used to eg You never used to like classical music.

We normally form questions with did...use to... 1

Where did you use to live?

Did you use to like classical music?

Note: When we talk about past habits we can also use would.

36

When we were children we used to/would play Cowboys and Indians together.

When I was a child, my elder brother used to/would take me to the cinema every Saturday morning.

When we talk about past states, we can use used to, but not •would.

My grandfather used to be a policeman, (not: My grand­father would be...)

Self check

I. Use the Simple Past or the Past Continuous Tense.

1.1 (hear, not) the thunder during the storm last night because I (sleep). 2. It was beautiful yesterday when we went for a walk in the park. The sun (shine). A cool breeze (blow). The birds (sing). 3. My brother and sister (argue) about something when I (walk) into the room. 4. I (get) a package in the mail. When I (open) it, I (find) a surprise. 5. Stanley (climb) the stairs when he (trip) and (fall). Luckily, he (hurt, not) himself. 6. While Mrs Emerson (read) the little boy a story, he (fall) asleep, so she (close) the book and quietly (tiptoe) out of the room. 7.1 really (enjoy) my vacation last January. While it (snow) in Iowa, the sun (shine) in Florida. While you (shovel) snow in Iowa, I (lie) on the beach in Florida. 8. It was my first day of class. I (find, finally) the right room. The room (be, already) full of students. On one side of the room, students (talk, busily) to each other in Spanish. Other students (speak) Japanese, and some (converse) in Arabic. It (sound) like the United Nations. Some of the students, however, (sit, just) quietly by themselves. I (choose) an empty seat in the last row and (sit) down. In a few minutes, the teacher (walk) into the room and all the multilingual conversation (stop). 9. When I (arrive) she (have) lunch. She (apologize) for starting without me but said that she always (lunch) at 12.30.10. He (wear, always) a raincoat and (carry) an umbrella when he walked to the office. 11.1 (share) a flat with him when we were students. He (complain, always) about my untidiness. 12. He suddenly (realize) that he (travel) in the wrong direction. 13. He (play) the guitar outside her house when someone opened the window and (throw) out a

37

bucket of water. 14.1 (open, just) the letter when the wind (blow) it out of my hand. 15; The burglar (open) the safe when he (hear) footsteps. He immediately (put) out his torch and (crawl) under the bed. 16. The boys (play) cards when they (hear) their father's step. They immediately (hide) the cards and (take) out their lesson books. 17. He (not allow) us to go out in the boat yesterday as a strong wind (blow). 18. The traffic (make) so much noise that I couldn't hear what he (say). 19. She (stand) at the bus-stop. I asked her what bus she (wait) for. 20. When I (hear) his knock I (go) to the door and (open) it, but I (not recognize) him at first because I (not wear) my glasses. 21. While the guests (dance) thieves (break) into the house and (steal) a lot of fur coats. 22. She was very extravagant. She always (buy) herself new clothes. 23. Her mother often (tell) her that she (spend) too much money but she never (listen). 24. Mr Smith never (wake) up in time in the mornings and always (get) into trouble for being late; so one day he (go) to town and (buy) an alarm clock. To get home he (have) to go through a field where a bad-tempered bull usually (graze). This bull normally (not chase) people unless something (make) him angry, ynfortunately, as Mr Smith (cross) the field, his alarm clock (go) off. This (annoy) the bull, who immediately (begin) to chase Mr Smith. Mr Smith (carry) an open umbrella as it (rain) slightly. He (throw) the umbrella to the ground and (run) away as fast as he could. The bull (stop) and (begin) to attack the umbrella. While he (do) this Mr Smith escaped. 25. Why you (interrupt) me just now? I (have) a very interesting conversation with Mr Pitt. 26. As they (walk) along the road they (hear) a car coming behind them. Tom (turn) round and (hold) up his hand. The car (stop). 27. While he (make) his speech the minister suddenly (feel) faint. But someone (bring) him a glass of water and after a few minutes he (be able) to continue. 28.1 (see) you yesterday from the bus. Why you (use) a stick? — I (use) a stick because I had hurt my leg that morning falling off a horse. — Whose horse you (ride)? 29. How you (damage) your car so bad­ly? —-1 (run) into a lamp-post yesterday. — I suppose you (drive) too quickly or were not looking where you (go). 30.1 just (write) a cheque when I (remember) that I (have) nothing in the bank 31. He (say) that he (build) himself a house and that he (think) it would be ready in two years. 32. Why you (lend) him that book⁹ I (read, still) it. — I'm sorry. I (not know) that you (read, still) it

33. You (hear) what she just (say)? — No, I (listen, not). I (think) about something else. 34. Why you (not be) at the meeting? — I (wait) for an overseas call from my family. 35. I'm sure you met Carol Jones at the party last night. — I don't remember her. What (wear, she)? 36. How (break, you) your arm? — I (slip) on the ice while I (cross) the street in front of the dorm. 37. Peter and Ann . (decide) to redecorate their sitting-room themselves. They (choose) cream paint for the woodwork and apricot for the walls. When John (look) in to see how they (get) on, Ann (mix), the paint, and Peter (wash) down the walls. They (be) glad to see John and (ask) if he (do) anything special that day. He hastily (reply) he (go) to the theatre and (go) away at once, because he (know) they (look) for someone to help them. They (begin) painting, but (find) the walls (be) too wet. While they (wait) for the walls to dry, Ann (remember) she (have) a phone call to make. Peter (start) painting while she (telephone), and (do) a whole wall before Ann (come) back. He (grumble) that she always (telephone). Ann (retort) that Peter always (complain). They (work) in silence for some time. Just as they (start) the third wall, the doorbell (ring). It (be) a friend of Peter's who (want) to know if Peter (play) golf the following weekend. He (stay) talking to Peter in the hall while Ann (go) on painting. At last he (leave). Peter (return), expecting Ann to say something about friends who (come) and (waste) valuable time talking about golf. But Ann nobly (say) nothing. Then Peter (think) he would do the ceiling. He just (climb) the step ladder when the doorbell (ring) again. Ann (say) she (get) tired of interruptions but (go) and (open) the door. It (be) the postman with a letter from her aunt Mary, saying she (come) to spend the weekend with them and (arrive) that evening at 6.30. 38. We (not get) much sleep last night because the people next door (have) a noisy party. I (ring) up the landlord and (say) that his tenants (make) too much noise. He (point out) that it (be) Saturday and that people in his house often (have) parties on Saturday nights. 39. What you (do) before you (get) this job? — I (work) for Brown and Company. — And how long you (stay) with them? — I (stay) for about six months. I (leave) because they always (go) on strike. It (become) quite monotonous. 40. How you (break) your leg? — I (fall) off a ladder when I (put) up curtains. The worst of it (be) that it (be) just before the holidays and I (go) away, (had planned to go away) — So you

(not go) away? — No, of course not. I (cancel) my bookings and (spend) the holiday hobbling about at home. 41. My neighbour (look) in last night and (say) that he (leave) the district and (go) to Yorkshire to a new job. I (say) I (be) very sorry that he (go) and (tell) him to write to me from Yorkshire and tell me how he (get) on. 42. As the goalkeeper (run) forward to seize the ball a bottle (strike) him on the shoulder. 43. It (snow) heavily when he (wake) up. He (remember) that Jack (come) for lunch and (decide) to go down to the station to meet him in case he (lose) his way in the snowy lanes. 44. It (be) midnight and I (be) alone in the house. Outside it (rain) very hard. I (get) ready to go to bed when I suddenly (hear) a strange noise outside my room in the corridor. Then, when I (look) at the door, I (notice) that someone (turn) the handle! I (rush) over to the door and quickly (turn) the key in the lock. Then I (ask) in a trembling voice, "Who is it?" 45. When I (introduce) Tom to Ryan, they (shake) hands and (smile) at each other. 46. Chris (hurt) his finger when he was making his dinner last night. He accidentally (cut) it with a sharp knife.

II. Translate from Russian into English.

1. Вчера вечером шел сильный дождь, и мы не смогли пойти на стадион. 2. Я не ожидал тебя здесь встретить. Ко­гда ты приехал? 3. Я не успел на поезд в 10 часов и мне при­шлось ждать следующего целый час. 4. Мы не поняли друг друга. Я ждал его в здании университета, а он в это время ждал меня на улице. 5. Стюардесса попросила пассажиров пристегнуть ремни, так как самолет шел на посадку. 6. Ты вчера вечером был дома? — Нет, я ходил в театр. Мне очень понравился спектакль. Игра актеров была великолепной. 7. Когда ты был в отпуске последний раз? — Прошлой зи­мой. — Как ты его провел? — Прекрасно. Ходил на лыжах, катался на коньках. 8. Когда ты позвонил вчера, я был занят. Я переводил наш новый контракт. 9. Вчера я опоздал на урок английского языка. Когда я пришел, студенты писали сочи­нение. 10. Аня подмела пол, вымыла посуду, а потом стала готовить домашнее задание. 11. Вчера мы купались, загорали, катались на лодке, играли в теннис. Мы очень хорошо прове­ли время. 12. Шел ли дождь, когда ты вышел из дома? 13. Он спускался вниз по лестнице, когда я его увидел. 14. С кем ты

40

разговаривал, когда я встретил тебя в коридоре? 15. Что ты де­лала, когда я позвонила тебе вчера вечером? — Я готовила ужин. 16. Ты была вчера дома в 5 часов? — Нет, я была в университете. В это время я сдавала экзамен по грамматике. 17. В то время как я искал ключи в гостиной, моя жена иска­ла их в столовой. 18. Она без конца била посуду. 19. Она веч­но жаловалась. 20. Почему тебя не было на собрании вчера? — Я должен был встретить сестру на вокзале. 21. Когда ты виде­ла его в последний раз? — Неделю назад в библиотеке. 22. Пока я готовила обед, мой муж чинил автомобиль. 23. Ко­гда ты писал родителям в последний раз? — Месяц назад.

24. Мы жили в Москве 10 лет, а потом переехали в Минск.

25. Когда я вошел в зал, студенты все еще обсуждали первый доклад. 26. Мальчик ловил рыбу, когда он упал в воду. 27. Пять лет назад я имел обыкновение рано вставать. 28. Неделю на­зад я потерял свои очки, но два дня спустя я нашел их. 29. Стоял прекрасный летний день. Светило солнце и пели птицы. 30. Он был очень занят, когда я его видел, так как на следующий день он уезжал в командировку. 31. Почему ты был так сердит на него? 32. В прошлую субботу мой отец ходил на рыбалку и поймал много рыбы. 33. Почему ты не позвонил мне? — Я вернулся домой слишком поздно. 34. Кто видел вчера Елену? — Я. 35. Какие журналы он хотел пока­зать мне? — Я не знаю. 36. Вчера весь вечер они обсуждали планы на летний отпуск. 37. Вы работали на этом заводе три года тому назад? 38. Вы просмотрели вчера эти документы? 39. Мы ужинали, когда моя старшая сестра вернулась из уни­верситета. 40. Где ты встретил Анну? — Я встретил ее около библиотеки, когда возвращался домой. 41. Кто купил пода­рок для Джейн? — Ник. 42. Сколько писем вы напечатали вчера? — Двадцать. 43. Когда часы пробили двенадцать, мы пошли спать. 44. Я обедал, когда он мне позвонил. 45. Куда ты ходила после занятий? — В универмаг. 46. Когда он вер­нулся из Лондона? — Неделю тому назад. 47. Он ведь пока­зал тебе свою новую квартиру? 48. Дождь шел с пяти до се­ми. 49. Петр просматривал газеты, в то время как Аня смот­рела телепередачу. 50. Ты переводил статью весь вечер, не так ли? — Да, статья довольно трудная, и мне пришлось мно­гие слова смотреть по словарю. 51. Когда я пришел, маши­нистка все еще печатала мои документы. 52. В прошлом го-

41

ду было много снега? — Да. 53. Когда вы получили это пись­мо? — Вчера утром. 54. Погода была хорошая, и дети попро­сили меня повести их в парк. 55. На уроке английского язы­ка преподаватель задавал вопросы, а мы отвечали на них. 56. Я прочитал изложение сестры. В нем было несколько ошибок. 57. Где вы его видели на прошлой неделе? — Мы видели его в театре. 58. Кто навестил вас вчера? — Друзья моего сына. 59. Где ты была сегодня после обеда? Я прихо­дила к тебе, но тебя не было дома. 60. В котором часу ты сегодня обедал? — Я обедал в два. 61. Он пожал мне руку и пожелал успеха в работе.

Fluency Listen, read and practise.

'Jane isn't very Pleased

John rang Jane last week. He wanted to invite her to the theatre. She was free on Friday, so they arranged to meet outside the theatre at seven. It was raining and John came twenty minutes late. Jane wasn't very pleased. They saw a thriller, but it wasn't very good. In fact, it was awful. They went to an Italian restaurant after the theatre and had pizza and wine. The pizza was terrible and the wine wasn't very good. John found he didn't have any money, so Jane paid for the meal. It was late when they came out of the restaurant and there were no buses and no taxis, so they walked home in the rain. John rang again the following Saturday to invite Jane to the cinema. Jane said she wasn't free.

A. Questions

1. When did John ring Jane the first time? 2. What did he want to do? 3. When was Jane free? 4. What time did they arrange to meet? 5. What was the weather like? 6. When did John arrive? 7. Was Jane pleased? 8. What did they see? 9. What was it like? 10. Where did they go after the theatre? 11. What did they have? 12. Was the pizza good? What about the wine? 13. Who paid? 14. How did they get home? 15. What did John do the

42

following Saturday? 16. Was Jane free? 17. Why do you think she said she wasn't free?

B. Retell the text.

What's the Matter?

Yesterday Helen woke up at seven thirty. She had a quick shower, a cup of coffee, got into her car and drove to work. She found a parking space outside the office door. "That's very strange," she thought as she walked up to the front door of the office building; usually there were a lot of cars outside the office and she left her car in another street.

The door was locked when she tried to open it. This was very unusual. She looked at her watch... it was exactly nine o'clock! "The door is never locked at nine o'clock," she said to herself. She took out her key and unlocked the door.

As she walked into the office, Helen saw that all the windows were closed. It was summer and her secretary opened the windows and curtains when she arrived in the morning. But Helen's secretary wasn't at her desk this morning. "Is there anybody here?" she shouted nervously. There was no answer.

Helen went to her office and sat down behind her desk. What was the matter? Where was everyone? Then she saw her diary on the desk. "Oh no!" she said. "Today is Sunday!"

A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.

B. Have you ever had any experience of this sort?

'Reward for Virtue

My friend, Herbert, has always been fat, but things got so bad recently that he decided to go on a diet. He began his diet a week * ago. First of all, he wrote a long list of the foods which were forbidden. The list included most of the things Herbert loves: butter, potatoes, rice, beer, milk, chocolate and sweets. Yesterday I paid him a visit. I rang the bell and was not surprised to see that Herbert was still as fat as ever. He led me into his room and hurriedly hid a large parcel under his desk. It was obvious that he Was very embarrassed. When I asked him what he was doing, he

43

smiled guiltily and then put the parcel on the desk. He explained that his diet was so strict that he had to reward himself occasionally. Then he showed me the contents of the parcel. It contained five large bars of chocolate and three bags of sweets!

A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.

Do the english Speak engdish?

I arrived in London at last. The railway station was big, black and dark. I did not know the way to my hotel, so I asked a porter. I not only spoke English very carefully, but very clearly as well. The porter, however, could not understand me. I repeated my question several times and at last he understood. He answered me, but he spoke neither slowly nor clearly. "I'm a foreigner," I said. Then he spoke slowly, but I could not understand him. My teacher never spoke English like that! The porter and I looked at each other and smiled. Then he said something and I understood it. "You'll soon learn English!" he said. I wonder. In England, each man speaks a different language. The English understand each other, but I don't understand them! Do they speak English?

A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.

a Private Conversation

Last week I went to the theatre. I had a very good seat. The play was very interesting but I did not enjoy it. A young man and a young woman were sitting behind me. They were talking loudly. I got very angry. I looked at the man and the woman angrily. They did not pay any attention. In the end I could not bear it. I turned round again. "I can't hear a word!" I said angrily. "It's none of your business," the young man said rudely. "This is a private conversation!"

A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.

too late

The plane was late and detectives were waiting at the airport all morning. They were expecting a valuable parcel of diamonds

44

from South Africa. A few hours earlier, someone had told the police that thieves would try to steal the diamonds. When the plane arrived, some of the detectives were waiting inside the main building while others were waiting on the airfield. Two men took the parcel off the plane and carried it into the Customs House. While two detectives were keeping guard at the door, two others opened the parcel. To their surprise, the precious parcel was full of stones and sand!

A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.

an experience on the tube A woman is talking about her experience on the tube. I was travelling from Hamburg to London. In fact it was on my way from Heathrow. I was very tired and I was looking forward to getting home. As I was walking along the platform I saw two men walk up behind a young woman. She was carrying her handbag over her shoulder. It was open. I was carrying two suitcases, but I walked quickly and came up behind the two men. As one of them took the purse out of the handbag, I told him to put it back. He dropped it immediately, turned and ran. A. Ask questions on the text. Retell the text.

an adventure

It was a typical summer afternoon; the sun was beating down, the cars were creeping slowly round the corner of the park. Five or six children were playing in the stream by the fountain, jumping in and out of the water, their laughter mixing with the noise of the traffic. All the world was wearing shorts or T-shirts, or bathing costumes; yet Walter Harrison, sitting on a park bench in his overcoat, was feeling cold and lonely. "Where will it all end?" he thought, as he watched the children splashing and laughing. After a few minutes, he got up and walked through the park gates. His adventure was about to begin...

He stopped just before putting his key in the front door. Something was happening in the back garden... Quietly, he crept around the side of the house and looked through the gate. Two

45

men were standing at the back of the house, holding a ladder. A third man was at the top of the ladder and a fourth inside the house: he was passing furniture through the window to his partner, who then gave it to his friends below. All four were working quietly and efficiently and the pile of furniture in the garden was getting bigger and bigger by the minute. Walter could not believe his eyes: the strangers were emptying his entire flat, and they were behaving as if it was the most normal thing in the world. He coughed loudly and then said, "Excuse me!" — and the man at the top of the ladder dropped his portable TV onto the concrete below. A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.

an Accident

Mrs Cross is an old lady who lives in a village in the country outside Bristol. As she is a widow she lives alone.

Last week she had an accident. It was raining and she was walking to the village store. She slipped on the wet road, fell down and broke her hip. By chance, a local farmer was passing on his tractor. He went back to his farm and telephoned for an ambulance.

hitckhiking

James was a student at Oxford University, where he was studying law. Like many students he did not have much money because his grant was only just enough to live on. Last year, during the autumn term, he decided to go to Manchester to visit some friends for the weekend, but he could not afford a train ticket, and even the coach was too expensive, so he had to hitchhike. He caught a bus to the beginning of the motorway and waited. It was a cold, windy November day and while he was waiting he got soaked to the skin. After waiting two hours he finally got a lift from a lorry driver, who was in fact going all the way to Manchester. James felt extremely relieved. The lorry driver seemed a friendly fellow of around 35, reasonably well-dressed and he and James talked a lot. Suddenly, as they were driving along the motorway, a police car raced past them and made them stop. They were taken to the police

46

station because the police suspected that the lorry was carrying stolen goods. A detective interrogated James for two hours, and he even had to spend the night in a cell. He was eventually released the next day. Apparently, the lorry was carrying stolen television sets. James swore that he would never hitchhike again.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.

B. Write about a memorable journey that you have made.

A wonderful holiday

Sandra Castle spent her holiday in Italy and had a wonderful time.

Hello. You look well. Where have you been?

I've just come back from Italy.

Oh. Did you have a good time?

Yes. Wonderful.

Where did you go exactly?

Rimini.

Did you go on a package holiday?

Yes, I did. It was very cheap.

Did you stay in a hotel?

Yes, I did.

And how long were you there?

A fortnight.

Did you go alone?

No, I went with my boyfriend.

And what was the weather like?

It was fantastic. It was really hot every day.

What did you do most days?

We went swimming and lay on the beach.

And what did you do in the evenings?

Some nights we went to a bar or a disco and other

nights we just stayed in the hotel.

Did you go on excursions?

No, we didn't.

Oh. Look at the time. I must rush. See you.

Bye.

A. Read the conversation. Ask each other questions about Sandra's holiday.

47

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. Ask the person sitting next to you about one of his/her holidays. Ask about the weather, the hotel, the room, the beach, the swimming pool, the food, the waiters. Here are some words ranging from good to bad to help you answer.

Good	OK	Bad
fantastic	not bad	not very good
very nice	quite good	terrible
wonderful	all right	awful
very good	OK	really bad

Victor's trip to New york

Victor: I went to New York last week.

John: Really? When exactly did you go?

Victor: Last Monday. I flew. I went to the airport and

checked in. The girl behind the counter was beau­tiful. She said, "First class, business class or econo­my class?"

John: Which did you choose? Did you have enough money for first or business class?

Victor: I hesitated, but I chose economy class.

John: Smoking or non-smoking?

Victor: Non-smoking. You know I gave up smoking a year ago.

John: Did you have anything to declare?

Victor: Mmh. No, but the customs officer told me to open my luggage.

John: Did he find anything?

Victor: No, he found nothing.

John: Victor, did you have an aisle seat?

Victor: No, I had a window seat.

John: Did you stay at a good hotel?

Victor: Not bad. I stayed at the Hotel Chelsea. It wasn't very expensive.

John: What sort of hotel was it?

Victor: It was full of artists and musicians.

John: I hope they didn't wake you up during the night.

48

Victor: No, because I didn't sleep during the night, I slept

during the day.

John: And what did you do during the night?

Victor: I went out.

John: Every night?

Victor: Practically.

John: Did you meet any nice girls?

Victor: Sure. I met a lot of nice girls.

John: Did you drink a lot of whisky?

Victor: Yes, I drank a lot of whisky.

John: Did you have a good time?

Victor: Yes, I had a great time.

Johnf Really!

A. Speak about Victor's trip to New York.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. Ask each other questions about your last journey by plane.

What a terrible holiday!

Tom MacDonald is talking about his holiday at Vista Beach. I have just come back from a fortnight at Vista Beach. What a terrible holiday! The weather was awful, the town was boring, the hotel was dreadful and I spent all the money. It rained almost every day and there was a strong wind which blew from the sea, so that even when it didn't rain it was impossible to sit on the beach.

There wasn't much to do in the town — not many interesting places to visit. So I stayed in the hotel most days and read a lot of books and watched a lot of rain. In the evenings I went out to

bars and discos and I drank a lot of wine — there were hundreds

of bars. The night life was good, but I didn't talk to many people,

because I didn't feel well.

The hotel looked beautiful in the travel brochure but when I

got there I found it was small and dirty. Most of the meals were badly cooked and the waiters were slow and rather rude. I had a tiny room with one small window and a beautiful view of the local fish market. What a smell! And what a noise! At five o'clock every morning the sound of lorries, fishermen and people

49

at the market always woke me up. I am back in England now

and I need a holiday.

A. Decide if the following sentences are true or false.

eg It didn't rain much. False. It rained a lot.

1 . He spent a lot of time on the beach.

2. He didn't spend much money.

3. He didn't have much good weather.

4. He didn't visit many places.

5. He didn't read many books.

6. There are a lot of bars at Vista Beach.

7. He didn't drink much wine.

8. He didn't speak to many people.

9. He ate a lot of good meals. 10. He got a lot of sleep.

B. Read the text and ask questions on the text.

C. Speak about Tom MacDonald's holiday at Vista Beach.

D. Speak about your last holiday. Say what you liked and what you didn 't like about it.

Last week it was New Year's Eve and we spent this holiday in Berlin. It was a new experience for us. First of all everybody bought a lot of fireworks. Then on the evening of 31st December people gathered in groups of friends and ate New Year's dinner or buffet meals. At 12 o'clock, midnight, the meals and dancing stopped. Then everybody drank together and wished each other "Happy New Year". A moment later thousands of fireworks went off in the sky above the city. At about 2 o'clock in the morning people started eating cakes. They also drank strong coffee. Probably they didn't want to fall asleep.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Tell how you celebrated New Year s Eve this year.

50

Today most people have a job of some kind, and their only free time is at the weekends. What do people do with this time?

Let's take the Barclay family, for example. James Barclay works in one of Britain's larger cities. He's in his middle forties. His wife is a secretary and they have two children, one ten and one thirteen. They have an old car, and about once a month they are able to get out into the country. We talked to Jennifer, the eldest daughter: "We don't go out a lot but sometimes we go to a place in the country which Mum and Dad know. I think they knew it when they were, you know, younger. It's got a lake, well a pond really, and trees. The dog likes it, he can run around and nobody really minds. It's a very quiet place. Dad doesn't do very much. Often he just sleeps. Mum talks to the dog. Once, earlier this spring, Mum and Dad stopped at a pub for a drink. Dad didn't want to stop because he said it was too expensive, but we stopped anyway, and Mum and Dad went inside. Sharon and I stayed in the garden with the dog. Anyway, I think Mum drank a bit too much. Dad didn't. He's too frightened of the police. You know, drinking and driving. Anyway, we were driving down this road and we were stopped by the police. The policeman asked Dad to blow into the bag, but he was really nervous and he couldn't do it. He's never been stopped by the police before. Sharon and I were laughing in the back seat, but Mum was furious. "Give me that bag!" she shouted at Dad. She took it from him and blew into it herself. "See?" she said to Dad. "Like that!" The policeman looked at the bag, and then at my Mum. He said, "I can see you've had a few drinks, madam. It's lucky you're not driving!"

A. Read the text. Ask and answer questions about the Barclays' drive into the country.

B. Retell the text.

C. Do you often go to the country? What was your last picnic like? How do you generally spend your weekends? What about the members of your family?

51

Steve: Look, here's a letter from Jack Stevens. Do you reme­mber him, Jill? I used to share a room with him in my first year at college.

Jill: Jack Stevans? Is he the one who used to play the guitar very well?

Steve: Guitar? No, Jack didn't play the guitar! He used to play cards and win!

Jill : Did he smoke very heavily too?

Steve: Yes, that's right.

Jill: What does he say in the letter?

Steve: Oh. Didn't I say? He wants to come and see us!

Old Jim: We had a hard life! When I was a boy—eight years old—I used to work for a few pennies. I made tea for the coalminers here in Derbyshire.

Grandson: How many hours did you use to work at the week­end, Grandad?

Old Jim: Well, we were busy from six o'clock on Saturday morning until eleven on Sunday evening. We used to stay in the mines for thirty-six hours at the weekend.

Grandson: That was a long time, Grandad!

An old man was sitting on a seat in a small park, surrounded by new red brick houses. A young man with a dog came up and sat down beside him.

"It's all changed," said the old man, shaking his head sadly. "You see over there, where those houses are. That used to be the orchard. They used to grow some of the finest pears and apples in the County there.

And over there; you see that house with the green door; there used to be a pond there. When I was a lad, we often used to fish in it. I don't know what happened to that pond. It must be there somewhere under somebody's foundations."

52

"Are you sure it was there?" asked the young man. "Where the house with the green door stands?" "I'm positive," replied the old man. The young man looked a little anxious. "That's my house," he said, "the one with the green door."

A. Questions

1. Where was the old man sitting? 2. What was the park surrou­nded by? 3. What did the old man say? 4. Why did the young man look anxious?

B. Turn the following thoughts into USED TO ideas:

eg They grew fine apples there. or

They used to grow fine apples there.

1. They kept cows in that field. 2. There was a tall hedge there. 3. We went to the seaside in the summer. 4. My father took us sailing on the lake. 5. We often went for picnics in the woods. 6. Silvia lived in Kiel, now she lives in Munich. 7.1 liked sugar in my tea when I was very young, now I don't. 8. There was a meadow where that school stands. 9. He had his own horses at one time.

C. Study this sentence:

My brother used to work for PanAm, now he works for Inter­continental Hotels.

We often use this combination of used to with a simple present idea. Make similar sentences:

1. Kim live Georgia/now Texas

2. Alice dancer/now actress

3. Sylvia play guitar/now cello

4. Bob drive long distance lorry/ now coach

5. Mr Church repair clocks/now watches

6. Cyril write The Times/now The Telegraph 1. George play for Spurs/now Fulham

8. Frank teach children/now adults

9. David soldier/now policeman

10. Amelia write love stories/now detective stories

53

Now what about you? Can you think of some similar statements you could make about yourself?

D. Think back to when you were a child. Answer the following questions as truthfully as possible, using used to:

eg Where did you go to school? I used to go to school in Linz.

1. Give the name of a child you played with when you were young. 2. What sort of food did you like then? 3. What games did you enjoy? 4. What was your favourite season of the year? 5. What sort of things did you do in the holidays? 6. What did you dislike doing? 7. Where did you live? 8. What toys did you have? 9. How did you go to school? 10. Which lessons did you like?

E. The negative form of used to is didn 't use to and to ask questions we use the form: Did you use to...?

Look at this conversation:

- Lousie, "Did you use to like school?" Sally, "Yes, I did, didn't you?" or "No, I didn't, did you?"

Make more conversations like this. Here are some ideas:

have many friends like your teachers enjoy writing compositions play a lot of games dislike any lessons

F. Think back to your first year at school. Write a short account of the things you used to do, and the way you used to feel.

Sometimes I think about my childhood and remember how simple my life used to be. My life is different today. I have more responsibilities today and more pressure.

I used to live in a big house with my parents and brothers and sisters. My mother used to cook my meals and wash my clothes. My father used to play soccer with me. Sometimes, on the weekend, we used to go fishing together. If I needed something,

54

I used to ask my family. They used to give me money for school books and clothes. Sometimes they gave me money so I could go to the movies. When I was little, I didn't have to get up too early and I didn't have much homework.

Today, I have to take care of myself. No one else cooks my meals or washes my clothes. And no one else pays my rent. Today, I don't have much time for soccer and fishing. I have to get up early, and I have to work hard. If I want to go to the movies or go on a date, I have to save my money. No one else gives it to me. And I have to worry about my flat tires and running out of gas. Yes, it's hard work being an adult!

A. Now use the composition as a model and write about yourself. Compare your life now with your life before. Give your composition a title and be sure to answer these questions. Paragraph 1

1. What do you remember about your childhood?

2. Is your life different today?

3. How is it different?

Paragraph 2

1. Where did you use to live or who did you live with?

2. Who used to take care of you?

3. What did you use to do in your free time?

4. Where did you get your spending money? Paragraph 3

1. Do you take care of yourself today?

2. What kinds of things do you have to do for yourself?

3. Do you have much free time?

4. How do you spend your time?

5. What do you do when you need money for special things?

6. Is it hard work being an adult?

I remember sailing on a pond that used to be my grandfather's sawmill — we had a boat, and we used to go sailing on this. Also we used to do a lot of climbing trees. We used to climb those trees for apples, which we then ate and made ourselves very sick. And my mother would come along and complain very strongly,

55

but I don't think that stopped us at all. And of course in those days I had a bike, too, and I remember I used to push it up this very long hill near our house and then I'd get on and ride down as fast as I could go. My mother used to complain about that, too.

A. Read the text. Analyse the use of used to and would.

B. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text.

C. Try to remember what you used to/would do some time ago.

Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous

The Present Perfect has three main uses.

1. It expresses an action which began in the past and still continues.

Kate and Ken have been married for twenty years. (=They

are still married now.)

She has worked in London for six months. (=She still works

in London now.)

How long have you lived here? (=You still live here now.)

Note the time expressions that are common with this use. We use/or with a period of time, and since with a point in time.

two years ' 1970

a month the end of the lesson

for a few minutes since August

half an hour 800

ages Christmas

2. It expresses an experience that happened at some time in one's life. The action is in the past and finished, but the effects of the action are still felt. When the action happened is not important.

I've been to the States. (I still remember.)

She's written poetry, children's stories and biographies.

(In her writing career)

Have you ever had an operation? (At any time in your life

up to now)

How many times has he been married? (In his life)

Note the adverbs that are common with this use.

56

Have you ever been to Australia?

I have never tried salmon before. It is very nice.

Note that questions and answers about definite times are expressed in the Past Simple.

When did you go to the States?

Was her poetry published while she was alive?

I broke my leg once, but I didn't have to stay in hospital.

He met his second wife in the dry cleaner's.

3. It expresses a past action that has a present result. The action is usually in the recent past.

I've lost my wallet.(I haven't got it now.) The taxi hasn't arrived. (We're still waiting for it.) What have you done to your lip? (It's bleeding.) Peter has shaved his beard off. (He looks different.)

We often announce "news" in the Present Perfect, because the speaker is emphasizing the event as a present fact.

Have you heard? The Prime Minister has resigned.

Susan's had her baby!

I've ruined the meal. It's burnt.

Note the adverbs that are common with this use.

I haven't done my homework yet. (Negative) Has the postman been yet¹? (Question) I've already done my homework. 1've/M.y/ seen some scissors. Now where did I put them? Again, details about definite time will be in the Past Simple. She had a baby boy this morning. It was a difficult birth.

1. The Present Perfect Continuous expresses an activity which began in the past and is still continuing now.

I've been working all day.

How long have you been sitting here?

I've been learning English for three years.

They've been listening to the radio all morning.

57

2. The Present Perfect Continuous expresses a past activity which has caused a present result.

I've been working all day. (I'm tired now.) Have you been crying? (Your eyes are red.) Roger's been cutting the grass. (I can smell it.)

The past activity might be finished or it might not. The context usually makes this clear.

Look outside the window! It's been snowing! (It has

stopped snowing now.)

I've been writing this book for two years. (It isn't finished.)

Present Perfect Continuous and Present Perfect Simple

1. When we use the Present We use the Present Perfect Perfect Continuous^ the action Simple when the action is finished, may be finished or not finished.

She's been doing her homework. She's done her homework.

(=Perhaps she has finished it, (=She has finished it.) perhaps she has not.)

2. We use the Present Perfect We use the Present Perfect Continuous to talk about how Simple to talk about what long something has been in has been achieved in a period progress. of time.

I've been walking all morning. I've walked six kilometres

so far this morning.

How long have you been having How many driving lessons

driving lessons? have you had?

3. We use the Present Perfect We use the Present Perfect Continuous for situations which Simple for situations which are more temporary (continuing are more permanent (continuing for a short time). for a longer time).

He's been living there for just He's always lived there, a few weeks.

I've been working very hard You've worked hard all your

recently. life.

There is sometimes no difference between the Simple and the Continuous.

I've played/I've been playing the piano since I was a boy. I've been living /I've lived in this flat for ten years. How long has she been working/has she worked for the company?

Remember that state verbs rarely take the Continuous. I've had this book for ages. I've always loved sunny days.

Present Perfect and Past Simple

1. The Present Perfect always connects the past and the present; the Past Simple tells us only about the past:

a. We use the Present Perfect We use the Past Simple to talk

to talk about something which about something which started

started in the past and and finished in the past, continues up to the present.

I've lived in London for I lived in Manchester for ten

ten years. (=1 still live years. (=1 do not live in Manchester

in London now.) now.)

He has worked in a shop for He worked in a factory for ten

five years. (=He still years. (= He does not work in

works in the shop now.) the factory now.)

How long have you been How long were you there? (=

here? (=You are still here now.) You are not there now.')

• b. We also use the Present We use the Past Simple when

Perfect when the result of a the result of a past action is

past action is connected to not connected to the present, the present.

I've lost my wallet. (= I have I lost my wallet, but I've got

not got the wallet now.) it back again now.

We often use the Present Perfect We use the past to give

to announce "news". details of the news.

Someone has stolen my motorbike. I left the bike outside for

a few minutes and when I came back, it wasn't there.

2. When we say a definite past time eg yesterday, last week, six weeks ago, we always use the Past Simple, never the Present Perfect.

I lost my wallet yesterday, (not: I've lost my wallet

yesterday.)

Someone stole my bicycle last week, (not: Someone has

We use the Present Perfect to talk about an indefinite time up to the present eg ever, never, recently. Compare:

Present Perfect Past Simple

Have you ever seen a ghost? Did you see your friend yesterday?

I've never been to New York. I went to London last week.

I've started taking driving I started taking driving lessons lessons recently. six weeks ago.

In conversations, we often begin indefinitely, with the Present Perfect, then we use the Past Simple when we think about the definite time that something happened.

"Have you ever been to the United States?" "Yes, I went

there in 1985." "Did you go to New York (= when you

were there in 1985)?"

I've seen that film. I enjoyed it (= when I saw it) very

much.

3. We can use today, this morning, this afternoon, etc:

with the Present Perfect when with the past when these

these periods of time are not finished. periods of time are finished. I've spoken to Peter this morning. I spoke to Peter this morning.

(It is still morning.) (It is now afternoon, evening,

or night time.)

4. We normally use a past tense, not the Present Perfect, to ask when something happened.

When did you arrive home last night? (not: When have

you arrived home last night

Present perfect and present tense

To say how long something has continued, we can use the Present Perfect, but not the Present Continuous or Present Simple.

She has been waiting for an hour, (not: She is waiting for 60

an hour.) I've lived here since last year, (not: I live here since last year.)

Self check

I. Choose the correct form.

A. Lynne Carter, the manager of the Timeways Travel company, is interviewing a young man called Paul Morris for a job.

Lynne: Your present company is Sun Travel, isn't it? How long have you worked/did you work there?

Paul: I've worked/I worked for them for two years.

Lynne: I see. And what were you doing before that?

Paul: I've worked/I worked for a student travel company in Spain.

Lynne: Oh, really? How long have you been/were you in Spain?

Paul: For nearly a year. I've moved/I moved back to Lon­don from Spain two years ago to join Sun Travel.

Lynne: I see. And do you drive, Paul?

Paul: Yes, I do. I've had/I had a driving license for five years.

Lynne: And have you got your own car?

Paul: No, not at the moment. I've had/I had a car in Spain, but I've sold/ I sold it before I've come/I came back to Britain.

B. 1. We've been working/We're working since 9 o'clock. 2. I've been cleaning/I'm cleaning my flat for the past two hours. 3. Look. Can you see Simon over there? He's been sitting/He's sitting in the corner. 4. "How long have you been/are you ill?" "Since yesterday." 5. Have you known Sarah/Do you know Sarah for very long? 6. I've been learning English/I'm learning English since last year. 7. They've lived/They live in London now. They've been/They're there for the last six months.

C. 1. "Can I have a look at your newspaper?" "Certainly. You can keep it if you like. I've been reading/I've read it." 2. They've been repairing/They've repaired the road all this week, but they haven't finished it yet. 3. I'm very sorry, but I've been breaking/

61

I've broken this chair. 4. Sally has been saving/has saved nearly two thousand pounds so far this year. 5. What's the matter? Have you been losing/Have you lost something? 6. I've always been working/I've always worked in the music industry. 7. Someone has been eating/has eaten my chocolates. There aren't many left.

II. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: Present Perfect, Present Perfect Continuous or Simple Past.

1.1 (buy) a new house last year, but I (not sell) my old house yet, so at the moment I have two houses. 2. When Ann (be) on her way to the station it (begin) to rain. Ann (run) back to her flat for her umbrella, but this (make) her late for her train. 3. I'm sorry I'm late, (you, wait) long? 4. At 7 a.m. Charles (ring) Peter and (say), "I'm going fishing, Peter. Would you like to come?" "But it's so early," (say) Peter. "I (not have) breakfast yet. Why you (not tell) me last night?" 5. Tom (meet) Paul at lunch time and (say), "I (not see) you at the bus stop this morning. You (miss) the bus?" "I (not miss) it," (reply) Paul. "I (not miss) a bus for years. But this morning George (give) me a lift." 6. Those two men (stand) outside the house for over two hours. Do you think we should call the police? 7. Ann (go) to Canada six months ago. She (work) in Canada for a while and then (go) to the United States. 8. You look tired. I think you (work) too hard lately and you (not/get) enough fresh air and exercise. 9. Peter (try) to come in quietly but his mother (hear) him and (call) out, "Where you (be)? Your supper (be) in the oven for an hour." 10. "Annie's clothes are very dirty. What (she/do)?" "She (play) in the garden." 11. Mary (be) in Japan for two years. She is working there and likes it very much. — How she (go)? — She (go) by air. 12. Bill usually has breakfast at 8.00. Yesterday at 8.30 Peter (meet) Bill and (offer) him an apple. "No, thanks," (say) Bill. "I just (have) breakfast." 13.1 (read) his books when I was at school. I (enjoy) them very much. 14. The clock is slow. — It isn't slow, it (stop). 15. He (not smoke) for two weeks. He is trying to give it up. 16. The actors (arrive) yesterday and (start) rehearsals early this morning. 17. It (be) cold this year. I wonder when it is going to get warmer. 18. You (lock) the door before you (leave) the house⁹ 19. You (wear) your hair long when you were at school? — Yes, my mother (insist) on it. But when I (leave) school I (cut) my hair

62

and (wear) it short ever since. 20. Sally and her boyfriend Peter (go out) together since last winter. 21. The concert (begin) at 2.30 and (last) for two hours. Everyone (enjoy) it very much. 22. We (miss) the bus. Now we'll have to walk. 23. He (break) his leg in a skiing accident last year. 24. Mr Count (work) as a cashier for twenty-five years. Then he (retire) and (go) to live in the country. 25. You (be) here before? — Yes, I (spend) my holidays here last year. — You (have) a good time? — No, it never (stop) raining. 26. Where is Tom? — I (not see) him today, but he (tell) Mary that he'd be in for dinner. 27. Where you (find) this knife? — I (find) it in the garden. — Why you (not leave) it there? 28.1 (lose) my black gloves. You (see) them anywhere? — I'm afraid I.... When you last (wear) them? — I (wear) them at the theatre. — Perhaps you (leave) them at the theatre. 29. He (leave) the house at 8.00. — Where he (go)? — I (not see) where he (go). 30. Why you (not bring) me the letters for signature? You (not type) them yet? 31. Tom: You (sunbathe)? Mary: Don't be ridiculous! It (rain) all day. 32. You (finish) checking the accounts? — No, not quite. I (do) about half so far. 33. How you (get) that scar? — I (get) it in a car accident a year ago. 34. I (make) cakes. That is why my hands are all covered with flour. 35.1 (not know) that you (know) Mrs Pitt. How long you (know) her? — I (know) her for ten years. 36. You (hear) his speech on the radio last night? — Yes, I... — What you (think) of it? 37.1 (not know) that you (be) here. You (be) here long? — Yes, I (be) here two months. — You (be) to the Cathedral? — Yes, I (go) there last Sunday. 38. You ever (try) to give up smoking? — Yes, I (try) last year, but then I (find) that I was getting fat so I (start) again. 39. Peter: You (telephone) for ages. You not nearly (finish)? Jack: I (not get) through yet. I (try) to get our Paris office but the line (be) engaged all morning. 40. You (see) today's paper? — No, anything interesting (happen)? — Yes, two convicted murderers (escape) from the prison down the road. 41. Mary (feed) the cat? — Yes, she (feed) him before lunch. — What she (give) him? — She (give) him some fish. 42. How long you (know) your new assistant? — I (know) him for two years. — What he (do) before he (come) here? — I think he (be) in prison. 43. Arm (fail) her driving test three times because she's so bad at reversing. But she (practise) reversing for the last week and I think she (get) ^a bit better at it. 44.1 (not see) your aunt recently. — No. She (not

63

be) out of her house since she (buy) her colour TV. 45. How long that horrible monument (be) there? — It (be) there six months. Lots of people (write) to the Town Council asking them to take it away but so far nothing (be) done. 46. Tom is convinced that there is gold in these hills but we (search) for six months and (not see) any sign of it. 47. How long you (be) out of work? — I'm not out of work now. I just (start) a new job. — How you (find) the job? — I (answer) an advertisement in the paper. 48. Peter (be) a junior clerk for three years, lately he (look) for a better post but so far he (not find) anything. 49. He (lose) his job last month and since then he (be) out of work. — Why he (lose) his job? — He (be) rude to Mr Pitt. 50. Her phone (ring) for ten minutes. I wonder why she doesn't answer it. 51.1 just (be) to the film "War and Peace". You (see) it? — No, I.... Is it like the book? — I (not read) the book. — I (read) it when I (be) at school. — When Tolstoy (write) it? — He (write) it in 1868. — He (write) anything else? 52. I (bathe). That's why my hair is wet. 53. You (book) your hotel room yet? — Well, I ( write) to the hotel last week but they (not answer) yet. 54. Mary (cry)? — No, she (not cry), she (peel) onions. 55. He walked very unsteadily up the stairs and his wife said, "You (drink)!" 56. Peter: You (see) any good films lately? Ann: Yes, I (go) to the National Film Theatre last week and (see) a Japanese film. Peter: You (like) it? — Ann: Yes, I (love) it, but of course I (not understand) a word. 57. Father: Tom (not come) back yet? Mother: Yes, he (come) in an hour ago. He (go) straight to bed. Father: Funny. I (not hear) him. 58. You (be) to Cornwall? —Yes, I (be) there last Easter. — You (go) by train? — No, I (hitch-hike). 59. When 1 (be) seventeen I (start) my university course. — When you (get) your degree? — Oh, 1 (not get) my degree yet; I'm still at the university. I only (be) there for two years. 60. You look exhaus­ted! — Yes, I (play) tennis and I (not play) for years, so I'm not used to it. 61. The man (stand) at the bus stop for half an hour Shall I tell him that the last bus already (go)? 62. I wonder if anything (happen) to Tom. I (wait) an hour now. He often (keep! me waiting but he never (be) quite so late as this. 63. I hope you're enjoying your visit to England. You (meet) an\ Englishmen yet? — Yes, I (meet) a man called Smith at a party last night. — What you (talk) about? — We (talk) about tht weather.

64

64. Ann: Hello, Jack! I (not see) you for ages! Where you (be)? Jack: I (be) in Switzerland. I (mean) to send you a postcard

but I (not have) your address with me. Ann: Never mind. You (have) a good time in Switzerland?

How long you (stay) there? Jack: I just (get) back. Yes, I (enjoy) it thoroughly. I (ski)

all day and (dance) all night. Ann: I (ski) when I (be) at the university, but I (break) a

leg five years ago and since then I (not do) any.

65. Kate: You (be) to Hampton Court?

Jane: Yes, I (go) there last week. The tulips (be) wonderful. Kate: You (go) by car?

Jane: No, I (go) with my English class. We (hire) a coach. Kate: Where else you (be) since you (come) to England? Jane: Oh, I (be) to Stratford and Coventry and Oxford. Kate: You (see) a lot. When you (go) to Stratford? Jane: I (go) last week. The people I work for (take) me. Kate: You (see) a play at the Royal Shakespeare Theatre

when you (be) at Stratford? Jane: Yes, we (see) Macbeth. We were very lucky. We just

(walk) in and (ask) if they (have) any returned tickets,

and the girl at the box office (say), "Yes, a man just

(return) three stalls." Kate: You (be) to Wales? Jane: No, I (be) to Scotland but I (not be) to Wales. I'd like

to go.

66. There (be) a very good programme on TV last night. You (see) it? — No, I (take) my set back to the shop last week because there (be) so much distortion; and they (say) it (need) a new part. They (not be able) to get the new part so far, so I (not watch) television for about ten days.

67. A: Do you do much travelling? B: Yes, I like to travel.

A: What countries (visit, you)? '

B: Well, I (be) in India, Turkey, Afganistan, and Nepal,

among others. A: I (be, never) in any of those countries. When (be,

you) in India? B: Two years ago. I (visit, also) many of the countries

in Central America. I (take) a tour of Central America

about six years ago. A: Which countries (visit, you)? B: Guatemala, El Salvador, Honduras, and Nicaragua. A: I (want, always) to travel to other countries, but I (have not) the opportunity to travel extensively. I (go) to.England six years ago, but I (go not) anywhere since then. 68. Rachel: Hello, Bob.

Bob: Hello. I (not see) you for a long time. Rachel: I (see) you in town two or three weeks ago, but

you (not see) me. I (be) on a bus. Bob: Well, how are things? Are you still living over

the shop?

Rachel: No, I (move) now. I (find) a super flat just befo­re I went on holiday. I (be) there three months. Bob: ...you (pass) your driving test yet? Rachel: Yes, I have. I (pass) in October. I (not buy) a car yet, though. But what about you, Bob? ... anything exciting (happen) to you lately? Bob: No, not really. My mother (not be) very well

for a few months now. Rachel: Oh, dear. I'm sorry to hear that. Bob: And my brother's out of work. Rachel: ... he (leave) school in the summer, then? Bob: Yes. He (not do) very well in his exams and he

(not find) a job yet.

Rachel: Are you still working at Scott's? Bob: Yes. They ... just (give) me a pay rise. Rachel: Well, that's one piece of good news. 69. Jill phones Pam at the office.

Jill: How long you (work) for Barnett & Company? Pam: For three weeks, since the beginning of August.

Jeff (know) Graham Barnett since their college

hours.

Jill: Do you like the work? Pam: Yes, but it's very hectic here. I (type) letters —

three hours and I (not finish) yet. I (not have) a

cup of tea since breakfast at 7, and I (not smoke) a

cigarette since after breakfast.

66

Jill: Cigarettes? But you don't smoke! (you, start) smo­king again?

Pam : Yes, unfortunately. Jill: And how long you (smoke) again? Pam: For three weeks, since I (start) work in this hectic

office.

70. Carol: Do you want a magazine? Tom: No thanks I (read) them all. Carol: Oh, how long (you/wait)? Tom: I feel as if I (wait) for hours but I suppose I (only/

be) here for fifteen minutes. Carol: What time is your appointment? Tom: I (not/make) an appointment. I (just/drop in)

on the off-chance of seeing someone. Carol: Have you got bad toothache then? Tom: Yes, it (give) me trouble for over a week now. Carol: (you/be) to the dentist before? Tom: No, it's the first time I (ever/be) here. Carol: Well, I (come) here for about five years. They're

very good.

Tom: (you/just/come in) for a check-up? Carol: No, I (lose) a filling so it needs replacing. Woman: Mr Hill, the dentist will see you now. (you/fill in)

the card yet?

Tom: Yes, I (already/give) it to the receptionist. Woman:Thank you. Perhaps you could go to Surgery 2.

Mr Sharp is ready for you. Carol: Good luck.

71. Ann Jones is one of the most interesting people I (meet): she is only twenty-five, but she (travel) to over fifty different countries. Five years ago, she (be) a typist in Birmingham, but she (decide) to give up her job and see the world. Since then her life (change) completely

The first time she (go) abroad was seven years ago, when she (be) just eighteen. She (take) a boat to France and then (hitch­hike) around Europe for five weeks. She (visit) Europe many times since that first trip, of course, but this holiday (be) the one which (make) her start travelling. She (never forget) the excitement of those five w ^eks — although it was not all enjoyable. When she (be) in Munich, somebody (steal) her purse;

67

she (lose) all her money, and (have) to work in a restaurant for a fortnight. She (make) some good friends there, however, and (return) several times since then.

How did she find the money for her travels? After her first trip abroad, she (go) home and (work) for two years, saving all the time. Now she travels continually, finding work when her money gets low. She (make) a lot of friends, she says, and (learn) quite a few languages. Although she (have) occasional difficulties and (often/be) sick, she (never/think) about giving up her travels. "The first time I (go) abroad (change) my life," she says, "and I (want) to travel ever since."

III. Translate from Russian into English.

1. Тебе не придется идти в кассу. Я уже заказал билеты по телефону. 2. Где ваш брат? Я давно не вижу его. — Он сей­час живет во Франции. Они эмигрировали три года назад. 3. Я давно видела эту пьесу. Я уже забыла ее. 4. Ты уже перевел текст? — Нет еще. В нем слишком много незнакомых слов. 5. Вы хорошо знаете город. Как долго вы живете в Лондо­не? — С 1985 года. 6. Могу я поговорить с мистером Сми­том? — Он только что вышел. 7. Я звоню ей с трех часов, но ее нет дома. 8. Я никогда не бьш в Риме и с нетерпением жду поездки туда в мае. 9. Почему вы пропустили занятия по английскому языку в четверг? — Я уезжал в командировку. 10. Поезд из Варшавы уже пришел? — Нет, он прибывает через полчаса. 11. Сколько лет ты уже живешь в общежи­тии? — Два года. 12. Целый вечер моя жена пишет письма. Она написала уже пять писем. 13. Вы когда-либо бывали в Вашингтоне? — Да, я ездил в Вашингтон пять лет назад. Там проходила конференция по правам человека, и я делал док­лад. 14. Где Анна? — Она вышла погулять час назад и еще не вернулась. 15. В библиотеке было много народу, и я ре­шил пойти туда вечером. 16. Она выглядит очень усталой. — Ничего удивительного. Последнее время она очень много ра­ботает. 17. Я хотел посмотреть этот фильм на прошлой неде­ле, но смог посмотреть его юлько вчера. 18. Как долго ты здесь находишься? — С пяти часов. 19. Я не вижу Лену по­следнее время. — Я тоже. 20. Что ты читаешь? — "Унесен­ные ветром." Это очень интересная книга. Ты читал ее? —

68

Нет еще. 21. Где Николай? Я жду его уже целый час. — Я видел его в библиотеке минут десять назад. 22. Мы не виде­лись с Виктором с тех пор, как были в театре в последний раз. 23. Когда дети вернулись из школы? — Часа три назад. — Они уже сделали уроки? — Нет еще. Сейчас они отдыхают. 24. Я потерял ключи. Вы их не видели? — Посмотрите на том письменном столе. Там лежат два ключа. Возможно, они ваши. 25. Пойдем погуляем. — К сожалению, не могу. Я еще не написал сочинение. 26. Нина чем-то огорчена.—Да, она гото­вилась к экзамену целую неделю, но получила тройку. 27. Где ты был вчера вечером? — Я ходил навестить своего друга. Он уже две недели болеет. 28. Раз или два раза в месяц я полу­чаю письма от родителей. Но в прошлом месяце я не полу­чал письма от них и очень волнуюсь. 29. Мы уезжаем рано утром. Я заказал такси, чтобы не опоздать на поезд. 30. Наконец, я нашел справочник. Я искал его везде. 31. Ты уже уложила вещи? Мы выезжаем через час. 32. Мы выполняем лабора­торную работу уже полчаса. Некоторые студенты уже за­кончили ее. 33. Вы уже переехали на новую квартиру? — Нет, мы переезжаем на следующей неделе. 34. Кого ты ждешь? —Марию. — Ты давно здесь стоишь? — Около два­дцати минут. 35. Пока мисс Грин печатала письмо, мистер Уэст просматривал документы. 36. Когда ты уезжаешь в Рим? — Через неделю. Я уже заказал билет на 15 мая. 37. Я никогда не был в Китае, но я был в Японии. В прошлом году я ездил туда в командировку. 38. Я печатаю документы уже час, но еще не закончила печатать их. 39. Вы давно живете в Минске? — Нет, мы переехали в Минск два года назад. 40. Что ты делаешь? — Выполняю домашнее задание. 41. Когда они вернулись из Москвы? — Вчера вечером. — Они принимали участие в выставке, не так ли? — Да, и выставка им очень понравилась. 42. Вы бывали здесь раньше? — Да, я провел здесь свой отпуск в прошлом году. — Вы хорошо провели время? — Да, погода была хорошая, было весело. 43. Изви­ни, что я опоздал. Ты давно ждешь? 44. Виктора сегодня нет на работе. Он уже две недели болеет. 45. Ты не знаешь, они Уже заказали номер в гостинице? — Думаю, что да. 46. Что ты делала все утро? — Работала в саду. Я только что при-Шла. 47. Ты видел сегодня Роберта? — Да, он недавно при-Ходил сюда и вскоре ушел. 48. Ты купил продукты, о кото-

69

рых я просила? — Да, я ходил за покупками после обеда. 49. Экзаменаторы уже пришли; три студента уже готовятся отвечать. 50. Я никогда не забуду вашу добро гу. Вы всегда были так внимательны ко мне. 51 Я знаю его много лет, он всегда был мне хорошим другом. 52. Где вы купили этот чудесный ковер? — Он у меня с тех пор, как я переехал на эту квартиру. Я купил его три года назад в Центральном универмаге.

Fluency Listen, read and practise.

Mrs Bell is out. Jenny and Nick are cooking dinner to surprise her.

Jenny: I've washed the lettuce and I've chopped the to­matoes. I can make the salad now.

Nick: No you can't. You haven't peeled the potatoes yet.

Jenny: Oh yes, I have. Look! Here they are. I've already cooked them. And what have you done? Have you finished the washing up yet?

Nick: Yes, I've just finished the washing up.

A. Questions

\. What are the children doing at the moment? 2. What has Jenny done? 3. What has Nick done?

B. It V Saturday, and Judy and Paul Johnson are doing lots of things around the house. They are checking the list of things they have to do today. On the list below, check the things they've already done.

— do the laundry

— wash the kitchen windows

— pay the bills

— clean the garage

— fix the bathroom sink

— vacuum the living room

70

C. Tell about your experience in the place where you live. What have you done''' What haven 'tyou done yet?

D. Make a list of things you usually do at school, at work, or at home Check the things you 've already done this week. Share your list with other students in your class. Tell about what you 've done and what you haven't done.

Nick: Have you seen Ben?

Tom: Yes, I saw him about ten minutes ago.

Nick: Where did you see him?

Tom: In the park. He was arguing with Jason.

Nick: Jason? But he's twice as big as Ben. Have you ever

had an argument with him?

Tom: I once had a fight with him and two other boys. Nick: Did you win?

Tom: No, I lost. But it wasn't a fair fight. Later...

Nick: Ben! Are you all right? What's happened? You've torn your trousers, and you've lost all your buttons.

Ben: Well, I've only lost a few buttons, but Jason has lost the fight.

A. Study and practise the conversation.

B. Complete the letter with the Present Perfect Simple or the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.

Dear Jenny,

I'm sorry I (not write) for a long time.

I (get) your last letter in July. A lot of things (happen) since then.

In August we (go) on holiday to Spain. It was great! I (never have) such a good time. I (even learn) a few words of Spanish.

Only two bad things (happen) there. I (lose) my new camera, and my sister (fall) off our hotel balcony and (land) in a palm tree. She almost (destroy) the poor tree. I (send) you a postcard from Grenada, (you get) it?

In September I (start) at my new school. I (already make) a lot 3f new friends.

71

One more bit of news: I (paint) my room — bright orange! Mum and Dad aren't too happy, but my friends think it's great. Please write soon. Much love. Sandra

Victor is talking to a cashier in the school bookstore.

Cashier: You aren't from here, are you?

Victor: No, I'm from Madrid.

Cashier: How long have you been in Dallas?

Victor: I've been here since Saturday. I've only been in the

States for a couple of months. Cashier: Really? You haven't been here for very long. How

long have you studied English? Your English is very

good. Victor: I've studied English for about ten years — since I

was thirteen. Cashier: Well, I've studied Spanish since I was in the eighth

grade, and I still can't speak it.

A. Say "That's right" or "That's wrong" and correct the statements that are wrong.

1. Victor is from Dallas. 2. Victor has been in Dallas for a month. 3. Victor has been in the States for a couple of years. 4. Victor's English is good. 5. Victor has studied English for five years. 6. The cashier can speak Spanish very well.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. Complete the sentences with the Present Perfect Simple or the Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.

1 . Victor (live) in the United States for two months. 2. He (not speak) Spanish since he (arrive) here. 3 , Victor's wife and daughter (write) him every day since he (leave) Spain. 4. They (not come) to the U.S. with him. 5. Victor (not work) since June. 6. He (live) in the US since July. 7. He (be) in Dallas for three days. 8. He (not start) his English class. 9. He (buy) his books. 10. He (not meet) his classmates. 1 1. Victor's classmates (be) in Dallas longer

than Victor. 12. They (study) here before. 13. But they (not arrive) at school. 14. And they (not go) to the bookstore.

Frank is from a small town near Dallas. He's giving Gina a tour.

Frank: The building on our right is City Hall. They've been working on it for two years, but they haven't com­pleted it yet.

Gina: What's that on the left?

Frank: That's the police station, and next to it is the post office. The post office is the oldest building in the town.

Gina: And what's that little building over there?

Frank: Which one?

Gina: The building across the street.

Frank: Oh, that's the newspaper office. You've read the Bloomington Daily News, haven't you?

Gina: No, as a matter of fact, I haven't.

Frank: Well, it's not really a very good paper, but it's been improving lately. The reporters have been writing better stories, and it has some new photographers.

Gina: Hey, there's your mother.

Frank: Yeah, she works in that office building next to the newspaper. She's been working there since 1987 for over ten years now.

Gina: Really? I didn't know that.

Frank: Yeah. Come on. Let's go and say hello.

A. Answer "True" or "False" and correct the false statements.

\. They have finished the new city hall building.

2. The police station is as old as the post office.

3. The Bloomington Daily News is an excellent newspaper.

4. The Bloomington Daily News is getting better.

5. Frank's mother has just started a new job.

B. Make sentences about the members of Frank's family. Follow the examples.

eg Frank's mother/work in the same office building sin­ce 1987

Frank's mother has been working in the same office buil­ding since 1987.

eg She/not work for the same person, however

She hasn't been working for the same person, however.

1. Frank's father/relax at home since he retired

2. He/not go out with his friends from the factory

3. Frank's elder sister/live in New York since she got married

4. She/not enjoy herself in that busy city

5. Frank's younger brothers/work full time during the day and part time at night for over two years

6. They/not try to save money to go to college

7. They/try to save enough money to start their own business

8. Frank/work for an insurance company in Dallas

C. Ask and answer questions about the people in exercise B.

eg — Has Frank's mother been working for the same person

since 1987? — No, she hasn't.

1. Frank's father/relax at home since he retired?

2. he/go out with his friends from the factory?

3. Frank's elder sister/live in New York since she got married?

4. she/enjoy herself in that busy city?

5. Frank's younger brothers/work hard for over two years?

6. they/spend all their money?

Now ask and answer these questions.

7. you/live in this city for a long time?

8. your father/do the same job for over ten years?

9. you/drive since you were sixteen?

10. your classmates/enjoy themselves in this class⁹

11. you/learn a lot since you started this class?

12. you/think about living or working in another country?

74

Alan: Hello, Charles — I haven't seen you all day. What

have you been doing?

Charles: Actually, I've been working on my first novel. Alan: Oh yes? How far have you got with it? Charles: Well, I've thought of a good title, and I've made a

lot of characters, and I've designed the front cover.... Alan: Have you started writing it yet? Charles: Oh yes, I've written two pages already. Alan: Only two? Charles: Well yes—I haven't quite decided yet what happens

next.

A. Roleplay the conversation

B. Have you done any exciting or interesting things? Write down t\vo or three things. Find out what other people in your class have done

A: What are you going to do tonight?

B: I'm not sure. I really want to see a good movie. I haven't

seen a good movie in a long time.

A: What movie are you going to see?

B: I don't know. Have you seen any good movies recently?

A: Yes, I have. I saw a very good movie just last week.

B: Really? What movie did you see?

A: I saw the Return of Superman.

B: And you liked it?

A: I loved it. I think it's one of the best movies I've ever seen.

A. Study and practise the conversation.

B. In pairs, discuss one of the latest films you 've seen.

Laura Scott has flown to a desert island to take photographs of Keith Rogers. Keith is alone on the island as an experiment.

75

Laura: Hello. You're Keith, aren't you?

Keith: Yes, I am. Who are you?

Laura: I'm Laura Scott. I'm a photographer.

Keith: From England?

Laura: Yes. How long have you been here, Keith?

Keith: Since 30 th January. But what's the date today? You

see my watch has stopped. Laura: 29th June.

Keith: 29th June! That means I've been here for six months. Laura: Is there anything you miss, Keith? Keith: Oh, yes! I haven't spoken to anyone for six months

and I haven't had a cup of tea since the end of February. Laura: But you like the island, don't you? Keith: No, I don't! I hate it! I've hated the place ever since I

arrived. Take me back to civilization!

A. Ask and answer questions.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

A: Have you ever been to Britain on holiday?

B: Oh, yes, I've often been to Britain.

A: Where have you been?

B: Well, last year we went to the Lake District, but we've also

been to Scotland and Ireland. We always go in sum-

mer because the weather is better. A: Yes, but there are more tourists. B: Yes, that's right. But it's the same in every country.

A: Where are you going on holiday this year?

B: I don't know yet. I'm thinking about Spain.

A: I'm going to Spain.

B: Are you? When?

A: In August. Let's go together. Spain's lovely, you'll like it

B: Oh, that's a nice idea. I've already been to Spain. I love the

food, and the beaches are superb! A: Have you ever been to Cresta?

76

B: No, I've heard about it, but I haven't been there yet. Actually, I wanted to go there last year, but I couldn't. I was ill.

A: Oh, that's a shame. But let's go this year, we can visit Barce­lona, too.

A: Oh yes! I've already been to Barcelona but I'd love to go again. It's very hot and crowded, of course, but there are a lot of lovely shops and we can ...

A. Study and practise the conversations.

B. Situation: Your friend and you are making plans for your summer holidays. You'd like to spend your holidays together.

(I=Interviewer; J=Jane)

I: Now what sort of things have you been doing over the last week?

J: Well, I've been to - er - a couple of parties with friends. And I've been to the theatre once - and I went to see Dra-cula which is on at the West End of London. I've been shopping a few times. I: What have you bought?

J: Oh, very basic things — food. I bought a lot of food the other day to stock up for a week and just things I need for college. I've been out with friends quite a lot. I've been out for a drink in several pubs. I went to visit a South American friend on Saturday and I'm helping him with his English. He's learning English and he's also teaching me Spanish which is quite good.

Interviewer: And Christine, what about you? What have you

been doing this summer? Christine: Working, mostly. Interviewer: You mean you've been studying? Christine: Oh no, I've been doing a job to earn money. Interviewer: And have you made your fortune yet? Christine: Hardly! But I haven't done too badly. I've been

77

getting about£40 aweek, plus my meals and my accommodation, so I've earned over £500 and I've managed to save most of it.

Interviewer: That sounds pretty good. What kind of work have you been doing exactly?

Christine: I've been working in a hotel.

Interviewer: What, as a waitress?

Christine: No, I've been helping in the kitchen most of the time — washing and peeling potatoes, preparing breakfast trays, washing up — that sort of thing.

Interviewer: And have you been enjoying it? Or has it been rather boring?

Christine: No, it hasn't been too bad. I've found it quite inte­resting here, in fact. Not so much the work itself, but the people I've got to know and the friends I've made, and I've managed to do lots of things in my spare time too. It's a seaside town, so the­re's been quite a lot going on in the evenings — you know, dancing, bowling, cinemas and so on— and on my afternoons off I've been doing quite a lot of sunbathing and swimming.

Interviewer: Yes, I can see you've got quite brown. You've ob­viously been having some reasonable weather here.

A. Study and practise the conversations.

B. Interview your partner on his/her recent activities.

A television team working on a programme about the Amazon have just discovered a young Oxford undergraduate living with a primitive tribe of Indians. They interviewed him for their programme.

Interviewer: Of course we were very surprised to discover a white man living here. What exactly are you doing?

Young man: I've been living in this village for about six months. I'm studying the lives and customs of these people, and I'm going to write a book about it.

78

Interviewer: And have you learnt a lot?

Young man: Oh, yes. I've been sharing the daily lives of the inhabitants. I've been on their hunting expe­ditions. I've taken part in their rituals and fes­tivals. I've learnt to understand their language. I feel they have really begun to trust me.

Interviewer: And how long do you plan to stay?

Young man: Well, that depends on various factors. I've been here since last September. I plan to stay until next August at least, but possibly a bit longer. A. Study and practise the conversation.

Harry: Nora, you look a bit tired — what have you been

doing all day?

Nora: I've been cleaning the whole house. I said I was going to. Harry: But I wanted you to wait until the weekend so that

I could help.

Nora: Oh well, I thought I might as well get on with it. It was about time: the furniture has been looking shab­by for months, so this morning I took all the covers off the armchairs and washed them. That bit of sun early this afternoon helped to dry them. Harry: Well, I hope you had a rest this afternoon. Nora: No, since lunchtime I've been turning out the rooms upstairs. I haven't quite finished them yet. I've done our room and Robert's.

Harry: My goodness, you have been working hard! Nora: You know, Harry, you do make it hard for me to keep the place looking nice when you leave your things about everywhere. For years I've been asking you not to keep your books in the kitchen and not to leave gardening tools inside the house. Harry: And for years I've been telling you that you are perfectly free to throw out anything that I leave about if it gets in your way.

Nora: Harry, could you turn out your workroom? I've been meaning to ask you for days.

79

Harry: Yes, I will... Hullo, who has been playing with my

pipes? Three of them are missing. Nora: Yes, I gave three dirty old pipes to an old man at

the door. You haven't been smoking them lately. Harry: But Nora, you've thrown out my three oldest and

best pipes!

A. Analyse the uses of the tense forms in the conversation.

B. Give a brief account of the conversation.

C. Roleplay the conversation.

Past Perfect and Past Perfect Continuous

a. When we are talking about the past, we sometimes want to refer back to an earlier past.

When I telephoned Sue, she had gone out.

We use the Past Perfect (eg she had gone out} to talk about something which had happened before the past time we are thinking about (eg when I telephoned).

More examples:

We arrived at the cinema at 8.00, but the film had started at 7.30.

When I spoke to the woman I realized I had met her some­where before.

b. The Past Perfect is the past form of the Present Perfect. Compare:

Present Perfect Past Perfect

I haven't eaten all day today, I hadn't eaten all day yesterday,

so I'm very hungry now, so I was very hungry when I got home.

c. Compare the uses of the Past Perfect and Past Simple:

We got to the station at 8.00, We got to the station at 7.20

but the tram had left at 7.30. and the train left at 7.30.

When Sue arrived, we had When Sue arrived, we had dinner,

had dinner (We had dinner, (Sue arrived, then we had dinner.) then Sue arrived.)

80

a. When we are talking about the past, we sometimes want to refer back to an earlier past.

Dave had been driving for an hour when his car broke down.

We use the Past Perfect Continuous (eg Dave had been driving for an hour) to talk about something which had been in progress up to the past time we are talking about (eg when his car broke down).

More examples:

I'd been walking for about half an hour when it suddenly started to rain.

Mr Woods had been working for 50 years when he finally retired in 1985.

b. The Past Perfect Continuous is the past form of the Present Perfect Continuous.Compare:

Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous

I've been working hard all I'd been working hard all day, so

day, so I'm very tired now. I was very tired last night.

c. Compare the uses of the Past Perfect Continuous and the Past Continuous.

When I looked out of the When I looked out of the window,

window, it had been raining. it was raining. (= Rain was falling

(= It wasn't raining when I at the time I looked out.) looked out; it had stopped.)

Self check

1. Complete the sentences using the correct tense forms.

1. Mr and Mrs Davis were in an airplane. They were very nervous as the plane took off because they (never, fly) before.

2. "Why you (be) so angry when I (see) you yesterday?" "Oh, I (just, have) a big argument with my parents." 3.1 (try) contacting my pen pal when I (be) in the United States, but she (change) her address and no one (know) where she (move) to. 4.1 (stand) there for nearly half an hour when I (realize) I (be) at the wrong bus-

81

stop. 5. He (be) very nervous when he first (drive) in Britain because he (not, drive) on the left before. 6. When I (hear) his voice on the phone, I (know) I (speak) to him before. Then I (remember) I (already, meet) him. I also (remember) that I (not, like) him very much. 7. I'm really sorry I (be) so late last night. — That's OK. We (not, wait) long. 8. Robert (move) from Manchester to London in 1988. — How long he (live) in Manchester? 9. We (just, start) lunch when the telephone (ring). 10. Andrew was late for school yesterday. When he (get) to the classroom, the lesson (start). 11. They (wait) until everyone (be) ready and then they (start) the meeting. 12. (you, catch) the train yesterday? — No, it (already, leave) when we (get) to the station. 13. Andrew (do) the test before, so he (find) it very easy. 14.1 (not, laugh) at the joke because I (hear) it before. 15. When I (find) my wallet I (discover) that somebody (take) the credit cards out of it. 16.1 (feel) cold because I (stand) outside for over two hours. 17.1 (play) tennis so I (feel) hot and sticky. 18. The children's hair was wet because they (swim) in the sea. 19.1 (not, feel) well for weeks before I finally (go) to see the doctor. 20. They (not, eat) when I (go) to see them. The) (just, finish) their dinner. 21.1 (invite) Ann to dinner last night bui she couldn't come. She (already, arrange) to do something else 22.1 was very pleased to see Nora again after such a long time. I (not, see) her for five years. 23. They (drive) for about half an hour when they (realize) they (be) lost. 24. The house (be) very quiet when I got home. Everybody (go) to bed. 25. There (be) a car by the side of the road. It (break) down and the driver (try) to repair it So we (stop) to see if we could help. 26. Jim was on his hands and knees on the floor. He (look) for his cigarette lighter. 27. We (walk) along the road for about 20 minutes when a car (stop) and the driver (offer) us a lift. 28. When I (arrive), everyone (sit) round the table with their mouths full. They (eat). 29. When I (arrive) Ann (wait) for me. She was rather annoyed with me because I (be) late and she (wait) for a long time. 30. Class (begin, already) by the time I (get) there, so I (take, quietly) a seat in the back. 31.1 (see, never) any of Picasso's paintings before I (visit) the art museum. 32. Yesterday at a restaurant, I (see) Pam Donnelly, an old friend of mine. I (see, not) her in years. At first, I (recognize, not) her because she (lose) at least fifty pounds. 33. It is midnight. I (study) for five straight hours. No wonder I'm getting tired. 34. It was midnight. I (study) for five straight hours. No wonder I was getting

82

tired. 35. Wake up! You (sleep) long enough. It's time to get up. 36. At least two hundred people (wait) in line to buy tickets to the game. Some of them (stand) in line for more than four hours. We (decide) not to try to get tickets for ourselves. 37. He (be) a newspaper reporter before he (become) a businessman. 38.1 (feel) a little better after I (take) the medicine. 39. It (rain) hard, but by the time the class (be) over, the rain (stop). 40. Ann (listen) to loud rock music when her friends (arrive) but (turn) it off so all of them could study together. When they (finish), she (turn) it back on, and they (dance) and (sing) for two hours now. 41. Oscar (train) for the Olympics for the last three years and wants to make the national team next year. 42. Tom had a hard time finding a job. He (try) to get a new job for six months before he finally (find) a position at a local community college. Now he has a two-year contract. He (teach) there for only a few weeks, but he likes his job very much. 43. The marathon runner (run) for almost two hours when she (collapse) to the pavement. She (receive) immediate medical attention. 44. We (wait) for Nancy for the last two hours, but she still (arrive, not). 45. He (give) me back the book, (thank) me for lending it to him and (say) that he (enjoy) it very much; but I (know) that he (not read) it because most of the pages (be) still uncut. 46. When he (see) his wife off at the station, he (return) home as he (not have) to be at the airport till 9.30. He (not have) to pack, for his wife already (do) that for him and his case (be) ready in the hall. He (not have) to check the doors and windows either, for his wife always (do) that before she (leave) the house. All he (have) to do (be) to decide whether or not to take his overcoat with him. In the end he (decide) not to. At 8.30 he (pick) up his case, (go) out of the house and (slam) the door behind him. Then he (feel) in his pockets for the key, for his wife (remind) him to double-lock the front door. When he (search) all his pockets and (find) no key he (remember) where it (be). He (leave) it in his overcoat pocket. Then he (remember) something else; his passport and ticket (be) in his overcoat as well. 47. When the old lady (return) to her flat she (see) at once that burglars (break) in during her absence, because the front door (be) open and everything in the flat (be) upside down. The burglars themselves (be) no longer there, but they probably Just (leave) because a cigarette still (burn) on the table. Probably 'hey (hear) the lift coming up and (run) down the fire escape. They (help) themselves to her whisky too but there (be) a little left, so

83

she (pour) herself out a drink. She (wonder) if they (find) her jewellery and rather (hope) they had. The jewellery (be given) her by her husband, who (die) some years before. Since his death she (not have) the heart to wear it, yet she (not like) to sell it. Now it (seem) that fate (take) the matter out of her hands; and certainly the insurance money would come in handy. 48.1 (put) the £5 note into one of my books; but next day it (take) me ages to find it because I (forget) which book I (put) it into. 49. A woman (come) in with a baby, who she (say) just (swallow) a safety pin. 50. I (think) my train (leave) at 14.33, and (be) very disappointed when I (arrive) at 14.30 and (learn) that it just (leave). I (find) later that I (use) an out-of-date timetable. 51. He (park) his car under a No Parking sign and (rush) into the shop. When he (come) out of the shop ten minutes later the car (be) no longer there. He (wonder) if someone (steal) it or the police (drive) it away. 52. When I (open) the door I (see) a man on his knees. He clearly (listen) to our conversation and I (wonder) how much he (hear). When I (ask) him what he (do), he (say) that he (drop) a 50p piece outside the door and (look) for it.

II. Translate from Russian into English.

1. Когда я вернулся домой, дети уже спали. Мать сказала, что они спят с 9 часов. 2. Позови детей обедать. Они играют во дворе с самого утра. 3. В прошлом году мы отдыхали в Ялте. К концу июня я сдал все экзамены и был свободен. Мои родители заказали билеты заранее, и в начале июля мы отправились в Крым. 4. Он спросил, что мы сделали с тех пор, как начали работать над этой проблемой. 5. Пока мы шли со станции, он успел рассказать мне обо всем, что про­изошло со времени моего отъезда. 6. Виктор приехал? — Да, он здесь уже два дня. Он приехал еще в пятницу. 7. Обед уже был готов; все давно проголодались, но двоих гостей еще не было. 8. Девочка плакала. Она заблудилась. 9. Автобус за­паздывал, и я пожалел, что не взял такси. 10. Как только я заказал номер в гостинице, я поехал на завод. 11. Она дала мне письмо только после того, как я назвал свое имя. 12. Пре­подаватель сказал, что его произношение улучшилось после того, как он поработал в лингафонном кабинете. 13. Солнце еще не взошло, когда мы тронулись в путь. 14. Он не мог

84

принять участия в экспедиции, так как он еще не совсем оп­равился после болезни. 15. Целый день мы осматривали го­род. Вечером мы вернулись в гостиницу, усталые, но доволь­ные. 16. Когда я проснулся, уже стемнело. Я посмотрел на часы. Я спал три часа. 17. Преподаватель сказал, что я про­пустил много занятий и мне придется много работать. 18. Он отправил телеграмму до того, как мы ему позвонили. 19. Ко­гда я пришел, он сидел у камина, перелистывая журнал. 20. Студенты пишут контрольную работу уже почти два ча­са. Пока только двое из студентов сдали работы. 21. Я вер­нулся домой в 5 часов вечера. К этому времени моя жена уже уложила вещи и ждала меня. Мы вызвали такси по телефо­ну, и через полчаса были в аэропорту. Не успели мы прие­хать, как объявили наш рейс. 22. Художники работали с ут­ра, так как мы хотим повесить стенную газету еще сегодня вечером. 23. Утро было солнечное, но с одиннадцати часов погода изменилась, и теперь идет дождь. 24. Она выглядит усталой. Я думаю, что она опять читает книги по ночам.

Fluency

Listen, read and practise.

Did you hear what happened to me last week? It's typical of me, I suppose. I was going to Tunisia on businees with a colleague of mine. We were going to use my car to go to the airport and leave it in the long term car park. I had allowed plenty of time, which was fortunate, because when we got to the airport and I took the bags out of the car I realised that I had forgotten my passport! I couldn't think what to do at first. Then I thought, well, maybe my wife, Sue, could bring my passport to the airport. So I found a phone and telephoned home in the hope that she hadn't yet left for work. The phone rang six or seven times and I thought, "That's it. She's already left. There's no way I'm going to get my passport now." I was just about to put the phone down when my colleague Persuaded me to hang on for a few moments more. He said Sue might be in the bathroom or something. So I did, and then a second

85

or two later Sue answered the phone. She had, in fact, already left the house but by mistake she'd left a window open so she could hear the phone ringing from the street and rushed back in. Luckily, we live quite near the airport so she was able to jump in a taxi and bring me my passport. She got to the airport just in time and we caught the flight by the skin of our teeth! (Мы еле-еле (чудом) успели на самолет).

A. Questions

1. Where was the writer going to fly? Why? 2. What did he discover at the airport? 3. What did he decide to do? 4. Was his wife in or out? 5. Did the writer manage to get his passport?

B. Have you ever had an experience of this sort? Tell about it.

This incident ranks as one of the more embarrassing moments in my life. It happened about five years ago. I had invited my girlfriend, Emma, and her parents to dinner. I hadn't met her parents before and I wanted to impress them. I had planned soup first, then fresh salmon and a chocolate mousse for dessert. In fact, I was quite looking forward to it.

On the day of the dinner, I got home from work early and started to prepare the meal. Everything went fine. Emma and her parents arrived and, after giving them a drink in the sitting-room, I went into the kitchen to do the last minute preparations for the meal. I removed the fish, which was now ready, from the oven and decided to leave it in the kitchen while we were having the soup.

When I went into the kitchen to bring in the fish, to my horror I found my cat looking very pleased with himself in the middle of the kitchen. He had, of course, eaten the entire salmon and there were bits of bone all over the floor! Needless to say, Emma's parents were very understanding. In the end, we all went to a Chinese restaurant and I suppose it wasn't such a bad evening, all in all. However, I don't think I'll let the cat anywhere near the kitchen in future.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. If you think you 've got a good story about an embarrassing moment in your life, tell us about it.

86

C. Complete this newspaper story about an unlucky man. Put each verb in brackets into the correct tense form.

David Williams of Michester (have) such a terrible time this year that he ought to be in the Guiness Book of Records. The trouble (start) one morning last January when David (find) that his car (go) from outside his house. He (not see) it since.

In February David's joy at winning £200,000 on the football pools (not last) long — he (forget) to post the letter. In March he (buy) a new car, but he (not have) it more than a week when someone (crash) into the back of it. These disasters (continue) right up to the present time. Two days ago David (sit) on a seat that someone (finish) painting only minutes before. He (have) on a new suit that he (buy) only the previous week.

August (be) the worst month so far this year. David (spend) three days of his holiday at airports because of strikes. When he (arrive) home, he (discover) that someone (break) into his house. His video-recorder and television (disappear).

David doesn't know what he (do) to deserve all this bad luck. He just hopes his luck will change soon.

Friend: You've just been on holiday, Gordon? Gordon: That's right. Friend: Did you have a good time? Gordon: No, it was awful! The town was all right, but quite boring. The brochure described it as busy, exciting, full of nightlife. In fact, there were a few shops,

one museum, one disco and one very expensive restaurant. And the beach was really crowded! On the first day, after I'd been there about half an hour, there were hundreds of people; and there was no sand, just stones. The water was filthy. It's always dirty there! After I'd been swimming I needed a bath! Friend: What about your hotel? That was all right, wasn't it? Gordon: No, it wasn't! The service was dreadful. We only got coffee in our room after we'd telephoned recep­tion five times. And the rooms! Well, look. I've just written a letter... .

87

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. Speak about a holiday you didn 't enjoy.

D. Complete the text with the Past Simple or Past Perfect Simple, then retell the text.

On Friday, February 8th, I (have) a meeting in Leeds. I (go) to bed early the night before. I (be) tired because I (spend) the day shopping in London. I (know) that I (prepare) everything for the meeting and I (sleep) well.

On Friday morning I (leave) home at 6 a.m. I (get) to the station early — in fact the train (not arrive). I (not have) breakfast at home, so I (have) a cup of tea at the station before my train (come).

Later, on the train, I (take) out the letter about the meeting which I (put) in my briefcase. I (look) at the date of the meeting. I (cannot) believe it! I (make) a mistake. — I (be) a month too early!

James Stoker was fifteen years old when he became the youngest fully qualified doctor in the United States. James was a genius. By the age of three he had learnt to read and write. Before his sixth birthday his father had taught him to speak three languages fluently and he could play the violin perfectly. James spent all his time reading and studying. After he had passed his school-leaving exams at the age of nine, he went to college. A year and a half later, he had finished college and started at a medical school. At the age of twelve, he didn't know what football was, because nobody had taught him how to play. There hadn't been time.

At fifteen, he was ready to take the final examination. On the morning of the exam, although he had been studying for 48 hours, he wasn't tired. After the exam he walked through the park, but he didn't arrive home until seven o'clock in the evening, very tired and very dirty. What had he been doing? his mother wondered. He had met some eight-year-olds in the park. They had been teaching him how to play football.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text Retell the text.

B. Invent a story about another amazing child genius Write the story of his/her life in a short paragraph. Use the Past Perfect and phrases, such as by the time, at the age of, before, as soon as.

Bad J2uck

Tom: Did you enjoy the film yesterday?

Nick: Well, it's a long story. I got on the bus but I had forgotten my bus fare.

Tom: So what d'd you do?

Nick: I got off the bus and ran home, but everybody had gone out. I couldn't get in, because I hadn't taken my key. So I went to Paul's house to borrow some money...

Tom: Wait, let me guess: he'd spent all his money that after­noon.

Nick: No. He hadn't come home yet. When he finally arrived, I had been waiting for twenty minutes. After he had lent me some money, I caught the next bus. But when I got to the cinema, the film had almost finished.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. Use the words from the box in the Past Perfect Continuous to complete the sentences.

ear repair try rewise

tight run wait _swim

read sit watch

eg Jenny's eyes were tired.

She had been reading all evening.

1. Amanda was hot and sore. She ... in the sun. 2. Jane had oil on her hands. She... a friend's motor bike. 3. Tom was hot and out of breath. He... in the park. 4. Ben's clothes were dirty. He ... with Jason. 5. She was angry. She... for Mike for twenty minutes. 6. Ja­ne was nervous. She... a TV programme about crime. 7. Jenny had a stomach ache. She ... sour grapes. 8. Sue was tired. She ... for exams all night. 9. Mike was cold. He ... in an unheated pool. 10. Bob fell asleep. He ... to learn the Past Perfect Continuous.

89

D. Talk about the last time a) you felt very tired b) your feet ached c) you were very wet.

What had you been doing? How long had you been doing it?

Not long ago I was invited out to dinner by a girl called Sally. I had only met Sally twice, and she was very, very beautiful. I was flattered. "She likes me," I thought. But I was in for a disappoint­ment.

"I'm so sorry we asked you at such short notice," she said when I arrived, "but we suddenly realised there were going to be thirteen people at the table, so we just had to find somebody else."

A superstition. Thirteen. The unlucky number. Recently I came upon a little group of worried people, gathered round a man lying on the pavement beside a busy London road. They were waiting for an ambulance, because the man had been knocked down by a passing taxi. Apparently he had stepped off the pavement and into the street, to avoid walking under a ladder.

They say this superstition goes back to the days when the gallows (виселица) were built on a platform. To get up to the platform you had to climb a ladder. To pass under the shadow of that ladder was very unlucky...

Note: In modern English realize = realise, apologize = apologise

A. Questions

1. What happened to the writer? 2. How many times had he met Sally? 3. What was Sally like? 4. Why did she apologise when he arrived? 5. What had Sally realised? 6. What did the writer come across recently? 7. What had happened to the man lying on the pavement? 8. Why had he stepped off the pavement?

B. Read and retell the text.

Future forms Simple Future (Will)

1. Will (as an auxiliary of the future) is used to predict the future or to say what we think will happen:

90

Tomorrow will be another cold day in all parts of the country.

In the future, machines will do many of the jobs that people do today.

Tom won't pass his examination. He hasn't done any work for it.

Who do you think will win the match on Sunday?

We won't arrive home before midnight tonight. When we predict the future, we often use will with the following verbs and expressions: think, expect, believe, be sure, be afraid.

I'm sure you'll enjoy the film if you decide to go.

I don't think I'll go out tonight. I'm too tired.

I believe that inflation will fall to 3 per cent next year.

I expect they'll be here at around 10 o'clock tomorrow

morning.

We also use will in this way with adverbs of probability, eg probably, perhaps, certainly.

Martin will probably phone us this evening. Perhaps I'll see you tomorrow.

Willis also common when there is another clause withif, when, until, as soon as, unless, before and after.

If you hurry you'll catch the 4 o'clock train.

He will come home as soon as the meeting is over.

She will stay here until Jack returns.

2. Will (as a modal auxiliary) is used to express decision or intention often made at the moment of speaking, that is, not planned or premeditated.

"Would you like something to drink?" "Oh, thank you. I'll have some orange juice."

"There's someone at the door." "Is there? Oh, I'll see who it is."

"I'm going shopping." "Oh, are you? I'll come with you, then."

According to the context, this use of will can express willing­ness, intention, promise, offer, request.

91

I'll help you if I can. (willingness, intention) = I'm willing

to help you.

"I need some money." "Don't worry. I'll lend you some."

(offer).

Thank you for lending me the money. I'll pay you back on

Friday, (promise)

I won't tell Tom what you said. I promise.

Will you shut the door, please? (request)

Will you please be quiet? I'm trying to concentrate.

3. Shall (as a modal auxiliary) is used to ask for advice eg What shall Idol and to make offers eg Shall I help you? and suggestions eg Shall we go out this evening!

4. Will is also used to make statements of fact about the future.

I'll be forty next month.

5. In formal English, will can be used to speak about definite future plans:

Prime Minister: The government will lower all taxes, and I will ensure that every family in this country will benefit.

In everyday English we do not normally announce future arran­gements about ourselves with will. The Present Continuous sounds more natural:

I will leave England in June. — formal

I'm leaving England in June. — more natural

However, in announcement of timetables, schedules and other programmes will can be used:

The wedding will take place at St Andrew's on June 27th.

Present Continuous and Simple Present with a future meaning

a) Present Continuous with a future meaning Study this example situation:

This is Tom s diary for next week. 92

He is playing tennis on Monday afternoon. He is going to the dentist on Tuesday morning. He is having dinner with Ann on Friday.

In all these examples, Tom has already decided and arranged to do these things.

When you are talking about what you have already arranged to do, use the Present Continuous (/ am doing).

— A: What are you doing tomorrow evening? B: I'm going to the theatre.

— A: Are you playing football tomorrow?

B: Yes, but Tom isn't playing. He has hurt his leg.

— A: Ann is coming tomorrow.

B: Oh, is she? What time is she arriving?

A: At 10.15.

B: Are you meeting her at the station?

A: I can't. I'm working tomorrow morning.

When we use the Present Continuous in this way, we often give the future time, (eg on Saturday evening, on Monday, this afternoon, next weekend)

The Present Continuous cannot be used to express an event that has not been arranged by human beings. We cannot say: It is snowing tomorrow. The sun is rising at 5.00 tomorrow morning.

The verbs found in this tense are for the kind of events you would put in your diary, that is, verbs of activity and motion.

b) Simple Present with a future meaning

We use the Simple Present when we are talking about timetables, programmes, etc. (for example: for public transport, cinemas)

— What time does the film begin?

— The train leaves Plymouth at 10.30 and arrives in Lon­don at 13.45.

— The football match starts at 8 o'clock.

— Tomorrow is Wednesday.

— The Cup Final takes place on April 13.

93

We do not normally use the Simple Present for present arrangements.

What time are you meeting Ann? (not "do you meet")

Self check

1. Put the verbs in brackets into the Simple Future, the Present Continuous or the Simple Present.

1.1 am sure that I (recognize) him. 2. Look! I've broken the teapot. What Mrs Pitt (say)? — She (not mind); she never liked that one. 3. There (be) a big meeting here tomorrow. 4. We (have) a party next Saturday. Would you like to come? 5. The concert this evening (start) at 7.30. 6. I (not go) away for my holidays next month because I haven't got enough money. You (go) away? 7. He has cut my hair too short. — Don't worry; it (grow) again very quickly. 8. Ann, we (go) to town. You (come) with us? 9. What time the next train (leave)? 10. Where you (meet) them? — I (meet) them at midnight in the middle of the wood. 11. He (not forget) to come. 12. The art exhibition (open) on 3 May and (finish) on 15 July. 13. George, is it true that you (get) married next week? 14.1 wonder if he (succeed). 15.1 (know) the result in a week. 16. Perhaps he (arrive) in time for lunch. 17.1 wonder how many of us still (be) here next year. 18. Newspaper announcement- The President (drive) along the High Street in an open carriage. 19. You (do) anything tonight? — Yes, I (go) to my carpentry class. 20. Announcement: Mr Pitt (present) the prizes. 21. The Queen (give) a garden party next week. You (go)? 22. Notice: The management (not be) responsible for articles left on the seats. 23. What we (do) now?—Wait. 24. My grandparents (celebrate) their golden wedding next week. 25. We (go) to the cinema? — Let's. 26. What we (do) with all the food that's left over? 27. When you (hear) the result? — I (not hear) for another week. 28.1 (not have) to do any cooking for a month. I'm going to a hotel. 29.1 (put) more salt in the stew? — Please do. 30. I (go) to the dentist tomorrow. Mr Pitt (take) my class. 31. There's someone at the door. — Is there? Oh, I (see) who it is. 32. I'm a bit cold. I think I (put on) a sweater. 33.1 (catch) the 6.30 plane tomorrow. — Where you (leave) your car? —I (not take) the car.

34. You (turn) off the TV, please? No one is watching it. 35. Where you (go) for your next holiday? — I don't know yet but we probably (go) to Spain. 36. We (have) a drink with Peter tonight. It's his last night; he (leave) tomorrow. 37. I (see) my bank manager tomorrow. I'm going to ask him for a loan but I expect he (refuse). 38. I probably (come) to London some time next month. I (give) you a ring nearer the time and tell you when I (come). 39. We'd better leave a message for Jack. Otherwise he (not know) where we've gone. — All right. I (leave) a note on his table. 40. Where you (meet) Tom? — We (meet) at Covent Garden. He (take) me to see the Magic Flute. 41. I (wait) for you? — No, don't bother. This (take) a long time, I'm sure, and I don't want you to miss your train. 42. I (fly) to New York next week. — You (take) your wife with you? 43.1 (ring) Peter tonight. (We have arranged this.) I (ask) him to ring you? — No, don't bother. I (be) away most of the week. I (write) to him. 44. Mary: Jack and I (go) out tonight. We (have) dinner at the Festival Hall and (go) to a concert afterwards. Ann: And what about the children? I (come) and babysit if you like. Mary: Oh, my neighbour (come) in to sit with them. But thank you for offering, Ann. I (ask) you next time.

Going to (/ am going to do)

1. We use going to (do) when we say what we have already decided to do, what we intend to do in the future, it expresses a premeditated intention. The going to future shows that we have a clear plan in our mind.

I'm going to have a party next weekend. (I have a plan to have a party.)

He's going to buy a second-hand car. (He intends to buy a second-hand car.)

— A: There's a film on television tonight. Are you going

to watch it? B: No, I'm too tired. I'm going to have an early night.

— A: I hear Ann has won a lot of money. What is she going

to do with it? B: I've heard she's going to travel round the world.

— A: Have you made the coffee yet?

B: No, but I'm just going to make it. (just = just at this moment)

2. Going to can also express a prediction, especially when it is based on a present fact. There is evidence now that something is certain to happen.

She's going to have a baby. (We can see she's pregnant.) Liverpool are going to win the match. (It's four nil, and there's only five minutes left.) It isn't going to rain. (Look at that lovely blue sky.) Watch out! Those boxes are going to fall over! Oh dear. Too late.

3. We use was/were going to to say what someone intended to do in the past (but didn't do):

— We were going to travel by tram but then we decided to go by car.

— A: Did Tom do the examination?

В: No, he was going to do it but in the end he changed his mind.

— I was just going to cross the road when someone shouted "Stop!"

Will or Going to

1. We use both will and going to in predictions about the future, but there is a difference:

We use will to talk about what We use going to (not will) when

we think or believe will happen there is something m the present

m the future situation that shows what will

happen in the future The speaker feels sure about what will happen because of the situation now

I think Tom will get the job Look at those black clouds It's

We'll be there by Monday night. going to ram (the clouds are there now)

I feel terrible I think I'm going to be sick (I feel terrible now )

96

2. We use both will and going to to express intention, to talk what we intend to do but there is a difference here:

Will is used to express a Going to is used to express a

decision or intention made future plan, decision or intention

at the moment of speaking made before the moment of speaking.

"Oh dear' I've spilt some wine "Why have you moved all the

on my jacket " "Don't worry furniture out of the room?" "I'm

I'll clean it for you " going to clean the carpet."

What shall I do tomorrow? «Why are you putting on these

I know I'll paint the kitchen old clothes'?" "I'm going to paint

the kitchen "

Self check

I. Complete the sentences using will or going to and the verbs-in brackets

1. What can I do this evening? I know! I (go) and see Sue.2. "Would you like to come to my house this evening?" "Yes, all right. I (come) at 9 o'clock." 3. I don't feel very well. I think I (faint). 4. "It's Simon's birthday soon. I've decided to buy him the new Blues Brothers record." "Oh, he doesn't like the Blues Brothers any more." "Oh, really? Well, I (get) him something to wear." 5. Oh, no! Look at those cars! They (crash)! 6. "I could lend you some money if you like." "Could you? I (pay) you back on Friday." 7. "Why did you buy this flour?" "I (make) some bread." 8. "Could you get me a glass of water?" "Certainly. I (get) you one. Would you like some ice in it?" 9. I arranged to borrow some money because I (buy) a motorcycle tomorrow. 10. "Could someone please open the window?" "I (do) it." 11. "I (wear) a dark suit to the wedding reception. How about you?" "I'm not sure." 12. "What are your vacation plans?" "I (spend) two weeks on a Greek island." 13. "Hi, Josh. I hear that you (move) into a new apartment." " That's right. Sara and I found a great apartment on 45th Street." "I (help) you on moving day if you like." 14. "So you (get) married." "That's right. On September 22nd." "My congratulations." 15. "If you can wait just a few minutes, I (walk) to the meeting with you." "Okay. I (meet) you by the elevator." 16. "Can you give Ed a message for me?" "Sure.

97

I probably (see) him at the meeting this evening." 17. "What do you want to be when you grow up?" "I (be) an astronaut." 18. "What's all this paint for? You (paint) your house?" "No, we (paint) my mother's house." 19. "Let's make something easy for dinner. Got any ideas?" "I (make) some hamburgers. Why don't you make a salad?" "Sounds good." 20. "Excuse me, waiter! This isn't what I ordered. I ordered a chicken sandwich." "Sorry, sir, I (take) this back and get your sandwich." 21. "Did you remember to book seats?" "Oh no, I forgot. I (telephone) for them now." 22. "You (buy) meat?" "No, I (not eat) meat any more. I (eat) vegetables." 23. "Look what I've just bought at an auction!" "What an extraordinary thing! Where you (put) it?" 24. "You (open) the door for me, please?" "Yes, certainly." 25. "You (do) the washing-up tonight?" "No, I think it can wait till tomorrow." 26. "You (lend) me your season ticket?" "No, I (not lend) it to you. It is against the law." 27. I haven't bought any cigarettes because I (give) up smoking. 28. "There's the phone again. Take no notice." "You (not answer) it?" 29. That boat's full of water. It (sink)! 30. You aren't wearing your climbing boots. You (not climb) the mountain with the others? 31. "You (lend) me your fishing rod?" "Yes, of course. Where you (fish)?" 32. "You (eat) any more of this, or I (tell) the waiter to take it away?" 33. "You (bath) your dog?" "Yes, you (help) me?" 34. Five French sailors (sail) round the world on a catamaran. They hope that they (complete) their trip in only 79 days. If they succeed, they (set) a new world record. Jean Dubois told our reporter, "It (be) an easy journey. Our worst problem probably (be) seasickness." 35. John has to go to the airport to catch a plane. He hasn't got a car:

John: Alan, can you take me to the airport this evening?

Alan: Of course I (take) you. I'd be delighted. Later that day Eric offers to take John to the airport.

Eric: John, do you want me to take you to the airport?

John: No, thanks, Eric. Alan (take) me. 36. He: Where we (spend) the night?

She: Cardiff. I've booked us in at the Angel Hotel. Why do you ask?

He: That's another thirty miles away. We (run) out of petrol before we get there. I (stop) at the next filling-station. Half an hour later.

She: The road goes on forever.

He: We (get) stuck. The car's stopping. We (have) to

walk.

She: Come on then. Perhaps someone (give) us a lift. He: Not a filling-station in sight and look at those black

clouds. It (rain).

She: Look! A car's coming. I (wave) to the driver. He: Oh good! He's slowing down. He (stop).

37. Janet: Someone told me-you and the family (go) and live

in Alaska. Is it true?

Graham: Yes, it is. I (work) for a building company. Janet: That (be) interesting.

Graham: I hope so. It (be) something different. It certainly ' (be) a bit colder than London.

Janet: When you (leave)? Graham: On the tenth of next month. We (be) there in three

weeks. Janet: Oh, so it (not be) long now. Jerry and I (be) sad to

see you go. Graham: Oh, we (be) back some time. We (not be) there

for ever. And you can always come to Alaska and

see us. Janet: Well, that isn't a bad idea. We (visit) my sister in

Vancouver next summer. Graham: Oh, that's great. We (see) you next summer then.

38. A: Why is Carlos wearing a suit and tie? He usually

wears jeans to class.

B: He (give) a speech at the faculty lunch today.

A: Really? What he (speak) about?

B: About university study in his country.

Present Continuous (7 am doing) or Going to?

1. Present Continuous is more natural when you are talking about planned arrangements, going to is preferable when you are talking about planned intentions.

Notice the difference in meaning between:

Present Continuous

I'm buying a new car on Saturday. (It is arranged, already organized.)

Going to

I am going to buy a new car.

(I intend to buy one, but I have no particular car in mind.)

There is often little difference between a future intention and a future arrangement, and often going to and the Present Continuous are interchangeable.

We're going to see

Hamlet at the Royal Theatre tonight. We're seeing

2. When we make predictions about the future, we can use going to (or will), but not the Present Continuous.

It's going to rain tomorrow. (It's raining tomorrow is not possible.)

Self check

I. Use the Present Continuous or going to.

1. It's 6.30. We (miss) our train. 2. You (eat) all that? 3. This airplane (crash). 4. I've lent you my car once. I (not do) it again. 5.1 (play) bridge tonight with Tom and Ann. 6. What you (tell) the police? — I (tell) them the truth. 7. What you (do) with the money? 8. I (read) you his answer to my letter of complaint. 9. There was very little blossom this spring. Apples (be) scarce. 10.1 don't like this macaroni. I (not finish) it. 11. Mr Pitt has just phoned to say that he (not come) back till Wednesday night 12. Her parents (give) a party for her next month. They (invite) sixty guests. 13. The inspector (ask) you a few questions. 14. He (wash) the car? 15. She (sing) in her first big concert next month. 16. He (go) to Spain for his holidays. — He (fly)? — No, he (go) by boat. 17. Where you (go) this evening? — I (not go) anywhere. I (stay) at home. I (write) some letters. 18. You (do) anything next weekend? — Yes, my nephews (come) and I (show) them

100

round London. — You (take) them to the theatre? — No, they're too young for that. I (take) them to the zoo. 19. Where you (go) for your holidays? — I (go) to Norway. — What you (do) there? -— I (fish). 20. We (start) early tomorrow. We (go) to Ben Nevis. — You (climb) Ben Nevis? — Not me. Tom (climb) it. I (sit) at the bottom and do some sketching. 21.1 hear you (go) to the regatta tomorrow. You (sail) in it? — No, but we (take) our cameras. We (try) to photograph the winning yachts. 22. You (not ask) your boss for a rise? — It isn't worth while. I (leave) at the end of the week.—Really? And what you (do) then? You (have) a holiday? — No, I (start) another job the following Monday. 23. Mrs Jones (go) to hospital. She (have) her appendix out. — Who (look) after the children? — Her sister (come) down from Scotland. 24. He isn't happy at his boarding school. I (send) him to a day school. — Have you decided on the other school? — No, but I (see) the headmaster of the Park School this afternoon. I'll probably send him there. 25.1 (buy) a new coat. The weather report says that it (be) very cold. 26. I hear you've bought a new house. — Yes. I (move) in next week. — You (have) a house warming party? — Not just yet. I (paint) the house first. 27. That rider (fall) off.

28. Ann has won a car in a competition but she can't drive. Tom asks her, "What you (do) with the car? You (sell) it?" Ann answers, "No, I (learn) to drive. I (have) my first lesson next Monday."

29. Be careful! You (break) that glass. 30. He (not come) next Saturday. 31. Look out! You (hurt) yourself with that knife. 32. It (snow) later tonight.

Future Continuous

*

1. We use the Future Continuous (will be doing) to talk about something which will be in progress at a time in the future.

I'll be having dinner at 7.00.

Don't phone me at 8.00. I'll be doing my homework then.

What will you be doing this time next week?

I'll be waiting at the station when your train arrives.

2. We also use the Future Continuous for planned actions.

I'll be going to the city centre later. Can I get you anything?

With this meaning will be doing is similar to am doing.

I'm going to the city centre later.

"Would you like me to give Peter a message for you?" "Oh, I don't want to trouble you." "It's no trouble, really. I'll be seeing Peter tomorrow anyway."

We often use will (you) be-mg? to ask about people's plans, especially when we want something or want someone to do something.

"Will you be using your bicycle this evening?" "No, you can take it."

"Will you be passing the post office when you go out?" "Yes, why?"

When we use will be doing form in this way, it often suggests that we do not want to change the other person's plans.

3. The Future Continuous also expresses an action that will occur in the natural course of events, independently of the will or intention of anyone directly concerned.

In a few minutes we will be landing at Heathrow Airport. Hurry up! The bus will be leaving any minute.

Self check

I. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Continuous or the Simple Future.

1. I'll call for her at 7. — No, don't; she still (have) bteakfast then. 2. You've just missed the last train! —Never mind. I (walk). 3. You ask him. It's no good my asking him. He (not do) anything I say. 4. He says he (meet) us at the bus stop, but I'm sure he (forget) to do it. 5. Don't ring now; she (watch) her favourite TV programme. — All right. I (ring) at 8.30.6. Mother: I'm so grateful for the help you've given Jack; I hope you (be) able to go on helping him. Teacher: I'm afraid I (not teach) him next term because I only teach the fifth form and he (be) in the sixth. 7. School­boy (in school dining hall): The last week of our last term' I wonder what we (do) this time next year. Friend: Well, we (not

eat) school dinners anyway. That's one comfort. 8. I'd like to double-glaze the bedroom windows. — All right. I (get) the materials at once and we (do) it this weekend. 9. You (have) lunch with me on the 24th? — I'd love to, but I'm afraid I (do) my exam then. 10. We (meet) him at the station? — Oh, he (not come) by train. He never comes by train. 11. Wait a bit. Don't drink your tea. The milkman (come) in a minute. 12. I (work) for Mr Pitt next week as his own secretary (be) away. 13. You (have) something to drink, won't you? 14. Why did you take his razor? He (look) for it everywhere tomorrow. 15. I've fished that river every year for the last fifteen years. — Well, nobody (fish) it next year. The water's been polluted. All the fish are dead. 16.1 don't feel well enough to go to the station to meet him. — I (meet) him for you. But how I (recognize) him? — He's small and fair, and he (wear) a black and white school cap. 17.1 hope you (do) well in the race tomorrow. I (think) of you. 18. You've left the light on. — Oh, so I have. I (go) and turn it off. 19. I've just been appointed assistant at the local library. — Then you (work) under my sister. She is head librarian there. 20.1 want to post this letter but I don't want to go out in the rain. — I (post) it for you. I (go) out anyway as I have to take the dog for a walk. 21. The prima ballerina is ill so I expect her understudy (dance) instead. 22. This time next Monday I (sit) in a Paris cafe reading Le Figaro. — You (not read). You (look) at all the pretty girls. 23.1 (cook) any fish you catch, but I (not clean) them. You'll have to do that yourself. 24. It is nearly autumn; soon the leaves (change) colour. 25. Mother (on phone): My son has just burnt his hand very badly. Doctor: I (come) at once. 26. My son will be in the sixth form next year. — That means that old Adder (teach) him mathematics. 27.1 (not show) you any films this time. The projector's broken down. 28. Housewife: This time next week I (not wash) up the breakfast things. I (have) breakfast in bed in a luxury hotel. 29. Cus­tomer in restaurant: Waiter, this plate is dirty. Waiter: I'm sorry, sir. I (bring) you another. 30.1 (not wear) glasses when you see me next. I (wear) contact lenses. You probably (not recognize) me. 31. You (use) your typewriter tomorrow evening? — No, you can take it. 32. Guest: May I use your phone to ring for a taxi? Hostess: Oh, there's no need for that; my son (drive) you home. 33. Come on deck; we (enter) harbour in a few minutes. 34. Are you nearly ready? Our guests (arrive) any minute. 35. She

103

says that she (not lend) me the book, because I never give books back. 36. James (leave) for Australia quite soon. He has got a job there. 37.1 (get) you some aspirins if you like. The chemist's still (be) open. — No, don't bother. The office boy (go) out in a minute to post the letters; I (ask) him to buy me some. 38. I (write) postcards every week, I promise, and I (try) to make them legible. If necessary I (type) them. 39. I'm going to Switzerland next week. — You're lucky. The wild flowers just (come) out. 40. You (see) Tom this afternoon. I'd like you to give him a message. 41.1 (tell) her what you say but she (not believe) it. 42. This time tomorrow everyone (read) of your success and all sorts of people (ring) up to congratulate you. 43. You (use) your dictionary this morning? — No, you can borrow it if you like. 44. We've just got to the top in time. The sun (rise) in a minute.

Future Perfect and Future Perfect Continuous

1. We use the Future Perfect (will have done) to talk about something that will be completed by (not later than) a certain time in the future.

When we use this structure, we think of a future time and look back from that future time to say that something will be complete.

I'll have finished dinner by 8.00.

"I'll phone you at 11.00." "No, I'll have gone to bed by

then. Can you phone earlier?"

I'll have worked here for a year next September.

Next year is Ted and Amy's 25th wedding anniversary.

They will have been married for 25 years. I

We're late. I expect the film will have already started by

the time we get to the cinema.

2. The Future Perfect Continuous (will have been doing) describes a continuous action (very often one which is already in progress) which will finish by a certain point in the future:

In ten minutes we'll have been waiting for this bus for exactly an hour!

Amer will have been studying English for ten months by the time he goes back to Syria in October.

Self check

I. Use either the Future Perfect or the Future Perfect Continuous.

1. By the time I get up tomorrow morning, the sun already (rise). 2. He's never going to stop talking. In 15 more minutes, we (listen) to his lecture for three solid hours. I don't even know what he's saying anymore. 3. This is a long trip! By the time we get to Miami, we (ride) on this bus for over 15 hours. 4. What? You're smoking another cigarette? At this rate you (smoke) a whole pack before lunchtime. Don't you think you should cut down a little? 5. This is the longest flight I have ever taken. By the time we get to New Zealand, we (fly) for 13 hours. I'm going to be exhausted. 6. Douglas has been putting some money away every month to prepare for his trip to South America next year. By the end of this year, he (save) enough. It looks like he's going to make it. 7. Can you believe? According to our grammar teacher, by the end of this semester she (teach) more than 3,000 students from 42 different countries. She has been teaching for nearly 20 years — and she still loves it! 8. This traffic is terrible. We're going to be late. By the time we (get) to the airport, Bob's plane already (arrive), and he'll be wondering where we are. 9. This morning I came to class at 9.00. Right now it is 10.00, and I am still in class. I have been sitting at this desk for an hour. By 11.00,1 (sit) here for two hours. 10.1 don't understand how these marathon runners do it! The race began over an hour ago. By the time they reach the finish line, they (run) steadily for more than two hours. I don't think I can run more than two minutes! 11. What? He got married again? At this rate, he (have) a dozen wives by the time he dies. 12. We have been married for a long time. By our next anniversary, we (be) married for 43 years. 13. I hope they (repair) this road by the time we come back next summer. 14. By the end of next week my wife (do) her spring cleaning and we'll be able to relax again. 15. By this time tomorrow we (have) our injections. 16. By the end of next year I (work) for him for 45 years. 17. He's only 35 but he's started losing his hair already. He (lose) all by the time he's 50. 18. In two months' time he

105

(finish) his preliminary training and will be starting work. 19. I'll be back again at the end of next month. — I hope I (pass) my driving test by then. If I have, I'll meet your train. 20. When Professor Jones retires next month, he (teach) for 45 years. 21.1 will go to bed at 10 p.m. He will get home at midnight. I (sleep) for two hours by the time he gets home.

When and If sentences (When I dо../if I do...)

1 .We use the present tense (usually the simple present) to refer to the future in clauses of time and condition after when, while, as soon as, after, before, until/till, if, unless, provided/providing (that).

I'll buy a newspaper when I go out.

We won't go out until it stops raining.

We'll go to the beach if the weather is nice.

I'll go to the party provided you go too.

Before you leave you must visit the museum.

Can you look after the children while I am out?

I'll buy a new car as soon as I have enough money.

The door will not open unless you push it hard.

I'll lend you the money providing that you pay me back

tomorrow.

If he is sleeping when I come, I won't wake him up.

2. You can also use the Present Perfect (I have done) after when/ after/until etc. to show that the first action will be finished before the second.

When I've read this book, you can have it.

Don't say anything while Tom is here. Wait here until he

has gone.

It is often possible to use the Simple Present or Present Perfect.

Self check

I, Put the verbs into the correct tense forms.

1. If you drop that bottle, it (break) 2. He (not write) to you unless you (write) to him. 3. You (understand) when you (be) older. 4.1 (believe) it when I (see) it. 5. You (be) able to drive after you (have) another five lessons. 6. Unless he (run), he (not catch) the train. 7. He (lend) it to you if you (ask) him. 8. If petrol pump attendants (go) on strike we (not have) any petrol. 9. He (be) offended if you (not invite) him. 10. She (have) $ 6000 a year when she (be) twenty. 11. If you (leave) your roller skates on the path someone (fall) over them. If they (fall) over them and hurt themselves they (sue) you. 12. What your father (say) when he (hear) about this accident? — He (not say) much but he (not lend) me the car again. 13. You've been a good child, and when we (get) home I (give) you a sweet. 14. My father (be) furious when he (see) what you have done. 15. As soon as I (hear) from him, I (let) you know. 16. The lift (not start) until you (press) that button. 17.1 (stay) in bed till the clock (strike) seven. 18. As soon as the holidays (begin) this beach (become) very crowded. 19. Don't count on a salary increase before you actually (get) it. 20.1 (pay) you when I (get) my cheque. 21. If it (rain) this evening I (not go) out. 22. Before Tom (go) to bed, he always (brush) his teeth. 23. Before Tom (go) to bed later tonight, he (write) a letter to his girlfriend. 24. After I (get) home from school every afternoon, I (drink) a cup of tea. 25. Janet (meet) me at the airport when my train (arrive) tomorrow. 26. When I (be) in New York next week, I (stay) at the Park Plaza Hotel. 27. Cindy and I (go) to the beach tomorrow if the weather (be) warm and sunny. 28. Jack (watch) a football game on TV right now. As soon as the game (be) over, he (cut) the grass in the back yard. 29. As soon as I (get) home every day, my children always (run) to the door to meet me. 30.1 (go) to New York often. When I (be) in New York, I usually (see) a Broadway play. 31. If I (not study) tonight, I (not pass) my chemistry exam. 32.1 think he (get) the job. I (be) surprised if he (not get) it. 33.1 hope to be there by 10.30. But if I (not be) there, don't wait for me. 34. We (not start) dinner until Jack (arrive). 35. Please don't touch anything before the police (come). 36. You (be) lonely without me while I (be) away? 37. Before you

107

(leave), don't forget to shut the windows. 38. Everyone (be) surprised if he (pass) the examination. 39. If I (need) any help, I (ask) you. 40. Come on! Hurry up! Ann (be) annoyed if we (be) late. 41. After I (do) the shopping, I (come) straight back home. 42. I'm going to watch a TV program at nine. Before I (watch) that program, I (write) a letter to my parents. 43. I'm going to eat lunch at 12.30. After I (eat), I probably (take) a nap. 44. I'm sure it will stop raining soon. As soon as the rain (stop), I (walk) to the drugstore to get some film. 45. Tomorrow I'm going to leave for home. When I (arrive) at the airport, my whole family (wait) for me. 46. When I (get) up tomorrow morning, the sun (shine), the birds (sing), and my roommate still (lie) in bed fast asleep. 47. How can I get in touch with you while you (be) out of town? — I (stay) at the Pilgrim Hotel. You can reach me there. 48. After Ali (return) to his country next month, he (start) working at the Ministry of Agriculture. 49. Relax. The plumber is on his way. He (be) here before there (be) a flood in the kitchen. Let's jusi keep mopping up the water the best we can.

50. A: How long you (stay) in this country?

B: I (plan) to be here for about one more year. I (hope) to

graduate a year from this June. A: What you (do) after you (leave)? B: I (return) home and (get) a job. How about you? A: I (be) here for at least two more years before I (return)

home and (get) a job.

51. Heat the oil till it (begin) to smoke. 52. You drive first, and when you (be) tired, I (take) over. 53. We (send) you the goods as soon as we (receive) your cheque. 54 .The plane (not take off) til! the fog (lift). 55. When you (do) the bedrooms, remember to sweep under the beds. 56. He (save) £500 a year. By the time he (retire) he (save) £20,000. 57. When you (read) the book, leave it in the hospital for someone else to read.

II. Translate from Russian into English.

1. Как только я приеду в Лондон, я напишу тебе письмо. 2. Если погода будет хорошая, мы сможем сходить в лес за грибами. 3. Если ты поедешь на юг, то закажи билет туда и обратно. 4. Если он будет спать, когда я приду, я разбужу его. 5. Я пойду прогуляться прежде, чем лягу спать. 6. Я про-

108

смотрю газеты после того, как мы поужинаем. 7. Пока я буду убирать квартиру, ты будешь готовить обед. 8. Я приду, если не заболею. 9. Я не знаю, придет ли Нина. 10. Он будет нака­зан, если не сдержит свое обещание. 11. Как только ты сдашь экзамены, мы поедем на юг. 12. Интересно, примет ли он участие в экспедиции. 13. Что ты будешь делать, если никто тебя не встретит? — Я оставлю вещи в камере хранения и поеду на автобусе. 14. Мы обсудим этот вопрос после того, как вернется директор. 15. Присмотри за моим сыном, пока я не вернусь. 16. Мы поедем на рыбалку в субботу, если не будет дождя. 17. Я зайду за тобой, как только освобожусь. 18. Она не знает, когда приедет ее брат. 19. Давай зайдем в кафе после того, как закончится собрание. 20. Если он по­звонит мне сегодня, я попрошу его заказать билеты на само­лет. 21. Прежде чем я уеду, я поговорю с управляющим. 22. Я останусь здесь, пока не улажу все дела. 23. Если Петр опо­здает, нам придется его подождать. 24. Когда вы увидите г-на Смита, попросите его позвонить мне. 25. Если ты останешь­ся еще на три дня, я смогу показать тебе достопримечатель­ности города. 26. До того как я уеду, мне нужно купить по­дарки для друзей. 27. Если я не успею на поезд, то я проведу ночь в гостинице. 28. Я приду, как только сделаю домашнее задание. 29. Ты не знаешь, когда он вернется? —Когда он вернется, я скажу тебе. 30. Я куплю ему подарок, если не потрачу все деньги на книги. 31. Когда у тебя следующее занятие по немецкому языку? — В среду. — Ты собираешь­ся на нем присутствовать? — Нет, в среду утром я уезжаю в командировку в Лондон. — Сколько времени ты там пробу­дешь? — Около двух недель. Я очень сожалею, что мне при­дется пропустить занятия по немецкому языку. 32. Давай пой­дем завтра в кино. В "Октябре" идет хороший детектив. — Ты сможешь купить билеты? — Да, конечно. Мы пойдем в кино днем или вечером?—Я бы предпочел вечерний сеанс. — Тогда я куплю билеты на восьмичасовой сеанс. Я позвоню тебе, когда куплю билеты. — Спасибо. — А что ты делаешь сегодня вечером? — Сегодня вечером я буду писать письма своим родственникам. А ты? — А я весь вечер буду смотреть телевизор. 33. Аня, ты не хочешь поиграть в теннис в суббо­ту утром? — Извини, я иду в парикмахерскую в субботу ут­ром. — А как насчет воскресенья? Почему бы нам не пока-

109

таться на велосипеде? — В воскресенье я буду готовиться к экзамену по физике. 34. Я завтра устраиваю вечернику. —-Сколько человек придет на вечеринку? — Около десяти. — Мне остаться и помочь тебе? — О, да, пожалуйста. Это очень любезно с твоей стороны. 35. Сколько времени вы женаты? — В будущем году исполнится десять лет, как я женат. 36. Сколь­ко времени вы работаете на этом заводе? — В мае исполнит­ся пять лет, как я здесь работаю. 37. Сколько времени вы знаете Смита? — В конце года исполнится пять лет, как мы знаем друг друга. 38. Сколько времени вы изучаете англий­ский язык? — В июле исполнится два года, как я его изучаю. 39. В котором часу отправляется самолет? — В 8 утра. — Сколько времени длится полет? — Около двух часов. — Ко­гда мы прибываем в Москву? — В 10 утра. 40. Куда ты едешь в отпуск? — Я еду в Брайтон. —Когда ты едешь? — 10 авгу­ста. — Ты едешь поездом? — Да. —Как долго ты там пробу­дешь? — Две недели. — Где ты остановишься? — В гости­нице. — Желаю тебе хорошего отдыха. 41. Ты собираешься остаться в школе в будущем году? — Нет, мне надоела шко­ла. — Что ты собираешься делать? — Я намерен поискать работу. — Какого рода работу? — Я собираюсь работать в банке. — Мне кажется, это скучная работа. — Я не согласен с тобой. 42. Что ты делаешь завтра утром? — Я буду делать уроки. — А что ты делаешь завтра днем? — Завтра днем я играю в футбол. Это очень важный матч. — Какая жалость! — Почему? — Завтра мы идем на ярмарку. Я хотел пригласить тебя пойти со мной. — К сожалению, я не смогу пойти. Спа­сибо за приглашение.

Fluency

Listen, read and practise.

Fred is a bachelor and his life is carefully organized. Brenda, one of the young secretaries in the office where Fred works, think ^ he is rather nice. She suggests that they might go to a film together one evening.

110

"What about Monday evening?" she asks. "Oh!" says Fred, "on Monday evening I'm taking my washing to the launderette."

a. Now you play the part of Fred. Answer Brenda s questions using the ideas below.

1. What about Tuesday evening? have/supper/sister

2. What about Wednesday evening? go/my evening class

3. What about Thursday evening? play/badminton

4. What about Friday evening? meet/Harry/drink

5. What about Saturday evening? watch/football/ television

6. What about Sunday evening? go/church

B. I'm going to the football match with Jim.

Use the notes below to make up similar sentences, using the Present Continuous as a future.

1. I/see/Mr Allen/tomorrow

2. I/go/pictures/this evening

3. The President/come/London/next week

4. I/buy/some new shoes/at the weekend

5. He/change/his job/after Christmas

6. They/move/to the seaside/in the spring

7. We/go/to Spain/next month

8. They/open/a new/store/on twentieth July

9. I/ask for a rise/at the end of the week 10. I/get that record/Saturday

С What are you doing today?

Use the notes below to make up questions you might ask your friend.

1. Where/go/this afternoon

2. Why/go/into the city

3. Who/go/party with

4. What/do/tomorrow

5. Where/buy shoes

111

6. When/go/dentist

7. When/get/tickets for the concert

8. Where/meet/Paul/this evening

9. What time/come/tomorrow 10. Why/come/so late

D. Look at these ideas:

When are you going to Germany? I'm going on Friday. John isn't coming.

Use the notes below to make up similar sentences:

1. What time/you/come/Saturday?

2. Who/come/party?

3. Tom and Sue/not/come

4. Is it tme/Peter/change/job?

5. George/get/new car

6. Where/buy/it?

7. You/watch/horror movie/tonight?

8. Which channel/they/show/it on?

9. Mike/go/abroad 10. When/he/leave?

E. Composition

You are the personal assistant to a very important man, who works at your embassy in London. It's Monday and you are going through his programme for the week with him. Here is an example of the entries you have made in his diary.

Monday 3.00 p.m. Mr Steffen from

German Embassy

You say: "At 3.00 p.m. you're seeing Mr Steffen from the German Embassy."

Below are the complete notes for one week. Look at them carefully, then write the conversation between you and your boss'

Monday 3.00 p.m. Mr Steffen from

German Embassy 8.00 p.m. Dinner ar Claridges Hotel. Turkish Ambassador

112

Tuesday 10.00 a.m. Meeting with

our Ambassador 1.00 p.m. Lunch, Post Office Tower. British Post Office officials

Wednesday 10.00 a.m. Appointment at

Board of Trade. Discuss new import duties.

1.00 p.m. Guest speaker at Rotary Club lunch. Subject. "Links between our two countries." Thursday 11.00 a.m. Visit to University

of Kent. 6.00 p.m. Attend cocktail

party at German Embassy Friday 9.35 a.m. Heathrow. Fly to Paris

to visit Trade Fair. F. Idea for discussion

I'm getting married next May.

Note: The ring has been bought, the arrangements have been made, the invitations have been printed.

This time last week Roy Woods, a bus conductor from Streatham, in South London, was worried about money. He owed £20 to his landlady in rent. Today he is rich, for last Saturday he won £120,000 on the football pools.

Last night he was interviewed on television by reporter Stan Edwards.

Edwards: Well Mr Woods, what are you going to do now? Are you going to give up your job on the buses? Woods: Yes, I'm going to finish at the end of the week. Edwards: And what other plans have you got? Woods: Well, I'm going to buy a house.

113

Edwards: Have you got a house of your own now?

Woods: No, no, we live in a furnished flat.

Edwards: Have you got a car?

Woods: Yes, I've got an old Ford, but I'm going to buy a

new car... and my wife says she's going to have

driving lessons!

A. Questions

1. What is Roy's job? 2.When is he going to finish working on the buses? 3.Why was Roy worried about money last week? 4. How did he suddenly become rich? 5. Where do Roy and his family live at present? 6. Is he going to buy a new flat? 7. What sort of car has he got? 8. Is he going to buy a new one? 9. What is his wife going to do? 10. Then what do you think she is going to want?

B. Here are the answers to some questions on the text. You ask the questions:

1. Streatham. Where...?

2. £20. How much ... landlady?

3. Stan Edwards. Who ... television?

4. Yes, he is. Is ...job?

5. Yes, he is. Is ... a house?

6. No, he doesn't.... own a house now? 7.Yes, he is.... a new car?

8. Yes, she is.... have driving lessons?

C. We often use the Simple Past and the going to future together like this:

I went to Canterbury last week, and I'm going to go again tomorrow.

Make similar sentences.

1.1 asked for a pay rise last week, and ... again tomorrow.

2.1 had a bath this morning,... this evening.

3.1 went to the pictures last night,... this evening.

4.1 saw the doctor yesterday,... tomorrow.

5. He won a gold medal at the last Olympics, and I'm sure ... this time.

6. It rained yesterday, and I think ... today.

7. You had trouble at Customs last time we went on holiday, ... again this time.

8. They searched us when we arrived at the airport, and ... again now.

9. We ran out of milk yesterday, and ... again today. 10. You grumbled about it yesterday, and ... again.

D. We often use going to in questions like this:

Where are you going to go for your holiday this year? Now you make questions:

1. Find out what your friend is going to buy his/her mother for her birthday.

2. It is late at night. You and your friend are at a party. Find out how he/she is going to get home.

3. A girl friend is planning to buy a new party dress. Find out where she is going to buy it.

4. A friend is going to buy a new car. Find out what sort he/she is going to buy.

5. A friend of yours has a boat. He surprises you by saying that he is going to sell it. Find out why.

6. A friend is giving up his job. Find out what he is going to do instead.

7. Your friend announces that he/she is going to get married, but doesn't say who to. Find out the answer.

8. Your friend announces that he/she is going to get married to someone who lives in another town or country. Find out where the couple are going to live.

9. Your friend has a bottle of wine, but no corkscrew. Find out how he/she is going to open the bottle.

10. Your friend has just surprised you by putting a revolver on the table. Find out what he/she is going to do with it. E. Problems

What does George say?

1. You and George arrange to meet Sarah and Emma at 7.30 to go to the pictures. It is 8.00. There is no sign of the girls. George has Sarah's telephone number...

2. You and George have been waiting forty-five minutes

115

for a bus. It has just begun to rain. George knows there are taxis waiting round the corner...

3. You and George are reading. It is getting dark...

4. It is very, very hot. You and George have been playing tennis.George knows there is some beer in the refrige­rator...

5. George likes Dundee cake very much. He knows there is some in the cake tin...

F. Sometimes we use I'm not going to to express an argument very forcibly.

Look at this example:

You are at a political meeting with a friend. You disagree strongly with what the speaker is saying. You say: "I'm not going to listen to any more of this rubbish!"

Study the situations below and make similar remarks.

1. You think the programme on the television is awful. I'm not... rubbish.

2. The last time your friend borrowed your camera he broke it. You're not... again.

3. Last time you let your friend pick the apples from your tree, he dropped half of them and bruised them. You're not... my tree!

4. Yesterday evening your friend refused to let you watch a TV programme at his house. Now he wants to watch a programme in yours.

You're not... my television.

5. Last time you lent your watch to your friend, he dropped it. I'm not...

6. You and your friend are going out with the same boy/girl. Your friend wants to ring that person up. You're not ... my phone!

7. Your friend arrives at your house with a record you hate in his hand.

You're not... my record player.

G. Idea for discussion

Ask the person next to you what he or she is going to do:

116

this afternoon; this evening; tomorrow; on Saturday; next Sunday.

Answer the questions Then talk about some more things you are going to do in the next few days.

H. Composition

This is what the fortune-teller told your friend Mary: "You are generally happy, but you're a bit restless. You're never going to be rich, but you're not going to be terribly poor either. You're going to travel. You're going to go somewhere very hot. You're going to have an illness and you're going to spend some weeks in hospital. Be careful about the water you drink. Very soon you're going to meet somebody who's going to be very important in your life."

Now imagine you are the fortune teller. Use the notes below to tell your friend's fortune.

Change job; money; journey; new friends; accident; a lucky year; marry; children; achieve a secret ambition; live to a very old age.

Paul was having a drink with some of his colleagues from the office, when suddenly he looked at his watch.

Paul: Good Heavens! Is that the time?

Terry: It's just ten to seven — why?

Paul: I've got an appointment — I'm meeting a friend in Lon­don at eight o'clock. I'll never make it.

Terry: I'm going into London. I'll give you a lift if you like.

Paul: Could you really? That would be kind.

Terry: Where are you meeting your friend?

Paul: Near Piccadilly — but if you can drop me at an under­ground station, that'll be fine.

Terry: No, it's all right, Piccadilly's not far out of my way, I'll take you there.

Paul: That's very kind of you.

A. Questions

117

1. Who was Paul having a drink with? 2. What did he look at? 3. What time was Paul's appointment? 4. What did Terry offer to do? 5. Where did Paul plan to meet his friend? 6. Where does he say Terry can drop him off? 7. What does Terry say he'll do?

B. Note this idea:

I'm going into London. I'll give you a lift.

Use this form to offer help to your friend in the following circumstances:

1. You are seeing Mr Smith this evening. Your friend would like a message given to him.

2. You are going to the record shop. Your friend hears a cer­tain record on the radio and says, "I must get a copy of this record."

3. You have an appointment with the dentist this morning. Your friend has a problem with his teeth.

4. You have to go to a big store this afternoon. Your friend would like to know if they have any cheap tennis racquets.

5. You intend to write to Alice this evening. Your friend would like you to send her his best wishes.

6. You have to visit the baker's shop. You know that your friend needs a loaf of bread.

7. You plan to ring Joan this evening. Your friend hopes that she and her sister will come to the party on Saturday evening.

8. You are going out. You know you will pass a letter box. Your friend has just written a letter and put the stamps on it

9. You are going to the Plaza cinema this evening. Your friend would like to know which film is showing next week.

10. You have to go to London. You intend to go by train. Your friend has to go to Coventry the next day. He would like to know what time the train leaves.

C. There are occasions when we are forced into a defensive position. In these situations Don't worry, I'll... can be a useful defence.

Study this conversation.

She: You haven't cleaned the car.

He: I know, I'm sorry, I've been busy.

She: We're going to Jenny's party tomorrow.

He: I know.

She: I hate arriving at their house with the car all dirty. You know what Jenny's like...

He: All right. Don't worry. I'll clean it tomorrow mor­ning!

Now defend yourself in the same way from the following accusations.

Begin: Don't worry, I'll...

1. You promised to take those photos in to be developed!

2. You haven't rung your brother yet!

3. You didn't write that letter yesterday!

4. You forgot to get any milk!

5. You haven't found out when that film is on!

6. You didn't get those tickets today, did you?

7. You haven't got your suit back from the cleaner's yet!

8. You didn't get a film for the camera, did you?

9. You didn't take your shoes to be repaired!

10. You didn't get any batteries for the radio, did you? D. Giving the bad news. Here are some situations where your friend is hoping something is possible. You know it isn't. Give him the bad news, using won't.

Example:

You are sitting in a train with your friend. You hoped to get home early as you had been invited to a party. But the train has been held up and you don't expect to get home till nearly midnight.

We won't get home in time for the party.

i 1. Your friend wants tickets for a pop concert. You know

> the tickets were sold out ages ago.

2. Your friend hopes he might get a train direct from Oxford to Cheltenham. You are sure he will have to change trains.

3. Your friend thinks Sushee might go out with him. You know she is engaged to a very nice Indian boy.

4. Your friend wants a pair of rather expensive brown lea-

119

ther shoes. He thinks he might get them at the local shoe shop. You know they only stock cheap shoes. 5. Dennis is only twenty-two. He has applied for a position of great responsibility. You and your friend are sure he is too inexperienced to get the job.

E. We often express a similar idea by using: You 'II never...

You and your friend know another student who is not very intelligent and doesn't work hard either. You might say: He'll never pass the exam!

Go back to exercise D and use these ideas to produce remarks beginning: You'll never... He'll never... etc.

F. People often make indirect requests. Sometimes we ignore them, but at other times we offer to do what the other person wishes, using: Shall I... ? like this,

Boss: My goodness, it's hot in here. Secretary: Shall I open the window?

Reply to the following remarks. Begin with: Shall I...?

1. We've run out of aspirins.

2. A cup of coffee would be nice.

3. Oh, dear, I don't feel at all well.

4.1 wish I knew Mr Fox's telephone number. 5.1 wonder what the fare to Edinburgh is.

6. This typewriter doesn't seem to be working properly.

7. Oh, look, melons. I love melons.

8.1 want a nice photograph of myself, to send my mother 9. Gracious, it's cold in here.

10. My goodness, it's pouring with rain. How am I going to get to the station?

G. Idea for discussion.

Imagine that you are going to have a class party one evening next week. Everybody must volunteer to do something, bring something, or organise something so that the party will be a success. Explain what you will do to help. (Use the I'll form.)

120

Jim: I fancy going to the cinema this evening for a change,

What do you think? Shall we go? Robert: We could. What's on? Jim: There's James Bond film on. Robert: O.K. Shall I call for you? We could go by car. Shall

I pick you up at about 6 o'clock? Jim: Thanks very much. That'd be great.

A. Shall we go? = Let's go. Shall expresses suggestion. Shall I call for you? = Would you like me to call for you? Shall I pick you up at about 6 o'clock? = Would you like me to pick you up at about 6 o'clock? Shall expresses offer.

B. Invention exercise.

Situation: You have an idea about what you and another person (or people) can do together.

Example: Shall we...?

this point tomorrow = Shall we discuss this point tomor­row?

1. the cinema this evening?

2. a drink somewhere?

3. another television programme (this one is terrible).

4. in the new French restaurant?

5. a game of tennis?

6. at the table over there?

7. the bus to school?

8. a taxi?

9. this question some other time?

10. a walk in the park?

11. lunch now?

12. the dance on Friday? С Progressive situation

Situation: You want to help a person in some way. You ask if that person wants your help.

Model: Shall I carry that bag?

121

1. that box 9. turn on

2. open lO.the radio

3. the door 11. the light

4. close 12. turn off

5. the windows 13. the engine

6. your suitcase 14. look at

7. take 15, the tyres

8. the gramophone 16. put some air

Gina: Lynn, can you keep a secret?

Lynn: Sure. What is it?

Gina: Promise you won't tell anyone.

Lynn: I promise. What is it?

Gina: Frank asked me to marry him!

Lynn: You're kidding! What did you say?

Gina: I didn't say anything. I don't know what to do.

Lynne: Why don't you talk to Madam Suzanne?

Gina: Who's that?

Lynn: She's a fortune-teller. She'll tell you about your future.

Gina: Oh, I don't believe in fortune-tellers.

Lynn: A lot of people don't, but sometimes the information

is interesting.

Gina: Hmmm. Will she tell me about my life with Frank?

Lynn: I'm sure she will. She's very good.

A. Answer "That's right", "That's wrong", or "It doesn't say"

1. Frank wants to marry Gina.

2. Gina wants to marry Frank.

3. Madame Suzanne tells people about their fortune.

4. Lynn likes Madam Suzanne.

5. Gina likes Madam Suzanne.

6. Lynn won't tell Gina's secret.

B. What does Frank promise Gina? Complete the sentences with '11 (will) or won't (will not).

I'll be a good husband. I won't disappoint you.

122

1. We ... have a wonderful life.

2. You ... never be unhappy.

3.1... bring you flowers every day. 4.1... fix things around the house. 5. We ... visit your mother every month. 6.1... leave my dirty clothes on the floor. 7.1... complain about your cooking. 8.1... forget your birthday.

C. What does Madam Suzanne tell Gina? Complete the sentences with the future tense of the verbs in parentheses.

1. Your husband (be) a tall man with blond hair.

2. Your parents (not) like your husband.

3. You (live) in a big house.

4. Your husband (not) be neat.

5. You (have) six children.

6. You (meet) a lot of interesting people.

7. You (travel).

8. Your husband (not remember) your birthday.

9. Your husband (love) you. 10. That (be) five dollars.

D. Gina's parents are talking. What are Mr Poggi's questions? Look at the example.

Gina/marry Frank

Mr Poggi: Will Gina marry Frank? Mrs Poggi: Yes, I think she will.

1. they/be happy Mr Poggi: ...?

Mrs/ Poggi: Yes, they will.

2. he/buy a house for her Mr Poggi: ...?

Mrs Poggi: Yes, he will.

3. they/live near us Mr Poggi: ...?

Mrs Poggi: No, they won't.

4. Gina/quit her job Mr Poggi: ...?

Mrs Poggi: No, I don't think she will.

123

5. Frank /be a good father Mr Poggi: ...? Mrs Poggi: Yes, I think he will.

E. Frank is talking to his father. Complete Frank's promises. Mr Russo: Make Gina happy. Mr Russo: Don't be messy. . Frank: Don't worry. I will. Frank: I promise I won't.

1. Mr Russo: Help around the house. Frank: Don't worry...

2. Mr Russo: Be nice to her parents. Frank: OK...

3. Mr Russo: Don't forget her birthday. Frank: I promise that...

4. Mr Russo: Don't complain. Frank: All right...

5. Mr Russo: Don't watch TV all the time. Frank: Don't worry...

6. A: Tell your partner to do something. B: I promise (that)...

All right/OK/Don't worry... F. Complete Gina's thoughts about marrying Frank.

Madam Suzanne said we'll have six children. If we have six children, I won't be very happy.

or I won't be very happy if we have six children.

1. Madam Suzanne said my parents won't like my husband. I (not be) happy if they (not like) him.

2. She said we'll live in a big house. If we (live) in a big house, I (have to) clean all the time.

3. She said we'll travel. If we (travel), I (be) very happy.

4. She said we'll meet a lot of interesting people. We (have) a good time if we (meet) a lot of interesting people.

5. She said I'll marry a tall man with blond hair. If I (marry) a tall man with blond hair, it (not be) Frank.

6. Madam Suzanne can't be right! If I (not marry) Frank. I (not marry) anybody!

G. Frank is talking to his mother. Complete the questions with the words from the list. Roleplay the conversation.

124

What • when • how long • why • how • what time • what kind of wedding • where

Mrs Russo: ... will you do if Gina says no?

Frank: I don't know.

Mrs Russo: ... will she give you an answer?

Frank: I'm sure she'll give me an answer soon.

Mrs Russo: ... will you wait?

Frank: I'm very patient. I'll wait a long time.

Mrs Russo: ... will you live if you get married?

Frank: We'll probably buy a house near school.

Mrs Russo: ... will you live there?

Frank: Because Gina has class at night and we don't have

a car.

Mrs Russo: ... will you pay for a house? Frank: Well, I have a good job, and Gina works, too.

Mrs Russo: ... will you have?

Frank: A small one. We'll invite our families and a few

friends.

Mrs Russo: ... will you get married? Frank: I don't know yet. Gina wants to get married at 2

o'clock, but I want a morning wedding.

John: Well, tomorrow is quite a busy day for me. I'll get up at quarter past six and have breakfast about half an hour later. I'll start my journey to work at quarter past seven, which usually takes me about three quarters of an hour. For the first two hours at work, from eight till about ten, I'll do the routine things: look at my letters, make phone calls and so on, then at 10.30 I've got a meeting, which will continue till 12.30, when I'll take my client to lunch. I'll get back to the office at about two, and will spend the next three to four hours writing a report, which I hope to finish by 5.30.1 want to leave the office by six at the latest, because I've got guests coming for dinner at half past eight. A. Questions

Will John be busy tomorrow? What will he do? What will your work day tomorrow be like?

125

В. Study and practise the dialogues.

1. A: I'm going to hitchhike round the world.

B: Oh, that's very dangerous.

A: No, it isn't. I'll be all right.

B: Where will you sleep?

A: Oh, I don't know. In youth hostels. Cheap hotels.

B: You'll get lost.

A: No, I won't.

B: You won't get lifts.

A: Yes, I will.

B: What will you do for money?

A: I'll take money with me.

B: You haven't got enough.

A: I'll find jobs,

B: Well... are you sure you'll be all right?

A: Of course I'll be all right.

2. Salesman: I'd like to see you for a minute, sir, if you have ti-

me. I've got a bit of a problem.

Manager: Certainly. I won't be a moment, I'll just ask my secretary to take the incoming letters and then I'll help you if I can.

3. Mrs Jones is visiting Mrs Smith at home.

Mrs Smith: It's nice to see you, Mrs Jones. Will you take a seat while I fetch the tea-tray?

Mrs Jones: Thank you. What a lovely room!

Mrs Smith: First of all, Mrs Jones, will you have a piece of chocolate cake?

Mrs Jones: That's a wonderful idea. I won't refuse today but I will go on a diet next week.

4. A: Will the car be ready by five? B: Yes, it will.

A: Really? Can I depend on that?

B: Absolutely! I promise it'll be ready by five.

A: Okay. Now remember. I'm counting on you.

B: Don't worry! I won't let you down.

5. Paul: What are you doing this afternoon, Joanne? Are

you going to a conference?

126

Joanne: No, I'm not. But Vince is going. I'm going

shopping. What about you? Paul: I don't know. Diana's in Cambridge. She's seeing

some people about a film. Joanne: Oh. How long is she staying there? Paul: Just for the day. She's coming back this evening. 6. Teacher: OK... that's the end of today's class. Thank you.

See you all on Monday. Paul: Phew, that was hard work. I'm never going to

be an actor.

Friend: Why not? You were very good today. Paul: Thanks.

Friend: Anyway, what are you going to do this weekend? Paul: I'm going to see that new play at the Majestic

Theatre tomorrow evening. Friend: With Jackie?

Paul: Oh no! Anna's going to come with me. Friend: Anna? Who's Anna?

Paul: A television reporter from Puerto Rico. On Satur­day we're going to have lunch together. Friend: But Paul! What about your girlfriend Jackie? Paul: Jackie isn't my girlfriend any more. Anna is.

Andy: Hi, Sue. Where are you going?

Sue: To Gatwick Airport. We're meeting a girl from

Grenada.

Andy: Grenada? Where's that?

Paul: It's an island in the Caribbean.

Andy: Who's the girl?

Sue: Her name is Natalie. She's going to live with

us and go to our school.

Andy: How long is she staying?

Sue: For three months.

Mrs Wilson: Come and get your jacket, Sue. We're lea­ving in five minutes.

Andy: Poor kid! Three months at Castle Hill School. I

hope she's tough!

A. In pairs, interview Natalie before her trip to Britain Imagine one of you is Natalie. Use the notes below to help you make questions.

You: Where are you going?

Natalie: I'm going to Britain.

You: How are you travelling?

Natalie: I'm travelling by plane to Gatwick Airport.

Where/go?

How/travel?

When/leave?

How long/stay?

Where/stay?

Go to school?

Which school/go to?

B. In pairs, ask and answer about your plans. Talk about what you are doing and where you are going.

A: What are you doing after school?

B: I'm meeting my mother and going shopping.

Ask about: after school, in the summer, at the weekend.

1. John is looking forward to this weekend. He isn't going to think about work. He's going to read a few magazines, fix his car, and relax at home with his family.

2. Alice is looking forward to her birthday. Her sister is going to have a party for her, and all her friends are going to be there.

3. Mr and Mrs Williams are looking forward to their summer vacation. They're going to go camping in the mountains. They're going to hike several miles every day, take a lot of pictures, and forget about all their problems at home.

4. George is looking forward to his retirement. He's going to get up late every morning, visit friends every afternoon and enjoy quiet evenings at home with his wife.

A. What are you looking forward to? A birthday? A holiday? A day off?

Talk about it with other students in your class.

— What are you looking forward to?

— When is it going to happen?

— What are you going to do? etc.

Tom: Hello, Jack. It's Tom.

Jack: Tom, hello. What's wrong?

Tom: Nothing's wrong. Jean and I want you to come to dinner

with us.

Jack: Well... I er... Tom: What about tomorrow night? Jack: I'm sorry, Tom. I can't. I'm meeting the Sales Director

tomorrow evening. Tom: Well, what about Saturday?

Jack: Just a minute... I'll get my diary... Erm... No, I can't make it Saturday. I'm flying to Brussels for the week­end — big sales conference. Tom: Okay. Well, when can you make it? Jack: Let's see...erm... I'm finishing off my report on Friday. I'm flying back from Brussels on Monday...erm... What about Tuesday? Tom: Yes, Tuesday sounds ...

Jack: Oh no. Sorry! I'm having dinner with an important customer on Tuesday. And on Wednesday I'm playing golf with the boss.

Tom: Okay, Jack. Forget it! You're obviously too busy... But I'mtelling you, you're working too hard. You're going to make yourself ill or something. Jack: Tom, listen... Tom: Bye, Jack. See you around.

A. Read the conversation and speak about Jack's plans for the week.

B. Roleplay the conversation.

C. In pairs, make up similar telephone conversations.

Julie, a student, is talking to her friend Dan about her plans to go on the dig.

Dan: Just think. This time next week we'll be doing our

exams. Julie: I know. Won't it be great when they're over? Are you

going away in the summer? Dan: No. No such luck. What about you? Julie: Well actually, I'm going on an archaeological dig to

Egypt. I'm quite excited about it. Dan: Egypt! Won't that be terribly hot? Julie: I don't think so. I mean, we won't be working in the

heat of the day.

Dan: Where are you going? To the Valley of the Kings? Julie: Yes, but not all the time. Apparently we'll be going to

other places as well. It should be really interesting. Dan: You're not going to catch malaria, are you? Julie: I hope not. I've got special tablets to take. Dan: Well, think of me while you're digging. I'll be filling

shelves in our local supermarket, worse luck!

A. Now answer "True " or "False " to these statements.

1. Dan and Julie have just finished their exams.

2. Julie is looking forward to the summer.

3. She is going on a touring holiday to Egypt.

4. She knows she won't catch malaria.

5. Dan is going to do a holiday job during the summer.

6. He is looking forward to it.

B. Provide a suitable question in the Future Continuous using one of the verbs in the box.

Julie: I'm really pleased. I've been accepted to go on an

archaeological dig.

Student: (leave)?

Julie: At the beginning of July. On the fourth, actually.

Student: (go)?

Julie: To Luxor in Egypt.

Student: (do)?

130

Julie: Digging and drawing and labelling. All that sort of

thing. Student: (work)?

Julie: About six hours, from dawn until about two in the

afternoon. Student: (sleep)?

Julie: In tents, I think. We have to take sleeping bags. Student: (earn)?

Julie: Nothing. It's voluntary work. Student: (come back)? Julie: In time for college, I expect.

C. Speak about Julie s plans for the summer.

D. Roleplay the conversation.

E. Use the cues to ask your partner about some future activities.

Example:

I. What will you be doing for Christmas?

1. What/do/for Christmas?

2. Where/spend/summer holiday?

3. When/take/next important exams?

4. What/think/do/this time next week?

5. Where/think/work or study/in a year's time?

F. Imagine you are going to Egypt with Julie s group. Write a short letter to the organizer, Mr Taylor, who is going to meet you at Cairo airport. Give your travel details and say how he will recognize you.

G. Complete the sentences using the correct form of the Future Continuous tense.

1. Where (you/stay) while you're working in Barcelona?

2. Do you think you (do) anything interesting in five years' time?

3. How (your parents/travel) when they cross the USA ?

4. She hopes she (earn) a lot of money in a year's time.

5. Please note that we (hold) today's meeting in Room 5 and not in Room 9.

6. (you/see) either John or Jean tomorrow, by any chance?

7. We (not/use) the tennis court for very long. Come back in about half an hour.

131

8. The UN (watch) the new political situation in the Gulf very closely.

Jenny and Jane have come to watch the Merton Marathon.

Jane: What time is it?

Jenny: It's nine o'clock.

Jane: By ten thirty the runners will have finished.

Jenny: No. They won't have finished by then.

The women will not even have started by then. Jane: What time do they start? Jenny: The men's race starts at nine thirty and the women's

race starts at eleven thirty. Jane: By the time they arrive, we will have been waiting

for hours. Jenny: Yes, and they will have been running for hours.

A. Write these sentences in full using the Future Perfect tense.

1. What (you/achieve) by the year 2000?

2. In two years' time, my parents (be/married) for twenty-five years.

3. John (not/finish) medical training until he is twenty-six.

4. You can have the book on Monday. I (read) it by then.

5. They (not/complete) the motorway before 1998.

6. Unless we leave now, the film (start) when we get there.

B. Make responses to the statements or questions, using the cues and the Future Perfect.

1. A: Is it all right if I get to the cinema at 7.30?

В : No, I'm afraid that's too late. The film (start) by then.

2. A: I hear Sue and John are moving to Paris next month. В : Sue/have the baby/by then?

3. A: I'll be at your house at eight o'clock. OK?

В : Actually, could you make it a little later? I don't expect (we/finish/eating) by then.

4. A: Only one more week's holiday!

B: It's just as well. We (run out of money) by next week.

132

I'd better sign that letter before I go off to lunch. I'm afraid 1 (not type) it by lunch time. It'll be nice to see Malcolm again. Shall I come round in half an hour?

He (not arrive) by then, I'm afraid. I've got to give that book back to the library next Mon­day. That's rather soon. You (read) it by Monday?

C. Write a, b, с in the gap and read the completed sentences.

1. By the end of the week they — the next issue of their news­paper.

a. will have been completing

b. have completed

c. will have completed

2. By Wednesday afternoon, Tom____four people.

a. will have interviewed

b. will interview

c. will be interviewed

3. By tomorrow night Jenny____four articles.

a. will be written ш b. will have written

с. won't have been writing

4. When the newspaper comes out, they____on it for six weeks.

a. will work

b. will have been working

c. won't have been working

5. They hope that by the end of next week they____2000 copies.

a. will be sold

b. will have sold

c. won't have sold

6. Nick hopes that by the end of the year they____rich and

famous.

a. won't become

b. became

c. will have become

7. By next month, Amanda____seven articles.

a. will have written

b. will have been writing

c. will write

133

D. Answer the questions.

1. How long will you have been learning English by the end

of this school year?

2. How long will you have been living in your town by next summer?

3. How long will you have been living in your house or flat by next year?

4. How long will you have known your English teacher by the end of this school year?

5. How long will you have known your best friend by next summer*?

6. How long will you have been watching your favourite TV programme by the end of this year?

7. How long will you have been attending your present school by the end of the school year?

Pam and Ted Gibbs are about to go on an unusual holiday. They are going to travel from Alaska to Tierra del Fuego, a distance of 25,665 kilometers — on motorbikes.

Pam: We fly to Anchorage at ten o'clock tomorrow morning

and this time next week we'll be travelling down the

Canadian coast. We're taking the shortest route along

the west coast. Ted: I expect we'll have problems with bad weather and bad

roads. We'll break down, of course, so we're taking spare

parts with us. Pam: The weather forecast for Alaska is fine at the moment,

so we're going to have a good start. Ted: We will be travelling up to 250 kilometers a day on good

roads, but on bad roads we won't be able to get very

far. We know that it won't be an easy trip. We'd like to

spend Christmas at home, but we won't have arrived in

England by then. Pam: When we get back, we will have been travelling for over

a year. That's a long time, but we will have made a dream

come true. Ted: That's right. But we'll probably never want to ride a

motorbike again!

134

Note- kilometer (амер.) = kilometre

A. Say whether the statements are right or wrong. Correct the wrong statements.

eg Ted and Pam are going to travel from Alaska to New York. Wrong. They are going to travel from Alaska to Tierra del Fuego.

1. They are flying to Vancouver.

2. Their flight leaves at eight o'clock tomorrow.

3. They will be travelling by bicycle.

4. The weather in Alaska is going to be bad.

5. They are taking spare parts for the motorbikes.

6. They will be travelling over 200 kilometers a day.

7. They will be away for over a year.

8. They will have arrived home by Christmas.

9. By the end of their trip, they will have driven 10,000 kilometers.

10. They are planning to go on another trip.

B. Read the text and comment on the uses of future tense forms.

C. Ask and answer questions on the text.

D. Roleplay the conversation.

E. Work with a partner. You are going to cross your country on foot, by bicycle, on camels etc. Plan your route, then write a paragraph about your plans. What will you be doing and when? What will you be taking with you?

We will be leaving from ... by bicycle on I July. We won't be taking much luggage with us. My friend will be carrying the food and I...

I Interviewer: Now you're going on holiday shortly . Where

are you going to go? ' Elizabeth: To Winnipeg, Manitoba in Canada.

Interviewer: And how are you going to travel there?

Elizabeth: We'll take a car to the airport, and then fly Air

135

Canada to Winnipeg, and then we have a 500 mile drive across to Banff in the Rockies.

Interviewer: And how long are you going to spend there?

Elizabeth: Just under three weeks, from the 15th of De­cember to the 2nd of January.

Interviewer: And where are you going to stay in Banff?

Elizabeth: When we first get there we'll be staying with a family—friends that stayed with us in the sum­mer in this country.

Interviewer: And what are you going to do whilst you're there, then?

Elizabeth: Um, well, when we're in Winnipeg, we'll just be visiting friends and relatives but when we're in Banff, we'll be skiing. There are some hot water springs, so we'll go swimming and we're going to go across to America as well for a week.

A. Questions

1. Where is Elizabeth going for her holidays? 2. How are they going to get there? 3. How long are they going to stay in Canada? 4. Where are they going to stay in Banff? 5. What are they going to do during their holidays?

B. Read and roleplay the conversation.

C. Discuss your holiday plans.

Bob: So, Tom, are you going to get married or not?

Tom: Yeah, yeah, but Rosa's afraid. She's not sure she wants

to get married right now. She can't decide. Bob: Why not? Tom: Well, we're both young, and she likes her job. And, of

course, if we have children, she'll have to quit her job. Bob: Why? A lot of women have kids but don't quit their jobs. Tom: True, but I don't want Rosa to work. Bob: Oh. So when will she give you an answer? Tom: I'm going to her house for dinner Saturday night. She'll

tell me then. Bob: Well, good luck.

136

Tom: Thanks. What are you going to do this weekend, Bob? Bob: I'm going fishing with my dad. We'll probably leave

early Saturday morning and come back Saturday night. Tom: What time will you get home? Bob: Around 7 o'clock. I have a date with my girlfriend at

8.00.

Tom: Will I see you on Sunday? Bob: Yeah. In fact, why don't we all do something? Tom: OK. What?

Bob: Oh, I don't know. We can go to a movie or something. Tom: Fine.

I. Choose the best answers.

1. Tom

a. wants to get married.

b. isn't sure he wants to get married.

2. Tom's fiancee Rosa

a. wants to get married.

b. isn't sure she wants to get married.

3. Rosa will give Tom an answer

a. on Saturday

b. on Sunday

4. If they have children,

a. Tom wants Rosa to quit her job.

b. Tom doesn't want Rosa to quit her job.

5. Bob is going fishing

a. with his father on Saturday.

b. with his girlfriend on Sunday.

6. Bob will get home

a. around 7 o'clock.

b. around 8 o'clock.

7. On Sunday, Bob and his girlfriend

a. will probably go to a movie alone.

b. will probably go to a movie with Tom and Rosa.

B. Read the text. Ask and answer questions on the text.

C. Give a brief account of the conversation.

D. Roleplay the conversation.

E. Read Rosa's note.

137

Linda,

I won't be in class tomorrow. I'm going to go fishing with Tom. He has a day off so I'm going to take a day off, too. Will you please call me tomorrow night and tell me the homework assignment. I'll probably be home around 6.00. I'll talk to you then.

Thanks. Rosa

F. Now write your own note.

1. Tell your classmate you are going to take a day off.

2. Say what you are going to do.

3. Ask your classmate to call with the homework assign­ment.

4. Say when you'll return.

Woman: You're going to take the next English course, aren't

you?

Man: Yes, I think so.

Woman: What are you doing during school break? Man: I'm going to Miami. I'm leaving on Saturday. Woman: What are you going to do there? Man: I'm going to visit friends. We'll probably just go to

the beach and relax.

Woman: That sounds good. When will you be back? Man: In a week. Woman: Will you send me a postcard? Man: Sure.

Woman: You won't forget, will you? Man: Of course not.

A. Reproduce the woman's questions used in the conversation.

B. Speak about the man's plans.

C. Roleplay the conversation.

D. Complete the conversation using the verbs in brackets and the correct form o/will, going to or the Present Continuous. The cues will help you. Roleplay the conversation.

138

John: What (you/do) this weekend, Mike? (arrangement)

Mike: I (not/do) anything special. What about you? (arran­gement)

John: Well, I've promised a friend of mine, Alison, move a new piano into her flat some time tomorrow.

Mike: I (give) you a hand if you like, (offer)

John: I rather hoped you'd say that!

Mike: What time (you/meet) her? (arrangement)

John: I'm not sure yet. I (give/her/a ring) this afternoon to find out. (intention)

Mike: OK.

John: I (let/you/know) as soon as I can. (promise)

Mike: OK. I (be) in all evening, (prediction)

John: What? On a Friday evening?

Mike: Yes, I (watch) the U2 concert on TV. (intention)

John: OK. I (call) you later, (decision)

E. Complete the conversation with the correct future tense forms. Roleplay the conversation

Jack: (You/do) anything this evening? I wondered if you'd like to come out for a meal?

Hannah: I'm afraid I can't. I've got a photography class.

Jack: Oh, yeah. I forgot. What about tomorrow, then? (We/ meet) in town and have lunch together?

Hannah: No, tomorrow's no good, either. (I/go) to Brighton to see my sister. (I/leave) on the ten o'clock train.

Jack: How long (you/stay)?

Hannah: Just for the weekend. (I/be) back on Sunday afternoon.

Jack: OK. (I/give) you a ring then. Maybe we can do some­thing in the evening. Perhaps go to the cinema or something?

Hannah: Yes, Sunday evening sounds fine. Anyway, what are your plans for the weekend?

Jack: (I/do) some studying tomorrow and then I think (I/ sleep) all Sunday morning! By the way, (I/give) you a lift to the station tomorrow if you like.

Hannah: Oh, thanks. That's really kind.

A. Write a letter making an excuse for not doing something your friend wants you to do.

139

UNIT 2 TOPIC: APPEARANCE. CHARACTER

Listen, read and practise.

"How old are you?" It's a simple question, and there is usually a simple answer: "sixteen years old," "twenty years old," "fifty-five," etc. But if someone is described as young or middle-aged or old, then how old is that person? It's difficult to know because these are words that have different meanings for different people. Except for the word teenager, which describes someone whose age ends in the syllable "teen" (such as fourteen, fifteen or sixteen), words which describe age are not exact. When, for example, does a baby stop being called a baby and become a young child? When does a boy become a young man and a little girl become a young woman? At what age does middle age begin? When do you call someone elderly and not simply old? At what age does someone become an adult? In some countries, it is when the government says a person is old enough to vote. Is that really the difference between a child and an adult? The answers to these questions partly depend on how old you are. There is a saying that old age is always ten years older than yourself. If you are fifteen, then you think someone of twenty-five is old. At thirty, forty seems old. If you are seventy, then you probably think someone of eighty is old. A recent survey showed that there was some truth in the old saying. People were asked. "What is middle age?" Those in their early twenties usually answered, "Between thirty-five and fifty," and people in their thirties answered, "Between forty-five and sixty."

A. Decide -whether these statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the passage

1. When people are asked their age, they usually answer with a number.

2. If someone tells you that he or she is middle-aged, you know the exact age of that person.

140

3. It is possible to call someone who is twelve a teenager.

4. There is an exact age when a baby becomes a young child.

5. "Elderly" is similar in meaning to "old".

6. Some governments say that an adult is a person who can vote.

7. According to the saying, if you are twenty-nine, then you think someone of thirty is old.

8. As you get older, your ideas change about when middle age begins.

B. Think about.

1. What are some of the joys and problems of each age?

2. Are you happy with your present age?

3. How do you feel about growing older?

4. How important is age? in marriage? in work?

Beauty

How important is your appearance? Although everyone wants to be good-looking, are beautiful people always happier people? For example, it must be a problem to be a really beautiful woman, because some men may be more interested in looking at you than talking to you. They think of you as a picture rather than a person. There are also some people who think that women who are exceptionally pretty and men who are particularly handsome must be stupid. They believe that only unattractive people can be intelligent.

On the other hand, no one wants to be really ugly, and have a face that even your mother doesn't want to look at; and no one wants to be plain either — that is, to be neither attractive nor unattractive, and have a face that is easily forgotten.

Being attractive is like being rich — it can help you find happiness, but it doesn't always make you happy. So maybe the best thing is not to worry too much about how you look, but simply try to be an interesting person. For interesting people have interesting faces, and interesting faces are almost always attractive.

A. Decide whether these statements are true (T), false (F), or impossible to know (IK) according to the passage.

141

1. Everyone wants to be attractive.

2. Most beautiful people are unhappy.

3. No one likes to talk to a very pretty woman.

4. Some people think that handsome men are unintelligent.

5. Attractive men and women are usually intelligent.

6. Ugly people are not happy people.

7. A plain face is easily forgotten.

8. Not many interesting people are also attractive.

B. Look at these common English expressions and then decide whether you agree with them

a) Your face is your fortune.

b)-Beauty is in the eye of the beholder (i.e., the person who is looking).

Mr and Mrs Smith were a very average couple. His name was John. Her name was Mary. They lived in an average-sized house and had two average children — one boy and one girl.

Were they tall? Mr and Mrs Smith were neither tall nor short. They were both average height. He was average height for a man and she was average height for a woman.

Were they fat? Mr Smith was certainly not weak or skinny, but he was not strong or well-built either. He was just medium build and his shoulders and chest were neither very broad nor very narrow. His wife, too, could never be described as thin or slim, but then again, she was not overweight or fat either. Her waist was neither too big nor too narrow. It was just... average size.

It was very easy for Mr and Mrs Smith to buy clothes because part of their bodies was average size too. Their feet were neither very big nor very small. Their hips were not too wide. And their legs were neither too short nor too long.

Yes, the Smiths were a very average couple. Except for one thing. They were the only couple in the country who were average in so many ways at the same time. The Smiths were in fact... unique.

A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F) according to the passage.

142

1. Mr and Mrs Smith had two children named John and Mary.

2. Mr Smith was very tall.

3. Mrs Smith was average height.

4. Mr Smith was a skinny man.

5. Mrs Smith probably weighed about 160 pounds.

6. Mrs Smith had a very small waist.

7. Mr Smith had average-sized feet.

8. The Smiths were completely average.

B. Think about

1. What is the average height for men and women in your country? Is it changing?

2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of being either very tall or very short?

3. Can you think of some good ways of keeping these parts of the body in good condition: heart, lungs, skin, bone, muscle?

4. Describe some ways of losing weight.

1. He saw a tall, handsome woman dressed with careful and expensive informality in a black cashmere sweater with a silk scarf at the throat and fawn trousers... It was a distinguished face with deep-set eyes beneath straight brows, a well-Shaped, rather secretive mouth and strong, greying hair swept upwards and curled into a chignon.

Note: chignon — a type of hairstyle popular with older women. The hair is twisted into a kind of knot at the back of the head.

2. She wore a pale blue sweater and a gray flannel skirt, schoolgirl's clothes, which made her seem younger than her age. She was about twenty-five. Her face was framed by thick hair, in a colour midway between blonde and brown, and held back by a black velvet band. The skin was fine and she had large, rather beautiful dark blue eyes, with long colourless lashes.

3. Temple was a small stocky man in his early forties. His jaw line had long ago disappeared into one of his chins. His pepper and salt hair was cut short with a parting in the middle and he had

143

a dark bushy drooping moustache that grew well over his top lip. His nose was small, almost snub, and his eyes were pale.

Note: pepper and salt hair — hair which has both black and gray mixed in it.

A. Write a paragraph giving a detailed description of a friend, a relative or a film or TV star.

Here is a newspaper article: "Sports personality of the year".

I would like to name Gary Lineker as Sports Personality of the Year. I think he is not only a good footballer, he is also a very nice person and very different from other football stars. First of all, in spite of being intelligent, talented and good-looking, he is actually very modest. He never boasts about what he's done or pretends to be somebody he isn't. Even though he obviously earns a lot of money and lives in a nice house in London, he doesn't throw his money around like others do.

Secondly, he is much more open-minded than other football stars. Many footballers work and live abroad but not many try to become part of the culture of the country. When Lineker lived in Barcelona, he made Spanish friends, lived a Spanish way of life and made a point of learning to speak Spanish.

Another thing that makes him different from other footballers is his sense of fair play on the field. Since he started his career, he has never been reported in the newspapers for bad behaviour and he has never been sent off for fouling or swearing.

Finally, you get the impression that Lineker is a human being with human emotions like anybody else. When his baby developed a life-threatening illness, he and his wife went through a very difficult time. He showed that he is not only capable of strong emotion, he is also prepared to show it in public.

For all these reasons, I think he deserves the title of "Sports Personality of the Year".

A. Questions

1. What aspects of Gary Lineker's personality are mentioned?

2. What details, if any, do you learn about:

144

— his football career?

— his family?

— his lifestyle?

B. Write in 250 words about the person who you think deserves the title of "Personality of the Year ". They can be from the world of politics, entertainment, sport, the arts or business — or they may be somebody completely unknown.

1. She's absolutely adorable. I think she's very pretty, she makes me laugh a lot, um... she tells terrible jokes but I like the way she tells them. She's a bit naughty sometimes and I curse her when she gets me up at six o'clock in the morning, but when I hear her singing in the morning, well, all is forgiven. She can twist me round her little finger, of course.

2. He was very boring and predictable. The kind of person who remembered birthdays and anniversaries, but who made you angry because there was absolutely nothing spontaneous about him. His ideas of fun were so unadventurous. Well, the first few years were OK, but after that I'd just had enough. Reliable, stable, dependable, and boring.

3. Well, he's quite well-dressed and punctual. Sometimes he's cheerful and tells us jokes, but other times we have to do a lot of work. We don't really know him very well. Oh, I know he's married, but I've never met him socially or anything like that. He seems very professional.

A. Write a description of a person that you know.

Some doctors believe there are two main types of personalities: "Type A" and "Type B". Type A people are ambitious, aggressive, hard-working, and competitive; they are sometimes impatient and are often in a hurry. Type В people are more relaxed and don't get bothered easily. Doctors say that because they are so hard driving, Type A personalities often suffer from stress and high blood pressure.

145

Pair work. Take turns asking your partner these questions. Is your partner a Type A or Type В personality? How about you?

Yes No

a) Are you always in a hurry to finish things?

b) Are you ambitious and always looking for new challenges?

c) Are you often impatient with other people?

d) Do you get upset when people are late for appointments?

e) Do you often do two things at once, such as watching TV while eating?

f) Do you get upset easily when things go wrong¹?

g) Do you sometimes stop listening when people are talking to you?

h) Do you expect to be the best at everything

you do? i) Do you often interrupt people while they are

speaking? j) Do you think the best way to get a job

done is to do it yourself?

To score: Six or more Yes answers = Type A; six or more No answers = type B.

This is a letter from Dave. Dave is an American exchange student in Great Britain, who is living in Frank's home, while Frank is staying in the U.S. with Dave's family.

Dear Frank,

Hi! How are you getting along in the States? I'm having a wonderful time here in England with your family and friends. Everyone is so friendly, and hospitable. They all welcome me into their homes and treat me as one of the family.

I've been very surprised by English people. I thought they would all be very conservative and traditional. Instead I've found them very open to new ideas. I also thought English people would be

146

rather shy. But most people seem very outgoing and self-confident, almost as much as Americans. I find the English very tolerant too. Nobody here seems to mind very much how you dress or what you say. Of course, there are some narrow-minded people too. But I don't think there are as many as there are back home in the States. I often think of you in my home and what you must be thinking about Americans. I imagine you think we're too hard-working and too materialistic. I never realised how much Americans talk about money, until I came to Britain. And you probably also think that Americans are very rude compared with the British. I don't think \ we're really so rude, it's just that we sometimes forget to use all ^; those polite phrases like "do you mind" and "could I" and "may I". One difference I have noticed is that the British don't seem as optimistic as Americans. In America we always think we can i change things and make them better. But I get the feeling that the i British have a rather pessimistic view of life.

I'm feeling lazy, so that's all I'm going to write now. I look forward to hearing your impressions of the US.

Yours, Dave

' A. According to Dave, do these words best describe British people (B) or American people (A)?

1. rude______ 2. materialistic_____ 3. hard-working_____

4. tolerant_____5. self-confident_____ 6 optimistic_____

B. Think about

1. What characteristics do people from other countries think people from your country have?

2. Do you sometimes feel shy? In what situations?

3. In what ways do you think your parents' generation is dif­ferent from your generation?

4. Are you optimistic or pessimistic about the future? Why?

5. Have you ever been to a foreign country? What do you think of the people in that country?

Howard Watson has applied for a job at International Business Equipment, Inc. The personnel director there has contacted

147

Barbara Long, one of Mr Watson's colleagues, and asked for a letter of reference. Here is Mrs Long's letter.

February 19, 19____

Ms Erica Garcia, Director of Personnel

IBE, Inc.

390 Fifth Avenue

New York, NY 10018

Dear Ms Garcia,

Regarding your request, I am pleased to write this letter of recommendation for Howard Watson. I have known Mr Watson for almost six years. After meeting at the University of Chicago, where we were both studying economics, we became very close friends. I have always been impressed by Mr Watson's remarkable success at school and by his subsequent success in his career.

Mr Watson is sincere and reliable, and has a true facility for getting things done. Although he can be impatient with others, he is never deliberately unkind or thoughtless.

Even though Mr Watson is a serious and dedicated worker, he is also involved in many outside activities. He enjoys swimming, gardening and cooking. Regarding your request, he entertains and travels often. He is well liked by his colleagues at work, and he has many friends.

I hope you will consider Mr Watson seriously for the position with your company when making your final decision. I feel certain that he will be an asset to your staff.

Sincerely, Barbara Long

A. Read the letter. Then choose the best meaning for each oftht words below.

1. Regarding means

a. referring to

b. looking at

2. A letter of recommendation gives

a. positive facts and information.

b. negative facts and information.

3. Close friends

a. live near each other.

b. like each other very much.

148

4. Remarkable means

a. very noticeable

b. not very noticeable.

5. Subsequent means

a. coming before something else.

b. coming after something else.

6. Facility means

a. ability to do things easily.

b. inability to do things easily.

7. Deliberately means

a. on purpose.

b. by accident.

8. Be involved in means

a. dislike.

b. participate in.

9. Outside activities are

a. things you do in a garden or park.

b. things you do besides work.

10. An asset is

a. something that is valuable.

b. something that isn't valuable.

B. What is, according to Barbara Ling, Mr Watson like?

C. Imagine that someone you know has applied for a job and has asked you to write a letter of reference. Using some of the words in the list below or in the letter above, give reasons why you think the person would or would not be good for the job.

Notice the use of the prefixes im-, in-, un-, ir-, anti-, and dis-. When you add these prefixes to a word, you add the meaning of | "not".

He is not very sincere. = He is very insincere.

aggressive/easygoing (un)kind (anti)social

(im)patient (un)selfish (in)sensitive

(in)dependent (in)sincere optimistic/pessimistic

serious/not serious confident/insecure (dis)honest

(un)reliable argumentative thoughtful/thoughtless

(irresponsible

149

Mr Simms never smiled. He lived in a small town where everyone was always in a good mood — everyone except him. He always seemed to be miserable and liked to make other people miserable too.

One day, while Mr Simms was on his way to the bank, he met Mrs Toogood. It was a beautiful sunny day and Mrs Toogood felt great.

"Well, good morning Mr Simms. What's the matter? You look so depressed. Did you get some bad news?" she asked him. "No, I'm fine, thank you, Mrs Toogood," he said. "Well, you shouldn't look so miserable, Mr Simms, on such a lovely sunny day."

"It's sunny now," said Mr Simms, "but it will probably rain later." "Nonsense," said Mrs Toogood and she walked on.

Next Mr Simms walked past the flower shop where Miss Lightheart was putting out some lovely fresh flowers. "Good morning, Mr Simms. Is everything all right? You look so sad. No deaths in the family, I hope."

"No. Everything's fine, thank you, Miss Lightheart." "Well then, you shouldn't be looking so unhappy on such a beautiful day, Mr Simms."

"It could rain later, you know," said Mr Simms. "It could rain." "I don't think so Mr Simms. Goodbye, sir." Mr Simms went to the bank where the bank manager, Mr Free-body, gave him a large friendly smile. "Did you lose some money. Mr Simms? You look so upset."

"There's nothing wrong with me," said Mr Simms, "but tell me, why are you in such a good mood? You look very cheerful and pleased with life."

"Look outside," said Mr Freebody. "It's such a nice day today." "Hm. I wouldn't be surprised if it rained later," said Mr Simms. "I wouldn't be surprised at all."

"Not today, Mr Simms. Not today. And how much money would you like?"

Mr Simms took his money and went home. As usual, he didn't look at all happy. He took his newspaper, sat down, and started to read. He read for about an hour, when suddenly he noticed that the room was a little dark. There was a noise at

150

the window and Mr Simms looked out. He couldn't believe it. He was absolutely delighted and a big smile appeared on his face.

A. Questions

1. Where was Mr Simms going? 2. Why was Mrs Toogood in such a good mood? 3. Why did Mrs Toogood ask Mr Simms if he had gotten bad news? 4. Where did Miss Lightheart work? 5. What sort of weather did Mr Simms expect later in the day? 6. Why did Mr Freebody think Mr Simms was upset? 7. Why did Mr Simms finally smile?

B. Think about

\. What puts you in a good mood? 2. What makes you cry? 3, What makes people laugh? 4.Can you tell a joke in English? 5. Do you sometimes feel depressed? 6. What do you do to make yourself feel better?

C. Special difficulties

Possibility: may, might, could

We use may, might and could to talk about present or future possibility.

"There's someone at the door." "It may be Sarah." (= Per­haps it is Sarah.)

We aren't sure what we are going to do tomorrow. We might go to the beach. (= Perhaps we will go to the beach.) "Where's Simon?" "He could be in the living room." (= Per­haps he is in the living room.)

Mightis normally a little less sure thanmoy. Couldis normally less sure than may or might.

+++ may ++ might + could

I. Rephrase these sentences using the modal verbs in brackets. eg Perhaps she is ill. (may) She may be ill.

1. Perhaps you're right, (could) 2. Perhaps she'll win the ^race. (might) 3. Perhaps they're asleep, (may) 4. Perhaps he knows the address, (could) 5. Perhaps I'll see you tomorrow.

151

(may) 6. Perhaps she will come. (might) 7. Perhaps it will snow today, (could)

II. You are giving advice to a friend. Use should or shouldn't.

eg Your friend is always coughing because he smokes too much. Advise him to stop smoking.

You should stop smoking.

1. Your friend has a bad toothache. Advise him to go to the dentist. You... 2. Your friend rides his bicycle at night without lights. You think this is dangerous. Advise him not to do it. 3. Your friend is going to visit Greece. Advise him to learn a few words of Greek before he goes. 4. Your friend has a bad cold. Advise him to stay at home this evening. 5. Your friend eats too many sweets. Advise her not to do it. 6. Your friend works too hard. Advise him not to do it. 7. Your friend misses too many classes. Advise him not to do it.

III. Complete the sentences using so or such.

It was such a good film. I really enjoyed it.

1. She's ... shy. She always gets very nervous when she meets people. 2. You shouldn't eat... quickly; you'll give yourself indi­gestion. 3. It's ... an interesting town; there really is ... much to do there. 4.1 was ... disappointed when I failed my driving test. 5. He felt... tired that he decided not to go out. 6. It was ... a hot day that they had to open all the windows. 7. I've made ... many mistakes in this letter. I think I'll type it again. 8. He had... much luggage that we couldn't get it all into the car. 9. It was ... a boring film that I fell asleep during the show. 10.1 was... excited that I could hardly speak.

Conversation Practice Listen, read and practise.

Describing People

a) Woman: What do you think of the new French teacher? Man: Well, she's kind of strange and she seems to

be pretty moody.

152

b) First man: Everyone says Kathy is hardworking and

always very careful in her job.

Second man: Yes, and she's very enthusiastic about her work, too.

c) First man: Hey! Look at what the teacher said about

me on my report: I'm "creative, reliable, and intelligent." Second man: Oh, that's great!

d) Man: Hey, what's wrong?

Woman: I'm fed up with my brother! He's so hot-tem­pered. He always gets angry with me.

Man: Really?

Woman: Yeah. He gets upset so easily. I don't know what's the matter with him.

e) Man: Look what Mary gave me! Isn't this a nice

book?

Woman: Yes. It's great! That's Mary, she's so gene­rous — she always likes to treat people and give presents to her friends.

f) Woman: How do you like your new boss? Man: Oh, she's too serious. Woman: Really? Why?

Man: Oh, she never enjoys a joke. She never laughs.

It's hard to even get a smile out of her.

g) First woman: How's your new secretary?

Second woman: Well, he's OK, but he's pretty slow. He can't type very fast. And the mistakes...! I have to send everything back at least twice for re­typing.

h) First man: What is Paul's wife like? Second man: I can't stand her. She's everything I don't like in a woman. She's bossy, she's superior, and she thinks she can do everything better than other people.

0 First man: What does Mike's sister look like? Second man: Very plain. Long straight hair, high forehead and prominent cheek bones.

153

j) Man: What's George like?

Woman: A bit like you, actually. Same build, same height, and similar colour eyes.

k) First man: What is Mary like?

Second man: She's quite good-looking. The kind of girl you go for. But she's a bit too serious for me. You know, politics, literature, human rights, things like that.

1) Paul: Anna, what was your first boyfriend like?

Anna: Goodness! Why do you want to know that?

Paul: I'm just interested.

Anna: Well, he was very good-looking, with dark

hair and big, brown eyes. He was very ro­mantic. He was always buying me flowers and presents. Of course, he wasn't as nice as you.

m) Old lady: Help me somebody please! Oh policeman, stop that man!

Policeman: I...

Old lady: He stole my handbag!

Policeman: I think it's too late, madam.

Old lady: But...

Policeman: He's escaped. Now tell me...

Old lady: Yes...

Policeman: What did he look like?

Old lady: Ah well... He... He was medium height and

err... quite well built and he had short dark hair. Oh I know he looked like that actor man, that David Starr, but he was taller than that.

Police officer: Police Department. May I help you ?

Woman: I'd like to report a missing person—my grand-

mother.

Police Officer: Your grandmother? OK.

Woman: Yes, she went out at three o'clock this

afternoon. It's already past midnight and she hasn't come back.

154

Police officer: Uh-huh. What's her name, please?

Woman: Mrs Rose Baker.

Police officer: And... how old is she?

Woman: She's seventy-eight.

Police officer: OK. Now can you describe her?

Woman: Yes, she's about five feet tall.

Police officer: Five feet, uh-huh.

Woman: She has curly gray hair and she wears glasses.

Police officer: And what is she wearing?

Woman: Let me see. A red dress and a white jacket.

Police officer: A red dress and a white jacket.

Woman: Oh, and a little hat with flowers on it.

Police officer: All right. Now, just a few more questions...

A. Questions

1. Who is missing? 2. What does the person look like? 3. What is the person wearing? 4. What do you think has happened to the missing person?

B. Now listen to the rest of the conversation.

Woman: (Clock strikes three) Oh, Grandma, it's you! I was so worried about you. It's three o'clock in the mor­ning.

Grandma: Why were you worried? I was out on a date.

Woman: A date? With who?

Grandma: Mr Franklin — my new boyfriend. He's only eighty-three!

C. Think of someone in the class. Give a clue like this:

I'm thinking of a woman. Now your classmates try to guess who it is.

How old is she? What is she wearing?

How tall is she? Is she wearing a red

sweater? What kind of hair does she have? Is it... (name)?

D. Cut out pictures of people from magazines. Two people write their own descriptions of the same picture. For example:

155

The man is in his early 20 s. He's tall, and he has brown hair. He's wearing a red sweater and dark blue pants, and he's carrying a black jacket. He's also wearing a watch.

Now compare your description with the other person 's. E. Situation:

You lose your child at the supermarket. You are very worried. You go to the man in charge and ask him to help you find your child.

A: Have you met the new sales manager?

B: Yes, I have.

A: What do you think of him?

B: Well, he seems very nice. He's very friendly, and he's

always helpful. A: Oh, do you think so? В : Yes, but I think he's kind of forgetful. He never remembers

my name.

A: Yeah, you're right. He's very forgetful. B: Oh, do you know him? A: Yes, he's my husband!

A. Match these adjectives with definitions. Then compare with a partner.

a) easygoing is very intelligent

b) forgetful has good manners

c) funny always keeps a promise

d) generous thinks deeply about things a) polite doesn't worry about things

f) reliable likes giving things to people

g) serious doesn't remember things h) shy likes to be around people i) smart likes making people laugh

j) sociable doesn't say much in front of other people

B. Can you give definitions for these words!

bad-tempered • creative • patient • moody • talkative

C. Use the words in parentheses to complete the sentences.

1. My boss is pretty... and he's... generous, (very, easygoing)

2. My next-door neighbour is not a very ... person. He's kind of... and ... very sociable, (not, friendly, shy)

3. My sister is ... smart and she's very... But she's some­times ... (creative, really, forgetful)

4. My best friend is a ... sociable person, and she's ... too. But she is very ... (funny, impatient, pretty)

D. Describe three of your classmates. Does your partner agree?

Did you go to the athletics club last night, Karen?

Yes I did. It was great!

Oh yes? Why?

Well, I met a boy called Steven.

Ooh! What about Rod Smith?

Oh, I'm not really interested in him.

Really? I quite like Rod.

But Steven is much nicer.

What's he like?

He's very good-looking.

Is he?

He's tall and slim, and he's got short brown hair.

Where does he live?

In Willesden.

Where does he go to school?

Cricklewood College.

So he's older than you.

Yes, he's seventeen.

A. Show a picture of someone for about 5 seconds to the class and then ask "What's he/she like? "

(A = Annie; G = Grandmother) A: Grannie? G: Yes, my dear?

A: How many brothers and sisters did you have?

G: I had... now let me see... there was... me, Alice, James, then Henry — that's four, isn't it? Then Robert and Emily, the twins — so that makes two sisters and three brothers.

A: What were they all like? Did they look like you?

G: Well, some did and some didn't. My sister Alice and I were very similar. People used to think we were the twins, but she was two years older than me. We both had fair hair, and when we were young, we used to have lovely ribbons in it. People said I was the pretty one — my sister Alice was so moody, she always looked miserable.

A: Who were you closest to?

G: Ah, my brother James. He was such a kind boy, always smiling, and so gentle. We were inseparable, we went everywhere together.

A: What did he look like?

G: Well, people said James had my mother's features; same nose, same mouth, while Henry, who was older, was more like Father. Henry had thick, dark hair, but James had fair hair like me, and he used to have a parting down the middle. Henry was quite a plump boy, not fat but he was always well-built, like Father.

A: What about the twins?

G: They were very plain, I seem to remember. When they were babies, no one could tell them apart, they were so similar. They both had long faces with high fore­heads... Robert was very severe and serious — I was quite afraid of him -— but then he was so much older than me, we didn't have much to do with each other. Robert looked middle-aged before he was twenty.

A: What about your Mummy and Daddy?

G: Mother was a darling. She used to have her hair in a tight bun, and she looked quite fierce, but she wasn't really. She had smiling eyes and a heart of gold. Father was a very quiet man, he always looked distant as though he were lost in his own thoughts.

A: What were their names?

G: Daniel and Clare.

A. Read the conversation. Ask and answer questions.

B. Speak about the family described in the conversation.

C. Roleplay the conversation.

D. Describe the members, of your family. How similar or different are they?

Exchange papers and compare у our families.

E. Match each word with a definition.

a) easygoing people who don't do what they say they will

b) emotional apersonwhodoesn'toftenaskforotherpeople'shelporadvice

c) generous a person who waits calmly for things and doesn 't worry if things

are not on time

d) independent someone who likes giving things to other people

e) moody a person who doesn't usually worry or get angry

f) patient someone who is often gloomy or depressed

g) proud a person who enjoys being with other people

h) sociable people who have a high opinion of their own importance i) unreliable people who show their feelings easily

Now give definitions for these words: ambitious, punctual, selfish, confident, outgoing, careful, careless, impatient

Sue: Who's your best friend, Tom? Tom: Well, I guess Harry Taylor is my best friend. We've been

going to baseball games together for the past ten years. Sue: Oh? And how did you meet? Tom: Well, it was really funny. See, Harry's a police officer.

And one day I was late getting to a baseball game, and,

well, I was in a real hurry... and he stopped me for

speeding. Sue: Uh-oh!

Tom: Yeah! Well, I explained why I was in such a hurry, and I

found out he was a big baseball fan, too. Sue: Uh! You're kidding? Tom: No, no... so we arranged to go to a game together the

next weekend. But I still had to pay for the speeding

ticket.

158

159

Sue: Well, what's Han у like?

Tom: Well, you know, he's a ... he's a really interesting guy. You know, he's got this great sense of humour and he loves meeting people. He's very sociable. Sue: Oh?

Tom: Hey, what about you, Sue? Who's your best friend? Sue: Oh, my best friend is Ann Thomas. We met in France

one summer about five years ago... Tom: Really?

Sue: We were both studying French at the same school and then we travelled together in Europe for about a month when classes finished. Tom: What's Ann like? Sue: What's she like? Well, she's really a creative person.

She writes short stories. Tom: No kidding? Sue: And she's very generous. She's always helping people

out.

Tom: Huh! You know, I'd like to meet her sometime. Sue: You would? Well, I'm planning to see her next Satur­day. Maybe you could bring your friend Harry and we could go on a double date. How about that? Tom: Yeah, it sounds great!

A. Questions

1. Who is Tom's best friend? 2. How did they meet? 3. What does Harry do? 4. What is Harry like? 4. Who is Sue's best friend? 5. How did they meet? 6. What is Ann like?

B. Give a brief account of the conversation.

C. Roleplay the conversation. Make up a similar conversation.

D. What qualities should a friend have? Think of five adjectives.

E. Speak about your best friend. What do you like most about him/her? How is your friend similar to or different from you?

F. What sort of person are you?

Put [Y] for Yes, [NJfor No, and [S] for Sometimes.

a. Are you generally aware of other people's feelings?

b. Do you find it difficult to meet new people?

160

c. Do you frequently make people laugh?

d. Does your mood change often and suddenly?

e. When decisions have to be made, do you think first of yourself?

f. Can your friends trust you and depend on you?

g. Do you generally like other people's company?

h. Are there lots of things you want to do in your profes­sional life?

i. Can you usually understand other people's point of view?

j. Do you worry and think too much about detail?

k. Are you usually quite a happy, smiling person?

1. Are you interested in other people and their business?

m. Do you sometimes not tell the truth because you don't want to hurt someone's feelings?

Match these adjectives with the questions above. Example [b] shy

tolerant witty

sociable selfish ₄

reliable ambitious

sensitive moody

tactful inquisitive

fussy cheerful

Scott and Ashley Moreton are at Scott's office party.

Ashley: Scott, who's the man who's talking so loudly?

Scott: Which one? Everybody's talking loudly.

Ashley: The bald man with the moustache.

Scott: Oh, him! That's Harrison. He's the company's presi­dent.

Ashley: And that woman who's standing next to him? Is she his wife?

Scott: The one with the grey hair? Why do you think she's his wife?

Ashley: She's the only one who isn't laughing at his jokes!

Scott: But everyone else has to! Same again, honey?

161

Ashley: No, thanks. I'll just have a mineral water.

Man: Hello, I haven't seen you before.

Ashley: That's because I don't work here. My husband does

Man: Oh, what's his name?

Ashley: Scott. Scott Moreton. Do you know him?

Man: No, I don't work here either — my girlfriend does. I

suppose she knows him. Ashley: Where is she? Man: She's over there. That attractive, blonde girl who's

talking to that funny-looking man with the beard and

glasses. I wonder who he is. Ashley: That "funny-looking man" is my husband.

A. Study and practise the conversation. Make up a similar conversation.

B. Here are some English proverbs. Learn and comment on them

Appearances are deceitful. The face is the index of the mind. A fair face may hide a foul heart. Beauty lies in lover's eyes. Handsome is as handsome does.

C. Sum up the specific vocabulary on the topic "Appearance. Personality ".

1. Name the parts of the body using as many nouns as you know; eg mouth, tongue, etc.

2. Name as many adjectives as you know to describe ap­pearance and personality. Do it in alphabetical order. Ma­ke a list of the specific vocabulary on the topic.

Reading

This is an extract from Somerset Maugham's story "The Lotus Eater". The writer describes his first impressions of a man called Thomas Wilson.

"Though his teeth were not very good his smile was attractive. It was gentle and kindly. He was dressed in a blue cotton shirt and a pair of grey trousers, much creased and none too clean, of

162

thin canvas, and on his feet he wore a pair of very old espadrilles. The get-up was picturesque, and very suitable to the place and the weather but it did not at all go with his face. It was a lined, Jong face deeply sunburned, thin-lipped, with small grey eyes rather close together and tight, neat features. The grey hair was carefully brushed. It was not a plain face, indeed in his youth Wilson might have been good-looking. He wore the blue shirt, open at the neck, and the grey canvas trousers, not as though they belonged to him, but as though, shipwrecked in his pyjamas, he had been fitted out with odd garments by compassionate strangers. Notwithstanding this careless attire he looked like the manager of a branch office in an insurance company, who should by rights be wearing a black coat with pepper-and-salt trousers, a white collar and an unobjectionable tie.

When in the evening Mr Towers Chandler appeared in the streets of New York people took him for a rich young man. He was handsome, well dressed and sure of himself. In a word, he looked like a typical clubman going out to have a good time. No one knew that he was not rich. He was in fact quite poor.

Chandler was twenty-two years old. He worked in the office of an architect and got eighteen dollars a week. At the end of each week he put aside one dollar out of his salary. At the end of each ten weeks he ironed his evening suit and went out to have a good time. He usually dined at' a fashionable restaurant where there was wine and music. It took him ten weeks to accumulate his capital of ten dollars and it took him only a few hours to spend it, playing the role of a rich idler.

One night he went out, dressed in his evening clothes, and started for the restaurant where he dined one evening out of seventy.

He was just going to turn round the corner when a young girl м front of him slipped on the snow and fell down. Chandler ran ^UP and helped her to her feet.

"Thank you," said the girl. "I think I have twisted my ankle." "Does it hurt very much?" asked Chandler. "Yes, it does," she answered, "but I think I shall be able to ^Walk in a few minutes."

163

Chandler looked at the girl. She was very young. Her face was both beautiful and kind. She was dressed in a cheap black dress that looked like a uniform that sales-girls wear. A cheap black hat was on her shining dark-brown hair. She looked like a working girl of the best type.

A sudden idea came to his mind. He decided to ask the girl to dine with him. He was sure she was a nice girl. Her speech and manners showed it. And in spite of her simple clothes he felt he would be happy to sit at table with her. He thought: This poor girl has never been to a fashionable restaurant. She will remember the pleasure for a long time.

"I think," he said to her, "that your foot must rest for some time. Now, I am going to tell you something. I am on my way to dine. Come with me. We'll have a nice dinner and a pleasant talk together. And when our dinner is over your foot will be better, I am sure."

The girl looked up into Chandler's clear, blue eyes. Then she smiled. "We don't know each other. I'm afraid it is not right."

she said.

' "Why not?" asked the young man. "I'll introduce myself. My name is Towers Chandler. I will try to make our dinner as pleasant as possible. And after dinner I will say good-bye to you, or will take you to your door as you wish."

"But how can I go to the restaurant in this old dress and hat?" said the girl looking at Chandler's evening suit.

"Never mind that," said Chandler. "I'm sure you will look better in them than any one we shall see there in the richest evening dress."

"I think I will go with you, Mr Chandler," said the girl, "because my ankle still hurts me. You may call me... Miss Marian."

"All right, Miss Marian," said the young architect, "you will not have to walk far. There is a very good restaurant a little way from here."

The two young people came to the restaurant and sat down at a table. Chandler ordered a good dinner. He felt quite happy.

The restaurant was full of richly-dressed people. There was a good orchestra playing beautiful music. The food was excellent. His companion, even in her cheap hat and dress, looked more beautiful than some ladies in evening dresses.

164

And then... some kind of madness came upon Chandler. He began to play the role of a rich idler before the girl. He spoke of clubs and teas, of playing golf and riding horses and tours in Europe. He could see that the girl was listening to him with attention, so he told her more and more lies. The longer he talked the more lies he told her about his life.

At last she said, "Do you like living such an idle life? Have you no work to do? Have you no other interests?"

"My dear Miss Marian," he explained, "work! I am too busy to work. It takes so much time to dress every day for dinner, to make a dozen visits in an afternoon... I have no time for work."

The dinner was over. The two young people walked out to the corner where they had met. Miss Marian walked very well now, her ankle was much better.

"Thank you for a nice time," she said to Chandler. "I must run home now. I liked the dinner very much, Mr Chandler."

He shook hands with her, smiling, and said that he also had to hurry. He was going to his club to play bridge.

In his cheap cold room Chandler put away his evening suit to rest for sixty nine days.

"That was a fine girl," he said to himself. "I should like to meet her again. I have made a mistake in playing the role of a rich idler before a poor working girl. Why did I lie to her? All because of my evening suit, I think... I'm sorry it's all over!"

After she had left Chandler the girl came to a rich and handsome house facing a beautiful avenue. She entered a room where a young lady was looking out of the window.

"Oh, Marian!" she exclaimed when the other entered. "When will you stop frightening us? Two hours ago you ran out in this old dress and Helen's hat. Mother is so worried. She sent the chauffeur in the automobile to look for you. You are a bad, bad girl, Marian!"

Then she pressed a button. A servant came in and she said, "Helen, tell Mother that Miss Marian has returned."

"Don't be angry with me, Sister," said Marian. "I only ran down to my dressmaker to tell her to use blue buttons instead of white for my new dress. My old dress and Helen's hat were just what I needed. Every one thought I was a sales-girl, I am sure."

"Dinner is over, dear, you were away so long," said Marian's sister.

"I know," said Marian. "I slipped in the street and twisted my

165

ankle. So I walked to a restaurant with great difficulty and sat there until my ankle was better. That's why I was so long."

The two girls sat down at the window, looking out. Then Marian said, "We shall have to marry one day, both of us. Shall I tell you the kind of man I can love?"

"Go on, dear," said her sister smiling.

"The man I can love must have clear blue eyes, he must be handsome and good and he mustn't try to flirt. But I shall love a. man like that only if he is not lazy; if he has some work to do in the world. No matter how poor he is I shall love him. But, Sister, dear, what kind of men do we meet every day? They live an idle life between visits to their friends and visits to their clubs. No, I can't love a man like that, even if his eyes are blue and he is handsome; even if he is kind to poor girls whom he meets in the street."

Self check

1. Translate from Russian into English.

А. Сара: У нас гостит моя двоюродная сестра Мария, и она скучает. Я сегодня должна была пойти с ней в кино, но мой начальник просит меня поработать сверхурочно. Мы договорились с Марией встретиться около "Одеона" в 8 часов. Фильм начинается в 8.30. Ты не мог бы сводить ее в кино?

Ник: Я не уверен. А сколько ей лет?

Сара: 14. Пожалуйста, Ник. Она очень милая.

Ник: Но как я ее узнаю?

Сара: Она высокая, у нее длинные каштановые волосы.

Ник: Понятно. А как она одета?

Сара: На ней темно-голубой плащ.

Ник: На ней сапоги или туфли?

Сара: Извини, я не помню.

Ник: Неважно. Я думаю, что узнаю ее.

Б.Джейн: Мой брат недавно женился. Виктор: Что представляет собой его жена? Джейн: Она миловидная, стройная девушка со светлы­ми волосами и большими голубыми глазами.

166

Унее правильные черты лица, а также хороший цвет лица. Кроме того, она умна и добра. Мне она очень нравится.

Виктор: Я никогда не встречал твоего брата. Как выгля­дит он?

Джейн: Он хорош собой, среднего роста, хорошо сложен. У него каштановые волосы и черные глаза. У не­го хороший характер. Он открытый и добродуш­ный. Кроме того, он очень трудолюбив и всегда готов помочь, на него можно положиться.

В. — Что вы думаете о новом инженере?

— Я считаю, что он умен и талантлив.

— Я согласен с вами. Кроме того, он очень тактичен и вежлив.

Г. — Что представляет собой жена Рона?

— Она довольно простенькая, низкого роста и несколь­ко застенчива.

Д. — Мама, посмотри на ту девушку вон там. Это но­вая девушка Ника.

— Которая девушка? Как она выглядит?

— Вон та девушка с черными вьющимися волосами.

— Черные вьющиеся волосы... А как она одета?

— Девушка в красном пиджаке и голубом платье.

— Это Рита Смит, не так ли?

Е. — Как вам понравилась сестра Дика?

— Она очень привлекательная девушка. Она привет­лива, у нее хорошее чувство юмора.

— Да, согласен с вами. Она не похожа на своего бра­та. Он несколько грубоват и скучноват.

Ж. У моей сестры трое детей: два мальчика и одна девоч­ка. Ее старшего сына зовут Робертом. Ему 18 лет. Это высокий молодой человек с серыми глазами и светлы­ми волосами. Роберт очень приветлив. Он веселый, об­щительный человек, но несколько рассеян. Ее младше­го сына зовут Виктором. Ему 10 лет. Он учится в на­чальной школе. Он способный мальчик, но несколь­ко ленив. Виктор, в отличие от Роберта, не очень общи-

167

телен. Он спокойный ребенок и любит проводить вре­мя дома. Дочь сестры зовут Катей. Кате 16 лет. Она сту­дентка. Катя очень миленькая, стройная девушка. Она честная и открытая. Катя очень трудолюбива и серьезна.

— Как вам нравится ваш зять?

— Он совсем мне не нравится. У него плохой ха­рактер, он эгоистичен и честолюбив.

UNIT 3 GRAMMAR: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

English tense usage can be divided into two categories: tenses used to refer to fact, and those used to refer to non-fact. Fact is what is considered to be real or quite possible; non-fact is what is supposed or wished for, which is either unreal or improbable.

Fact: I work in a restaurant, but I don't earn much. If I find a better job, I'll take it.

Non-fact: I wish I had a lot of money.

If I had a lot of money, I would open my own res­taurant.

Tenses used to refer to fact are related to real time. For example, a past verb form refers to the past.

I had a lovely holiday in Spain last year.

Tenses used to refer to non-fact are not related to real time. Generally speaking, this unreality is expressed by shifting the verb form "backwards" (for example, from present to past).

If I had a car, I could visit my parents.

Here the past verb form does not refer to the real past, but to the "wished for" present and future. It has the effect of distancing the meaning from reality. It is important to understand this difference between fact and non-fact when discussing conditional sentences.

There are three types of conditional sentences.

Type I

(If + present tense; simple future simple present)

Type I conditional sentences are based on fact in real time. They are used to:

— talk about certain or probable situations, eg: If you go now, you'll catch the train. If you don't go now, you'll miss the train.

169

— talk about general truths or habitual activities

If you mix yellow and blue, you get green.(= When­ever you mix yellow and blue...) If I have a big lunch, it makes me sleepy.

Type 2

(If + simple past;... would + simple form) Type 2 conditional sentences are not based on fact. They are used to talk about unreal present or future situations.

If I had a lot of money, I'd travel round the world. (But I do not have a lot of money.)

If I didn't feel so tired, I'd come out with you. (But I feel very tired.)

If the weather was nice, I'd go to the beach. (But the weather is not nice.)

We also use this structure to talk about unlikely present or future situations.

If she really loved you, she wouldn't be so horrible to you If I won a lot of money, I'd take a long holiday.

The past form eg had, loved does not have a past meaning in sentences like these; it has a hypothetical present or future meaning. We often use were instead of was after if, especially in a more formal style.

If the weather were nice, I'd go to the beach.

I'd come out for a walk with you if I weren't so busy.

That watch wouldn't be so cheap if it were really made of gold

We often use if I were you to give advice andifyou were me to ask for advice.

If I were you, I'd apply for the job. What would you do if you were me?

We can use the modal verbs might or could instead of would in the main clause to imply a possible rather than a definite consequence.

If I won a lot of money, I might stop working. (= I would perhaps stop working.)

170

I could repair the car, if I had the right tools. (= I would be able to repair the car...)

ТуреЗ

(If + past perfect; ... would have + past participle) Type 3 conditional sentences are not based on fact. They are used to talk about unreal past situations.

If the weather had been nice yesterday, I would have gone

to the beach. (But the weather was not nice.)

If I'd studied hard, I would have passed the exam. (But I

did not study hard.)

If you hadn't missed your bus, you wouldn't have been

late for school. (But you missed your bus.)

We can use the modal verbs might and could instead of would in the main clause.

If you had taken the exam, you might have passed it. (= ... you would perhaps have passed it.) I could have repaired the car, if I'd had the right tools. (= I would have been able to repair the car...)

Type 2 and Type 3 mixed

It is possible for each of the two clauses in a conditional sentence to have a different time reference, and the result is a mixed conditional.

If I had eaten breakfast several hours ago, I would not be

hungry now. (= I did not eat breakfast several hours ago,

so I am hungry now.)

If he were a good student, he would have studied for the j». test. (He is not a good student. He did not study for the test t yesterday.)

Practice Conditional sentences: type I

- Put the verbs т brackets into the correct forms, (self check) 1. If I see him I (give) him a lift. 2. The table will collapse if

171

you (stand) on it. 3. If he (eat) all that he will be ill. 4. If I find your passport I (telephone) you at once. 5. The police (arrest) him if they catch him. 6. If he (read) in bad light he will ruin his eyes. 7. Someone (steal) your car if you leave it unlocked. 8. What will happen if my parachute (not open)? 9. If he (wash) my car I'll give him £10. 10. If she (need) a radio she can borrow mine. 11. If you (not go) away I'll send for the police. 12. I'll be very angry if he (make) any more mistakes. 13. If he (be) late we'll go without him. 14. She will be absolutely furious if she (hear) about this. 15. If you put on the kettle I (make) the tea. 16. If you give my dog a bone he (bury) it at once. 17. If we leave the car here it (not be) in anybody's way. 18. He'll be late for the train if he (not start) at once. 19. It you come late they (not let) you in. 20. If he (go) on telling lies nobody will believe a word he says. 21. Unless he (sell) more he won't get much commission. 22. If I lend you $20 when you (repay) me? 23. We'll have to move upstairs if the river (rise) any higher. 24. If he (work) hard today can he have a holiday tomorrow? 25. Ice (turn) into water if you heat it. 26. If the house (burn) down we can claim compensation. 27. If you (not like) this one I'll bring you another. 28. Unless you are more careful you (have) an accident. 29. Tell him to ring me up if you (see) him. 30. If I tell you a secret, you (promise) not to tell it to anyone else? 31. If you (not believe) what I say, ask your mother. 32. If he (like) the house will he buy it? 33. Unless I have a quiet room I (not be able) to do any work. 34. She won't open the door unless she (know) who it is. 35. I'll look for your notebook and if I (find) it I (give) you a ring. 36. The lift wasn't working when I was here last. If it still (not work) we (have) to use the stairs. 37. He's only sixteen but he wants to leave school at the end of the term. — If he (leave) now he (be sorry) afterwards. 38.1 expect it will freeze tonight. — If it (freeze) tonight the roads (be) very slippery tomorrow. 39. That book is overdue. If you (not take) it back to the library tomorrow you (have) to pay a fine. 40. Unless Tom (take) his library book back tomorrow he (have) to pay a fine. 41. You'd better take the day off if you (not feel) well tomorrow. 42. You can use my phone if yours (not work). 43. If I have enough time I (write) to my parents every week. 44. If I have enough time tomorrow, I (write) to my parents. 45. If I (not eat) breakfast I always get hungry during class. 46. If I don't eat breakfast tomorrow morning, I (get) hungry during class. 47. If

you (not know) the meaning of a word you may use a dictionary. 48. If Jack (refuse) to help we'll have to manage without him. 49. If Jack (not help) we'll have to manage without him. 50.1 hate my job. — If you (hate) it why you (not change) it? 51. If you (hear) from Tom could you please let me know? 52. I'm not expecting any messages, but if someone (ring) while I am out could you say that I'll be back by 6.00?

Conditional sentences: type 2

I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)

1. If I had a typewriter I (type) it myself. 2. If I (know) his address I'd give it to you. 3. He (look) a lot better if he shaved more often. 4. If he worked more slowly he (not make) so many mistakes. 5. I shouldn't drink that wine if I (be) you. 6. More tourists would come to this country if it (have) a better climate. 7. If I were sent to prison you (visit) me? 8. If someone (give) you a helicopter what would you do with it? 9.1 (buy) shares in that company if I had some money. 10. If you drove your car into the river you (be able) to get out? 11. If I (win) a big prize in a lottery I'd give up my job. 12. What you (do) if you found a burglar in your house? 13.1 could tell you what this means if I (know) Greek. 14, If everybody (give) £1 we would have enough. 15. He might get fat if he (stop) smoking. 16. If he knew that it was dangerous he (not come). 17. If you (see) someone drowning what would you do? 18. I could get a job easily if I (have) a degree. 19. If she (do) her hair differently she might look quite nice. 20. If we had more rain our crops (grow) faster. 21.1 (keep) a horse if I could afford it. 22. I'd go and see him more often if he (live) on a bus route. 23.1 (offer) to help if I thought I'd be any use. 24. What would you do if the lift (get) stuck between two floors? 25. If you (paint) the walls white the room would be much brighter. 26. If you (change) your job would it affect your pension? 27. I'd climb over the wall if there (not be) so much broken glass on top of it. 28. Of course I'm not going to give her a diamond ring. If I (give) her a diamond ring she (sell) it. 29. Husband: But I'm not going on a diet. Why should I go on a diet? Wife: If you (go) on a diet you (lose) weight. 30. If we (work) all night we (finish) in time; but we have no intention of working all night.

173

31. If I (see) a tiger walking across Hyde Park I (climb) a tree. -— That (not be) any use. The tiger (climb) after you. 32. If someone (ring) my door at 3 a.m. I (be) very unwilling to open the door. 33. Why don't you buy a season ticket? — Because I lose everything. If I (buy) a season ticket I (lose) it. 34. Why don't you bring your car to work? If I (have) a car I (bring) it to work.

35. Ann: George is fourteen. Tom: He must be older than that. He's in full-time job. If he (be) only fourteen he still (be) at school.

36. He is staying at the Savoy in London. — Is he very rich? — I suppose he is. If he (be) a poor man he (not stay) at the Savoy.

37. Why don't you get a cat? If you (keep) a cat the mice (not run) about everywhere. 38. A university degree is a useful thing. If I (have) a university degree I now (sit) in a comfortable office instead of standing at a street corner selling newspapers. 39.1 am not an astronaut. If I (be) an astronaut, I (take) my camera with me on the rocket ship next month. 40. If there (be) no oxygen on earth, life as we know it (exist, not) 41. If I (be) a bird, I (want, not) to live in a cage. 42. Sea water is salty. If the ocean (consist) of fresh water, there (be) plenty of water to irrigate all of the deserts in the world to provide an abundant food supply for the entire population of the earth. 43. It is expensive to call across the ocean. However, if transoceanic telephone calls (be) cheap, I (call) my family every day and (talk) for hours. 44. Jim doesn't study hard: If he (study) harder, he (get) better grades. 45. The weather isn't nice. I (take) a walk if the weather (be) nice. 46. If money (grow) on trees, all of us (be) rich. 47. Life (be) boring if everyone (have) the same opinions about everything. 48. If I (be) you, I (tell) Brian the truth. 49. The student cafeteria is relatively inexpensive, but the food isn't very good. I (eat) there all the time if the food (be) better. 50. I'm very tired tonight. If I (be, not) tired, I (go) to the movie with you. 51.1 won't have enough time today. But if I (have) enough time, I (write) a letter to my cousin. 52. I'm not going to buy a car. But if I (buy) a car, I (drive) to Springfield next month to visit my friend. 53. It is cold today. If it (be, not) cold today, I (go) swimming. 54. What noi^y neighbours you've got! If mine (be) as bad as yours, I (go) cra/y. 55. The style of that dress is lovely, but I'm not so keen on the colour. If the blue (be) a bit lighter, it (look) better. 56. Mmm! This meal's delicious! If I (can) cook as well as this, I (open) a restaurant. 57.1 have to work about 80 hours a week. If I (have)

174

_more time, I (take up) a sport like tennis. 58. If he (be) taller, he (can) be a policeman, but he's too short.

II. Rephrase these sentences using an if construction.

eg He smokes too much; perhaps that's why he can't get rid of his cough.

If he didn't smoke so much he might get rid of his 8ough. or

If he smoked less he might (be able to) get rid of his cough.

1. She is very shy; that's why she doesn't enjoy parties. 2. He

doesn't take any exercise; that's why he is so unhealthy. 3.1 haven't

the right change so we can't get tickets from the machine. 4. They

speak French to her, not English, so her English doesn't improve.

5. He doesn't work overtime, so he doesn't earn as much as I do.

6. My number isn't in the directory so people don't ring me up.

7. The shops don't deliver now, which makes life difficult. 8. He's very thin that's why he feels the cold so much. 9. We haven't any matches so we can't light a fire. 10. I'm fat; that's why I can't get through the bathroom window. 11. He doesn't help me, possibly because I never ask him for help. 12. I can't drive so we can't take the car. 13. We have no ladder so we can't get over the wall. 14. My friend advised me to sell it. (My friend said, "If I... you I...") 15.1 haven't much time so I read very little. 16. They don't clean the windows so the rooms look rather dark. 17. He never polishes his shoes, so he never looks smart. 18. He doesn't pay his staff properly; perhaps that's why they don't work well.

19. We haven't got central heating, so the house is rather cold.

20. He spends hours watching television; that's why he never has time to do odd jobs in the house. 21. I haven't got a vacuum cleaner; that's why I'm so slow. 22.1 don't know his address, so I can't write to him. 23. He never shaves; that's the only reason he looks unattractive. 24. You work too fast; that's why you make so many mistakes. 25. I can't park near my office; that's why I don't come by car. 26. I live a long way from the centre; that's why I am always late for work. 27. I haven't a map so I can't direct you. 28. People drive very fast. That's why there are so many accidents. 29. English people speak very quickly. Perhaps that's why I can't understand them. 30. The flats are not clearly numbered, so it is very difficult to find anyone. 31. You don't wipe

175

your feet, so you make muddy marks all over the floor. 32.1 live near my office, so I don't spend much time travelling to work.

Conditional sentences: type 3

I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)

1. If I had known that you were in hospital I (visit) you. 2. If you (arrive) ten minutes earlier you would have got a seat. 3. You would have seen my garden at its best if you (be) here last week. 4.1 shouldn't have believed it if I (not see) it with my own eyes. 5. If he had slipped he (fall) 500 metres. 6. If he had asked you, you (accept)? 7. If I (have) a map I would have been all right. 8. If I (know) that you were coming I'd have baked a cake. 9.1 (offer) to help him if I had realized that he was ill. 10. If you had told me that he never paid his debts I (not lend) him the money. 11. If you (put) some mustard in the sandwiches they would have tasted better. 12. If he had known that the river was dangerous he (not try) to swim across it. 13. If you (speak) more slowly he might have understood you. 14. If he had known the whole story he (not be) so angry. 15. If I (try) again I think that I would have succeeded. 16. You (not get) into trouble if you had obeyed my instructions. 17. If you hadn't been in such a hurry you (not put) sugar into the sauce instead of salt. 18. If I (be) ready when he called he would have taken me with him. 19. If she had listened to my directions she (not turn) down the wrong street. 20. If you (look) at the engine for a moment you would have seen what was missing. 21. He would have been arrested if he (try) to leave the country. 22.1 (take) a taxi if I had realized that it was such a long way. 23. You (save) me a lot of trouble if you had told me where you were going. 24. She was sent to prison only because she refused to pay the fine; if she (pay) the fine she (not be) sent to prison. 25. He didn't tell me that he was a vegetarian till halfway through the meal. If he (tell) me earlier I (cook) something more suitable. 26.1 had no map; that's why I got lost. If I (have) a map I (be) all right. 27. Why didn't you say that you were short of money? If I (know) I (lend) you some. 28. It's lucky he had his torch with him. If he (not have) it he (fall) down the cellar steps. 29. The job is much worse than I expected. If I (realise) how awful it was going to be I (not accept) it. 30. The paraffin heater was perfectly safe. There (not be) a fire if the children (not knock)

176

it over. 31. The accident was mainly Tom's fault. He was driving much too close to the car in front. If he (be) further away he (be able) to stop in time. 32. Why did you throw away those newspapers? I hadn't finished with them. —I'm sorry. If I (know) you were still reading them I (not throw) them away. 33. He says he refused the job, but that this had nothing to do with the salary. He (refuse) even if they (offer) him twice as much. 34. If you had been there what you (do)? 35. It rained, which spoiled our picnic; but if it (not rain) it (be) a great success. 36. I didn't recognize him at first because he was wearing dark glasses; if he (not wear) them I (recognize) him immediately. 37. Why didn't you phone from the village? — Because there was no phone in the village. If there (be) of course we (phone) from there. 38. He was not very happy at school because he was a bookish boy, not at all interested in games. If he (play) games like the other boys he (have) a much better time. 39. We had to stand almost all the way. It was all Tom's fault. If he (book) seats, as I told him to, we (have) quite a comfortable journey. 40. We were travelling with false passports. That was the trouble. If our passports (be) all right we (not be) arrested. 41. When the director asked her to play the lead she agreed though she didn't know anything about the play. I think that if she (read) the play she (refuse) the part. 42.The club secretary is useless. He never tells anybody anything. We (not know) about the meeting if the chairman (not tell) us. 43. The passengers at the front of the plane were all killed, but Alice, who was sitting at the back, survived. If she (sit) nearer the front, she (kill). 44. A: We're penniless. Did you know that? B: It's because our holiday cost so much. If we (go) where I wanted to go, it (be) a lot cheaper. 45. She was badly hurt when the car in which she was a passenger hit another car. If she (wear) her seat belt, she (not hurt) so badly. 46. My wife and I met on a cruise. I was on it because I was recovering from an illness, and she was the ship's doctor. Just think! If I (not be) ill, and if she (not be) the doctor, we (not meet), we (not get) married, and our children (not be) born! What a thought! 47. I'm sorry you had to take a ^cab to the airport. I didn't know you needed a ride. If you (tell) nie, I (give) you a ride gladly. 48. You made a lot of unnecessary mistakes in your composition. If you (use) a dictionary to check your spelling, you (receive) a better grade. 49. A: Shh! Your father ¹⁸ taking a nap. Oh-oh. You woke him up. B: Gee, I'm sorry,

177

Mom. If I (realize) he was sleeping, I (make, not) so much noise when I came in. But how was I supposed to know? 50. Many people were not satisfied with the leader after he took office. If they (know) more about his planned economic programs, they (vote, not) for him. 51. Last night Alex ruined his sweater when he washed it. If he (read) the label, he (wash, not) it in hot water. 52. A: Ever since I broke my foot, I haven't been able to get down to the basement to wash my clothes. B: Why didn't you say something? I (come) over and (wash) them for you if you (ask) me. A: I know you (come) right away if I (call) you. I guess I just didn't want to bother you. B: Nonsense! What are good neighbours for? 53.1 didn't know the Newtons were going to bring two other people to dinner last night. If anyone else (bring) extra guests, we (have, not) enough seats at the table. 54. If television (invent) in the eighteenth century, George Washington (interview) regularly on the evening news.

II. Rephrase these sentences using an if construction.

eg You didn't tell me we had run out of bread, so I didn't buy any. If you had told me we had run out of bread I'd have bought

some.

1.1 didn't see the signal, so I didn't stop. 2.1 didn't know your number, so I didn't ring. 3. She didn't know you were in hospital, so she didn't visit you. 4. We came by bus because there were no

taxis. 5. She didn't speak to him, possibly because she was so shy. 6. We didn't visit the museum because we hadn't time. 7. We didn't listen carefully; perhaps that's why we made this mistake.

8. We got a lift, so we reached the station in time. 9. We missed the train because we were using an out-of-date timetable. 10. They were driving very quickly. That's why the accident was so terrible.

11. It was raining. That's the only reason I didn't take the children to the beach. 12. He wasn't looking where he was going. That's why he was run over. 13.1 don't like country life, perhaps because

I wasn't brought up in the country. 14.1 didn't know he was so quarrelsome. I'm sorry now that I invited him. 15. It rained all the time. Perhaps that's why he didn't enjoy his visit. 16.1 didn't

work hard at school so I didn't get a good job when I left. 17. They asked him to leave the dining-room because he wasn't

178

wearing a shirt. 18. It took us a long time to find his house because the streets were not clearly marked. 19. We didn't go by air only because we hadn't enough money. 20. The bus didn't stop because you didn't put your hand up. 21.1 didn't know how thin the ice was, so I was walking on it quite confidently. 22. The champion didn't take the fight seriously at first; perhaps that's why he didn't win it. 23. The examiner read the passage very quickly, so the candidates didn't understand it. 24. He didn't get to the top of his profession, perhaps because his wife didn't encourage him. 25. The exit doors were blocked so people couldn't escape from the burning hall.

Conditional sentences: Type 2 and Type 3 mixed

I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)

1. It was the drug, not the disease, that killed him. He still (be) alive today if he (not take) that drug. 2. This room's freezing because the fire has only just been lit. — If it (be lit) this morning, as I suggested, the room (be) warm enough to sit in now. 3. I overslept; that's why I'm half an hour late; and if my phone (not ring) at nine o'clock I might still be in bed. 4. Why are you in such a bad temper? — Because I've been waiting for 40 minutes in an icy wind. If you (wait) 40 minutes in an icy wind you (be) bad-tempered, too. 5. When the weather got bad the climbing party turned back, all except Tom and his brothers, who decided to go on. If only they (turn) back with the others they (be) alive today. 6. You are not practical. If you (be) practical you (not buy) such a useless thing. 7. She is not careful. If she (be) careful she (not get) into trouble. 8. She looks tired. If she (not work) all the time she (not look) so tired now.

П. Change the following statements into conditional sentences.

*M»

eg I'm hungry now because I didn't eat dinner. But if I'd eaten dinner, I wouldn't be hungry now.

1. The room is full of flies because you left the door open. 2. You ^are tired this morning because you didn't go to bed at a reasonable hour last night. 3. I didn't finish my report yesterday, so I can't begin a new project today. 4. Helen is sick because she didn't

179

follow the doctor's orders. 5. I'm not you, so I didn't tell him the truth. 6.1 don't know anything about plumbing, so I didn't fix the leak in the sink myself. 7.1 received a good job offer from the oil company, so I won't seriously consider taking the job with the electronics firm. 8. I'm careless, that's why I made so many mistakes. 9. She doesn't know English well enough, so she didn't help him to translate the article.

Conditional sentences: mixed types

I. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)

1. If you pass your examination we (have) a celebration. 2. What (happen) if I press this button? 3. You would play better bridge if you (not talk) so much. 4. If I had known that you couldn't eat meat I (not buy) it. 5. If you go to Paris where you (stay)? 6. If someone offered to buy you one of those rings, which you (choose)? 7. The flight may be cancelled if the fog (get) thick. 8. If you (read) the instructions carefully you wouldn't have answered the wrong question. 9. If the milkman (come), tell him to leave two pints. 10. If you were made redundant what you (do)? 11. So­meone (sit) on your glasses if you leave them there. 12. You (not have) so many accidents if you drove more slowly. 13. If you (wear) a false beard nobody would have recognized you. 14 I could repair the roof myself if I (have) a long ladder. 15. Г11 probably get lost unless he (come) with me. 16. If she (leave) the fish there the car will get it. 17. You'll get pneumonia if you (not change) your wet clothes. 18. She (be able) to walk faster if her shoes hadn't such high heels. 19.1 (bring) you some beer if I had known that you were thirsty. 20. If the story hadn't been true the newspaper (not print) it. 21.1 (not buy) things on the instalment system if I were you. 22. Dial 999 if you (want) Police, Ambulance, or Fire Brigade. 23. If anyone attacked me my dog (jump) at his throat. 24. If he were in he (answer) the phone. 25. The ship would have run aground if the pilot (make) one mistake. 26 I shouldn't have taken your umbrella if I (know) that it was 'he only one you had. 27. If I have enough apples, I (bake) an apple pie this afternoon. 28. If I had enough apples, I (bake) an apple pie this afternoon. 29. If I had had enough apples yesterday I (bake) an apple pie. 30. If the weather is nice tomorrow, we (go)

180

to'the zoo. 31. If the weather were nice today, we (go) to the zoo.

32. If the weather had been nice yesterday, we (go) to the zoo.

33. It's too bad Helen isn't here. If she (be) here, she (know) what to do. 34. Fred failed the test because he didn't study. However, if he (study) for the test, he (pass) it. 35. You should tell your father exactly what happened. If I (be) you, I (tell) him the truth as soon as possible. 36. If I (have) my camera with me yesterday, I (take) a picture of Alex standing on his head. 37. I'm almost ready to plant my garden. I have a lot of seeds. Maybe I have more than I need. If I (have) more seeds than I need, I (give) some to Nellie. 38.1 got wet because I didn't take my umbrella. However, I (get, not) wet if I (remember) to take my umbrella yesterday. 39.1 (change) the present economic policy if I (be) the President of the United States. 40. If the teacher (be) absent tomorrow, class will be cancelled. 41. That sounds like a good job offer. If I (be) you, I (accept) it. 42. I've hung out the clothes. It's lovely and sunny; if it (stay) like this they (be) dry in two hours. 43. French is essential in this job. All the telephonists speak it. If they (not know) French they (not understand) half the callers. 44. This flat would be all right if the people above us (not be) so noisy. 45. If you aren't going to live in the house why you (not sell) it? If I (have) a house I couldn't use I (sell) it at once. 46. Tell him to bring his bicycle inside. If he (leave) it outside someone (steal) it. 47. She must have loved him very much because she waited for him for fifteen years. If she (not love) him she (not wait) so long. 48. If you are catching an early train tomorrow you (like) to have breakfast at 7.00? 49. When he left school he became

a fisherman. His family didn't like it at all. They (be) much happier if he (become) a greengrocer like his father. 50. But he says that if he (have) his life again he (make) the same choice. 51. Look at poor Tom trying to start his car by hand again! If I (be) Tom I (get) a new battery. 52.1 hope you'll see Jack at the lecture tonight. If you (do), please (remind) him about tomorrow's meeting. 53. The only thing I haven't got is a balcony. If I (have) a balcony I (grow) plants in pots. Then my flat (be) perfect! 54. Be careful about the time. If you (spend) too long on the first question you (not have) enough time to do the others properly. 55. We had a lot of trouble putting the tent up. If it (not be) so windy perhaps it (not be) quite so difficult.

181

II. Complete these sentences taking care to use the correct tenses

1. If he had taken my advice... 2. If you ate less... 3. We'll send for the doctor if... 4. If she practised more... 5. If there isn't enough wine in that bottle... 6. Try on the blue one if... 7. If we leave before breakfast... 8. Her life might have been saved if... 9. Unless it is a nice day... 10. He would lend it to you if... 11. If the storm becomes worse... 12. If your uncle sees you... 13. If you tried to climb it without a guide... 14. If I'd brought my coat... 15. If you had asked his permission... 16. If you had any sense... 17. You would have been angry if... 18. I should have ordered more coal if... 19. If you leave the gate open... 20. He would have been drowned if... 21. If I'd had a car... 22. If Tom rings while I'm out... 23. If I lived in the country... 24. If you want to get to the station in time to catch the 8.10 tram... 25. If you took a course in computer programming... 26.1 could have walked more quickly if my suitcase... 27. My room would be all right if it... 28. We'll test your voice and if it is good enough... 29. Your job sounds awful. If I were you... 30. They would have paid you more if. . 31. If you don't boil the water before you drink it... 32. He expected absolute punctuality. He was furious if... 33. We could have got seats... 34. Mother to little boy: If you don't eat up your rice pudding... 35. Tom (looking at his watch): We'll have to go without Peter if... 36. She is simply terrified of rats. If she hears the rats running round your attics she... 37. He would have given her his typewriter if... 38.1 might understand your problem better if... 39.1 couldn't have fixed the bicycle if... 40. You could have gotten the job if... 41.1 might have... if I had... 42. If I could... I would... 43. If I could have... I would have... 44. She wouldn't be so tired today if... 45.1 might have helped if...

III. Using the given ideas, make conditional sentences.

eg rain last Saturday/go (somewhere)

If it hadn't been raining last Saturday, we could have gone

on a picnic.

be a magician/make all the people happy

If I were a magician, I would make all the people happy.

eat properly/run out of energy

If I don't eat properly during the day, I always run out of

energy late in the afternoon.

182

1. know the answer/tell you

2. come to my house/cook dinner

3. be a teacher/teach

4. be no fresh water/live

5. panic/die

6. listen/understand

7. make reservations/request a table for four

8. bus drivers be on strike/take a taxi

9. live in the city/raise horses

10. ten years old again/not have to (do something)

11. be a famous author/write about (something)

IV. Make sentences with if. Follow the patterns in the examples. eg If I have enough money,...

Student A: If I have enough money, I'll buy (can buy) a car. Student B: If I buy a car, I'll drive (can drive) to Florida. Student C: If I drive to Florida, I'll go (can go) to Miami. Student D: If I go to Miami, I...

eg If I had enough money,...

Student A: If I had enough money, I would buy (could buy)

a car.

Student B: If I bought a car, I would drive (could drive) to

Florida.

Student C: If I drove to Florida, I would go (could go) to Miami. Student D: If I went to Miami, I...

eg If I had had enough money...

Student A: If I had had enough money, I would have bought

(could have bought) a car. Student В: If I had bought a car, I would have driven (could

have driven) to Florida. Student C: If I had driven to Florida, I would have gone

(could have gone) to Miami. Student D: If I had gone to Miami, I...

1. If I have enough money,...

2. If I had enough money,...

3. If I had had enough money,...

4. If I have enough time,...

183

5. If I had enough time,...

6. If I had had enough time,...

7. If the weather is hot/cold tomorrow,...

8. If the weather were hot/cold,...

9. If the weather had been hot/cold yesterday,... 10. If I had a million dollars,...

V. Supply the appropriate auxiliary verb.

1.1 don't have a pen, but if I..., I would lend it to you.

I don't have a pen, but if I did, I would lend it to you. 2. He is busy right now, but if he ..., he would help us.

He is busy right now, but if he weren't, he would help us. 3.1 didn't vote in the last election, but if I..., I would

have voted for Senator Anderson. 4.1 didn't vote in the last election, but if I had, I would

have voted for Senator Anderson. 5.1 don't have enough money, but if I..., I would buy that

book.

6. The weather is cold today, but if it..., I would go swim­ming.

7. She didn't come, but if she ..., she would have met my brother.

8. I'm not a good cook, but if I..., I would make all of my

own meals.

9.1 have to go to class this afternoon, but if I..., I would go downtown with you.

10. He didn't go to a doctor, but if he ..., the cut on his hand wouldn't have gotten infected.

11. I always pay my bills. If I ... I would get in a lot of trouble.

12. Helium is lighter than air. If it..., a helium-filled bal­loon wouldn't float upward.

13.1 called my husband to tell him I would be late. If I..-, he would have gotten worried about me.

VI. Answer each question. Begin with "No, but..."

eg — Do you have a dollar?

— No, but if I did (No, but if I had a dollar), I would lend it to you.

1. Are you rich? 2. Do you have a car? 3. Are you a bird? 4. Are you in (country eg Sweden, India)? 5. Do you live in an apartment? Dormitory? Hotel? 6. Are you the teacher of this class? 7. Do you have your own airplane? 8. Are you (the President of the United States)? 9. Are you tired? 10. Are you at home right now? 11. Are you married? Single? 12. Do you speak (another language)? 13. Is the weather hot/cold today? 14. Are you hungry? 15. Do you live in (New York City)?

VII. Make an "if clause" from the given information and then supply a "result clause " using your own words

eg I wasn't late to work yesterday.

If I had been late to work yesterday, I would have missed the regular morning meeting.

Tom asked my permission before he took my bicycle. If Tom hadn't asked my permission before he took my bicycle, I would have been angry.

1.1 wasn't absent from class yesterday. 2.1 don't have enough energy today. 3. Ocean water is salty. 4. Our teacher likes his/her job. 5.1 don't know how to swim. 6. You didn't ask for my opinion. 7. It was raining yesterday. 8. He's got bad manners. 9. The coat is too expensive. 10. Mike wasn't invited to the party. 11. She is very tired. 12. He feels bad. 13. He works too hard. 14. We didn't book seats in advance. 15. This book isn't on sale. 16. She has caught a bad cold. 17. I've already seen this film. 18. She is shy.

VIII. Make a true statement about the given topic. Then make a contrary-to-fact conditional sentence about that statement.

eg yourself •=> I am twenty years old. If I were seventy

years old, I would already have lived

most of my life, ice «=> Ice doesn't sink. If the polar ice caps

sank, the level of the oceans would rise

and flood coastal cities. Topics:

1. yourself 2. a member of your family 3. a famous person 4- a member of this class 5. vegetables 6. space travel 7. your activities right now 8. your activities last night

184

185

IX. What would you do if you were...? Practise using verb forms in contrary-to-fact sentences with if.

eg — What would you do if you were a house painter? — If I were a house painter, I would (paint houses, paint your house, etc.)

1. a bird 2. a mountain climber 3. an artist 4. a secretary 5. a good cook 6. a teacher 7. a police officer 8. a parent 9. hungry 10. sleepy 11. at home 12. (name of a famous person) 13. a professional athlete 14. a photographer 15. (name of a world leader) 16. the leader of your country 17. a magician 18. an astronaut 19. ninety years old. 20. at/in (a particular place) 21. a billionaire 22. the captain of a ship 23. ambitious

X. Answer the questions in complete sentences.

1. Where would you be right now if you weren't in class? 2. What would you have done yesterday if you hadn't come to class? 3. What would you do today if you had enough time? 4. What would you have done yesterday if you had had enough time? 5. What would you buy if you had enough money? 6- What would you have bought yesterday if you had had enough money? 7. What would you do if there were a fire in this building? 8. If you had your own private plane, where would you go for dinner tonight? 9. (...) is tired today. Give him/her some advice. What would you do if you were (...)? 10. (...) wants to learn English as quickly as possible. What would you do if you were (...)?

11. Could ships sail around the world if the earth were flat?

12. What would happen if there were a nuclear war? 13. What would you do if you were the teacher of this class? 14. Tell me one thing that you did yesterday. What would have happened if you had not (done that)? 15. What would you do tonight if you didn't have to study? 16. If you could have free service for the rest of your life from a chauffeur, cook, housekeeper, or gardener, which would you choose? Why? 17. If you had to leave your country and build a new life elsewhere, where would you go? Why? 18. If you could stay one particular age for a span of 50 years, what age would you choose? Why? 19. You have promised to spend an evening with your best friend. Then you discover you have the chance to spend the evening with.....(supply the name

186

of a famous person). Your friend is not invited. What would you do? Why? 20. Assume that you have a good job. If your boss told you to do something that you think is wrong, would you do it? Why or why not? You understand that if you don't do it, you will lose your job. 21. If you had to choose among good health, a loving family, and wealth (and you could have only one of the three during the rest of your life), which would you choose? Why? 22. Under what conditions, if any, would you...

a) exceed the speed limit while driving?

b) lie to your best friend?

c) disobey an order from your boss?

d) steal food?

e) carry a friend on your back for a long distance?

f) not pay your rent?

g) (make up other conditions-for your classmates to discuss)

XI. Discuss

What would you do with two million pounds?

a) What... buy? e) ... go on a spending spree?

b) How much...give away? f) How much ... invest? Who ... give it to?

c)... go on holiday? Where... to? g) ... be happier than you

d) What about your job? ... carry are now? on working or ... give up your job?

XII. Translate from Russian into English, (self check) Type I conditionals

1. Если завтра будет сильный мороз, мы не пойдем на лыжах.

2. Интересно, придет ли он. Если он придет, он будет очень Удивлен. 3. Она будет волноваться, если ты не позвонишь ей. 4. Если я найду ее адрес, я напишу ей. 5. Они получат письмо ^в понедельник, если оно будет отослано сегодня. 6. Он с удо­вольствием придет, если его пригласят 7. Если я буду свобо­ден завтра вечером, я навещу своих родителей. 8. Если он бу-Дет работать, когда вы вернетесь, посоветуйте ему лечь спать. 9- Если он не приедет завтра, пошлите ему телеграмму. 10. Она Рассердится, если ты сделаешь это. 11. Если у тебя есть вре-

187

мя, позвони Ане. 12. Я думаю, что если ей предложат эту ра­боту, она согласится. 13. Если вы будете усердно работать, то к концу дня закончите работу. 14. Ты не станешь хорошим спортсменом, если не будешь много тренироваться. 15. Его родители будут рады, если он женится на ней. 16. Если я зав­тра получу зарплату, то я куплю себе этот костюм. 17. Если у меня есть время, я хожу на рыбалку каждую неделю. 18. Если я куплю билеты сегодня, я позвоню тебе. 19. Что ты будешь делать, если не получишь документы? 20. Если погода не из­менится, то мы завтра поедем кататься на лодке. 21. Если ав­тобус будет переполнен, они пойдут на станцию пешком. 22. Ты попадешь в беду, если не последуешь его совету. 23. Если я много работаю, то очень устаю в конце дня. 24. Я зайду к вам сегодня вечером, если вы не возражаете. 25. Если хотите, я могу спросить ее об этом. 26. Если он придет, скажите ему, что я в парикмахерской. 27. Если она не найдет номера в гос­тинице, она остановится у своих друзей. 28. Я напишу ей пись­мо, если вы пришлете мне ее адрес. 29. Что мы завтра будем делать, если будет хорошая погода ? 30. Если вы не успеете на поезд в 10.30, то есть поезд в 10.50. 31. Если у него хорошее настроение, то он всегда шутит.

Туре 2 conditionals

1. Если бы вы знали грамматику лучше, вы бы не делали столько ошибок в ваших упражнениях. 3. Если бы он сейчас был здесь, он, конечно, помог бы нам. 3. Если бы не было так поздно, я бы позвонил ей сейчас. 4. Если бы она была более терпеливой, с ней легче было бы иметь дело. 5. Я бы зашел к тебе на следующей неделе, если бы у меня было время. 6. На вашем месте я бы провел отпуск на юге. Я уве­рен, это пошло бы вам на пользу. 7. Вы бы чувствовали себя лучше, если бы проводили больше времени на свежем воз­духе. 8. Если бы ты действительно любил читать, ты бы все­гда нашел время для чтения. 9. Если бы у него сейчас были занятия, нам пришлось бы долго ждать. 10. Вы бы не опаз­дывали на занятия, если бы выходили из дому на десять ми­нут раньше. 11. Не будь он таким ленивым, он был бы одним из первых учеников класса. 12. Если бы у нас было меньше багажа, мы могли бы пойти пешком на вокзал, так как у нас

188

достаточно времени, чтобы успеть на поезд. 13. Она бы не теряла вещи так часто, если бы не была такой рассеянной. 14. На твоем месте я бы приняла это предложение. 15. Если бы вы знали его лучше, вы бы не думали о нем так плохо. 16. На вашем месте я бы отказался от этой идеи. Ее трудно осуществить. 17. Что бы вы сказали, если бы он обратился к вам за советом? 18. Если бы она сейчас же пошла в читальню, она бы еще застала там библиотекаря. 19. Если бы фильм был цветной, он бы производил большее впечатление. 20. Мне очень нравятся эти часы. Если бы они были дешевле, я бы купил их. 21. В этом тексте слишком много незнакомых слов. Если бы у меня был словарь, я бы смогла перевести его. 22. Если бы женщины не занимались домашним хозяйством, они бы сэкономили массу времени. 23. Вы бы чувствовали себя лучше, если бы не ложились спать так поздно. 24. Слиш­ком холодно. Мы бы могли пойти на каток, если бы не было так холодно. 25. Если бы не дождь, мы могли бы сейчас по­ехать за город. 26. На твоем месте я бы обратился к врачу. 27. Ей не было бы так одиноко, если бы дети были с ней сейчас.

Туре 3 conditionals

1. Если бы ты мне оставил записку, я бы зашел к тебе вчера.

2. Мы бы не опоздали на поезд, если бы взяли такси. 3. Если бы я не был так занят на прошлой неделе, я бы тоже присое­динился к вашей экскурсии. 4. Если бы он не отказался по­мочь нам, мы бы уже закончили работу. 5. Если бы ее попро­сили, она давно прислала бы эти книги. 6. Если бы вчера не было так холодно, мы, возможно, пошли бы на каток. 7. Мы, возможно, не заблудились бы, если бы ночь не была такой темной. 8. Если бы ты пришел вчера на собрание, ты бы ус­лышал интересный доклад. 9. Если бы я знал, что тебе нуж­на эта книга, я бы захватил ее с собой, 10. Я бы не сделал эту ошибку, если бы был более внимателен, когда писал диктант. П. Даже если бы ты позвонил мне вчера, я бы не смог придти. 12. Я бы не упал, если бы не было так скользко. 13. Он бы не пришел, если бы ты его не пригласил. 14. Мне потре­бовалось много времени, чтобы перевести эту статью. Если бы вы дали мне хороший словарь, я бы потратил меньше времени. 15. Я был бы очень рад, если бы вы зашли к нам

189

вчера. 16. Этого бы не случилось, если бы вы были там. 17. Если бы мне сообщили об этом раньше, я бы сделал все возможное, чтобы помочь вам. 18. Если бы вы пришли сюда между двумя и тремя часами, вы бы застали его. 19. Почему вы не позвали его? Я уверен, что он пришел бы, если бы вы его позвали. 20. Если бы я так не волновалась, я бы ответила лучше. 21. Если бы он завел будильник, он бы не проспал и успел на самолет 22. Если бы я вчера не искупалась, то я бы, возможно, не простудилась. 23. Если бы я не пропустил столь­ко занятий, я бы написал тест лучше. 24. Я бы навестила тебя вчера, если бы у меня было больше времени. 25. Если бы мы заказали билеты заранее, мы смогли бы увидеть этот захва­тывающий матч. 26. Я бы помог тебе, если бы ты обратился ко мне за помощью. 27. Если бы я не был так занят вчера, я бы поехал на вокзал проводить его. 28. Даже если бы ты предупре­дил меня заранее, я бы не смог придти, так как был очень занят.

Туре 2 and type 3 conditionals mixed

1. Если бы он занимался регулярно весь семестр, он бы сей­час не боялся экзаменов. 2. Если бы мы знали его адрес, мы бы сообщили ему о результатах экзаменов вчера. 3. Он бы не делал столько ошибок сейчас, если бы не пропустил столько ^ занятий. 4. Ты бы себя хорошо сегодня чувствовал, если бы принял вчера лекарство. 5. Вы бы лучше знали язык, если бы прочитали летом несколько английских книг. 6. Если бы мы работали вчера больше, наша работа была бы сейчас го­това. 7. Не будь он таким рассеянным, он бы не забыл свой чемодан в поезде. Он без конца теряет вещи. 8. Если бы мы послали письмо вчера, они бы получили его завтра утром. 9. Ес­ли бы мы не'шли так быстро, мы не были бы такими усталы­ми сейчас и могли бы продолжить наш путь. 10. Если бы я принес словарь с собой, я мог бы перевести этот документ сейчас. 11. Если бы я не пошел к ним вчера, мы бы ничего не знали об этом даже теперь. 12. Будь у него чувство юмора, он бы не обиделся. 13. Если бы поезд вышел вовремя, он прибыл бы в конечный пункт завтра рано утром. 14. Если бы вы выполнили все предписания врача, вы давно бы выздоро­вели и работали сейчас вместе с нами. 15. Если бы они лю­били друг друга, они бы давно поженились.

190

Mixed conditionals

1. Если бы вы были вчера на стадионе, вы бы увидели луч-щих спортсменов. 2. Если ночи будут теплые, мы будем спать _на открытом воздухе. 3. Ты бы получил большое удовольст­вие, если бы принял участие в нашей экскурсии. 4. Если бы я был на твоем месте, я бы поторопился. Если ты не поторо­пишься, ты опоздаешь на поезд. 5. Если бы его сразу отпра­вили в больницу, он бы не потерял так много крови. 6. На твоем месте я бы купил себе магнитофон. 7. Если бы вы на­помнили мне об этом вчера, я бы сегодня принес вам эти книги. 8. Если бы у меня сейчас был отпуск, я бы совершила путехиествие по Кавказу. 9. Вы бы могли съездить за город на пару дней, если бы вовремя закончили работу. Все зави­сит от вас. 10. Если бы у тебя был телефон, я бы предупре­дил тебя заранее. 11. Если завтра не будет дождя, то мы пой­дем в ботанический сад. 12. На вашем месте я бы извини­лась перед ней. 13. Если фильм тебе понравится, я тоже схожу посмотреть его. 14. Почему ты не обратилась ко мне? Я бы присмотрела за твоими детьми, если бы ты меня попросила. 15. Я бы не опоздал на поезд, если бы упаковал вещи вече­ром. 16. Будь он повнимательнее, он бы написал диктант луч­ше. 17. Вы бы лучше говорили по-английски, если бы регу­лярно занимались в лингафонном кабинете. 18. Если кофе не совсем сладкий, добавьте сахару. 19. Если бы они так много не тренировались, они бы не выиграли. 20. Я бы охотно по­казала вам город, если бы не была сейчас так занята. 21. Я по­дожду его, если его не будет дома, когда я приду. 22. Я буду очень огорчен, если они не придут. 23. Если я буду там и увижу его, я скажу ему об этом. 24. Если мне не станет луч­ше, я пойду завтра к врачу. 25. Если бы он был честным че­ловеком, он бы не сделал этого. 26. На твоем месте я бы уго­ворил ее поехать на юг. Это принесло бы ей большую поль-³У- 27. Если бы я знал его адрес, я бы немедленно написал ^ему. 28. Если бы он не был способным, он бы не справился с ^этой работой. 29. Если бы документы были подписаны, мы бы отослали их сегодня же. 30. Если у меня неприятности, я ^Всегда делюсь с сестрой. 31. Если бы ты пришел ко мне на прошлой неделе, ты бы мог повидать моего брата. Он приедет в Минск в командировку. 32. На вашем месте я бы по-

191

слала ему телеграмму. 33. Куда бы ты поехал, если бы был сейчас свободен? 34. Я бы навестил родителей в деревне, если бы не был сейчас так занят. 35. Если ты поторопишься, то ты успеешь на семичасовой поезд. 36. На моем месте вы бы сделали то же самое. 37. Если бы я знала, что приедут мои родители, я бы испекла пирог. 38. Что бы ты делал, если бы потерял деньги в незнакомом городе?

Fluency Listen, read and practise.

June: Are you doing the football pools, Brian?

Brian:Yes, I've nearly finished, June. I'm sure we shall win

something this week. June: You always say that, but we never win anything! What

will you do if you win a lot of money? Brian:If I win a lot of money I shall buy you a mink coat. June: I don't want a mink coat! I want to see the world. Brian: All right. If we win a lot of money we shall travel round

the world and we shall stay at the best hotels. Then we

shall return home and buy a big house in the country.

We shall have a beautiful garden and... June: But if we spend all that money we shall be poor again.

What shall we do then? Brian: If we spend all the money we shall try and win the

football pools again. June: It's a pleasant dream but everything depends on "if!

A. Questions

1. What is Brian doing? 2. Has Brian ever won anything on the football pools? 3. What will Brian buy his wife if he wins a lot of money? 4. She doesn't want a mink coat, does she? 5. What does June want instead of a mink coat? 6. What will Brian do if he spends all the money? 7. It's only a dream, isn't it? 8. What does it all depend on?

B. What will you do if you win a lot of money?

192

jim and his friend Anthony are going to fly to Istanbul. Jim's mother is very worried.

Mum: Oh, dear! I hope everything will be all right. You've

never been abroad before. Jim: Don't worry, Mum. I'll be OK. I can look after myself.

Anyway, I'll be with Anthony. We won't do anything

stupid.

Mum: But what will you do if you ran out of money? Jim: We'll get a job of course! Mum: Oh. What about if you get lost? Jim: Mum! If we get lost, we'll ask someone the way, but we won't get lost because we know where we're going! Mum: But how will I know that you're all right? Jim: When we get to a big city, I'll send you a postcard. Mum:Oh. But Jim, it's such a long flight to Istanbul! Jim: Mum! As soon as we arrive in Turkey, I'll give you a ring. Mum:I'll be worried until I hear from you. Jim: I'll be OK, Mum. Honest!

A. Questions

1. Where are Jim and his friend flying? 2. Have they ever been abroad before? 3. Is Jim's mother worried? 4. What will the boys do if they run out of money? 5. What will they do if they get

lost? 6. What will Jim do as soon as he arrives in Turkey?

-*,

B. Roleplay the conversation and make up a similar conversation.

C. Complete the following conversation. Putif, when, or as soon

as into each gap. Put the verbs into the correct tenses.

Joe is saying goodbye to his wife Sue, who is going for a job interview.

Joe: Goodbye, darling! Good luck with the interview! Sue: Thanks. I'll need it. I hope the trains are running on

time._______the trains (be) delayed, I (get) a taxi.

______I (be) late for the interview, I (be) furious with

myself!

Joe: Just keep calm! Phone me when you can.

⁷3ак ню 193

Sue: I will.______I (come) out of the interview, I (give)

you a ring.

Joe: When you (know)______you've got the job?

Sue: They (send) me a letter in the next few days._____

they (offer) me the job, I (accept) it, and ^~f

accept it, we (have to) move house. You know that, don't

you?

Joe: Sure. But we'll worry about that later. Sue: OK. What are you doing today? Joe: I can't remember._______I (get) to the office, I (look)

in my diary. I don't think I'm doing much today. Sue: Don't forget to pick up the children________you (get)

back from work. Joe: I won't. You'd better go now.______you (not hurry),

you (miss) the train. Sue: OK. I (see) you this evening. Bye. Joe: Bye, my love. Take care, and good luck!

In pairs, ask and answer questions about Joe and Sue's conversation.

eg What/Sue/do/if/trains/ delayed?

— What will Sue do if the trains are delayed?

— She'll get a taxi.

a. How/she/feel/if/late for the interview?

b. When/Sue/phone/Joe?

c. When/know/if/she's got the job? 0

d. What/she/do/if/they/offer her the job?

e. What/they/have to do/if/she/accept/job?

f. What/Joe/do/when/get/office?

g. What/happen/if/Sue/not hurry?

Good evening. This is London Radio. Welcome to "Man in the Street."

Our programme tonight is about North Sea oil. Oil was first discovered beneath the North Sea in the late 1960s. Since then more and more oil has been found off the coasts of Britain and is being brought ashore. We aren't going to become very rich, but

194

we must decide how to spend the oil revenues. Our interviewer went into the streets to ask people their opinion. He asked: "If you were the Prime Minister what would you do with the money?" "Well of course. I'm not the Prime Minister, but if I were I'd spend the money on more hospitals and schools. We need more doctors, nurses and teachers. Classes are too big. If classes were smaller, children would learn more. And there aren't enough nurses either, because salaries are too low. If the salaries were higher more people would become nurses. Money which is spent on education and health is an investment for the future."

" I think the answer is quite simple. Taxes are too high in this country, aren't they? I would reduce them. If we reduced taxis, people would have more money. If they had more money, they'd spend more. Industry would have to produce more, so it would need more workers. There would be more jobs, and we would all be richer."

"I'm very worried about inflation. I'd try to control prices. If I were the Prime Minister I'd reduce the price of gas, coal and electricity. If we did that, everybody would benefit, wouldn't they? Food is much too expensive. I'd encourage the farmers to produce more food, more cheaply. However there are some things that I certainly wouldn't do: I certainly wouldn't build more roads, and I wouldn't spend money on guns and tanks and warplanes."

"There's too much crime and violence nowadays. There aren't enough policemen on the streets. I'd increase the size of the police force, and I'd increase their salaries. If we had more policemen, we'd all feel safer. I'd also increase old age pensions. I've worked hard all my life and I should have a reasonable standard of living." A. Questions

1. What radio programme is this? 2. What is tonight's programme about? 3.When was oil discovered beneath the North Sea? 4. What question did the interviewer ask the people in the streets? 5. What did the first/second/third/fourth speaker say? "• Now advise these people using the second conditional. eg — I've got a headache.

— If I were you, I'd take an aspirin, see a doctor, have a rest, go for a walk, etc.

195

1 . 1 can't sleep at night. 2. I've been bitten by a snake. 3. I've lost my passport. 4. 1 want to win an Olympic medal. 5. I've cut myself. 6. I've just seen an accident. 7. 1 need some money and the banks are shut. 8. I want to stop smoking. 9. I want to be a millionaire. 10. I've been robbed. 11. 1 want to buy a pet. 12. I want to buy a car.

Mikis: I think the theatres here are excellent. If I lived in London, I'd probably go to the theatre every week.

AH: Yes, I agree. I've already seen four or five plays. On Saturday I'm going to see "When We Are Married" at the National Theatre.

Mikis: Oh, are you? Have you booked a seat?

AH: No, not yet.

Mikis: Well, if I were you, I'd book immediately. It's a very popular play. What a pity I won't be here! I've already arranged to* go to Bristol. If I were staying in London, I'd go with you.

A. Questions

1 . What does Mikis think of the London theatres? 2. How often would he go to the theatre if he lived in London? 3. How many plays has AH seen? 4. What play is he going to see on Saturday? 5. Has he booked a seat? 6. What does Mikis advise him to do? What are his exact words? 7. Why can't Mikis go to the theatre together with AH?

B. What would you do if you were free tomorrow?

Barbara: If I had three weeks' holiday in August, I'd fly to Los Angeles. I've never been to America.

Steve: Why Los Angeles, and why August? You'd see more if you flew to New York and went on the bus. And you'd save money if you travelled in the low season, say, May or September. October is even cheaper. If you went then, you would save even more. The return

196

fare to New York on British Airways or Pan Am is less than £200 in October. Barbara: Oh, really? Perhaps I can go then instead!

A. Questions

1 . Where would Barbara like to go if she had a holiday in August? 2. What does Steve advise her to do? What are his exact words? 3.What is the return fare to New York in October?

B. What would you do in the following situations?

Suppose someone steals your wallet. If someone stole my wallet, I'd report it to the police. Suppose

1 . someone steals your travellers cheques, (bank/police )

2. you lose your passport, (consulate/police)

3. you find a wallet full of money on a bus. (bus company/ bus conductor)

4. you lose your air ticket, (air company)

5. someone steals your luggage at the airport, (airport police)

6. you leave your handbag/briefcase in a taxi, (taxi company)

C. If, beginning tomorrow, you had a two-week holiday and unlimited funds, what would you do? Why?

Radio Reporter: Good morning! I'm Jane Taylor with WELT radio. I'm interviewing people on the street this mor­ning, asking the question: "What would you do if you won ten million dollars in the lottery?" Let's start with this person here. Excuse me, what's your name?

Linda: Linda.

Reporter: Linda, what would you do if you won ten million dollars?

Linda: Ten million dollars? Well, first I'd pay for my bro­ther's college education, and then I'd buy a nice house for my parents, and I'd probably give the rest to charity.

197

Reporter: OK. Thank you. And you, sir, what's your name⁹

Robert: My name's Robert.

Reporter: Well, Robert, what would you do if you won ten million dollars?

Robert: Hmmm..., I think I'd use the money to start my own business. I've always wanted to do that.

Reporter: Oh? What kind of business?

Robert: I'd start my own recording company.

Reporter: That sounds interesting, thanks! And you, sir, could I have your name please?

Scott: Scott.

Reporter: Scott, what would you do if you won ten million dol­lars?

Scott: Well, first I'd pay off all my credit cards. Then I'd buy a very cool wardrobe, and then... I'd buy ajet... and learn to fly it.

A. Questions

1. What question does the radio reporter ask? 2. What would Linda do if she won ten million dollars? 3. What would Robert do with the money? 4. And what about Scott?

B. What would you do if you won a lot of money? Why?

Brian: You know I really should give up smoking. I'm up to

two packs a day. Peter: Yeah. If I gave up smoking, I could save about $100 a

month. Brian: The trouble is, though, if I stop smoking, I'll probably

gain weight. Peter: Uh-huh. And if I stop, I might start chewing my nails

again. Brian: Mmm. Well, I guess I'd only stop smoking if they

passed a law banning cigarettes. Peter: Me too. Got a match?

A. Complete the clauses in column A with information in column B. Then compare with a partner and practise them.

198

a)If they banned smoking ... the streets will be a lot on all planes, cleaner.

b) If people used their cars ... some people would travel only on weekends, by train.

c) If they build a good ... they would probably be a subway system, lot healthier.

d) If people ate less meat, ... there would be less pollu-

tion in cities.

e) If the city passes a law ... more people might get rid against keeping dogs as pets, of their cars.

Pair work. Now take turns and complete the clauses in column A with your own information.

Jane: I just got a postcard from a friend who lost all her money

on vacation in Europe. Isn't that terrible? Burt: Yeah, that's horrible! Kate: Jane, what would you do if you were on vacation

overseas and lost all your money and credit cards? Jane: Well, I'd probably phone my parents and ask them

to send some money right away. How about you, Burt? Burt: Yeah, I'd probably do the same thing... although maybe

I'd try going to the American Express Office to see if I

could get a loan or something. What about you, Kate? Kate: Well, I guess I'd probably sell my watch and camera...

or I might get a job as a waitress somewhere till I made

enough money to buy a plane ticket.

A. Group work.

What would you do in the situations below?

A: What would you do if...?

B: I think I'd...

C: I'm not sure, but I might...

— you found a valuable piece of jewelry on a park bench

— you won a lot of money in a lottery

— a friend borrowed money from you and didn't re- turn it

— you were on vacation overseas and lost all your mo-

ney and credit cards

— you saw two people fighting on the street

— you discovered your friend had a drinking problem

— someone stole your clothes on the beach while you were swimming

Lynn: What are you going to do during class break?

Tony: I hope to go camping with Pierre. We want to go to the

Grand Canyon. How about you? Lynn: I plan to buy a car and drive to Los Angeles. Tony: What's in Los Angeles? Lynn: I have a friend there. Tony: L. A. is a long way. If I were you, I'd fly. You can fly

safely and cheaply these days. And you can always rent

a car in L. A. Lynn: No. I want to drive. Say, would you come with me ifl

paid for the gas and everything? You could go camping

some other time.

Tony: No. I really want to see the Grand Canyon, and I've already bought a new backpack. Besides, what would I tell Pierre if I went with you? Lynn: What do you mean?

Tony: Well, going camping was his idea, and he lent me the money for the backpack.

A. Match the two parts of each sentence.

1. Tony hopes to a. buy a car.

2. Tony wants to b. visit a friend in Los

Angeles.

3. Lynn plans to c. go camping with Pierre.

4. Lynn doesn't want to d. fly to Los Angeles.

5. She wants to e. see the Grand Canyon.

6. She plans to f. drive.

B. Tony is reading a letter from his sister.

Dear Tony,

Mom told me you are planning to go to the Grand Canyon with

your friend Pierre. The Grand Canyon is an incredible place. It's

really beautiful. I went there when I was in the U.S. However, if I were you, I'd go in the summer. I wouldn't go in the winter. The Grand Canyon is very cold in the winter, and I don't think you'd enjoy yourself if you went then Also, if it snowed, you wouldn't be able to walk around and see things very well.

Ifl were you, I'd go someplace warm. In fact, I'd think about going to California. Maybe one of the other students would drive if you offered to pay for the gas. Maybe Pierre would go too if you asked him. I mean, if you told him you'd go to the Grand Canyon next summer, he'd probably go to California with you during your class break. Wouldn't you like all of that sunny weather and the beaches? I know I would!

Let me know what you decide.

Love, Paula

C. Questions

1. Would Paula go to the Grand Canyon if she were Tony? 2. Would Tony enjoy himself if he went to the Grand Canyon in winter? 3. Would he be able to walk around easily and see things well if it snowed?

D. Ask for and give advice. Complete the conversations with should and would ('d) or would not (wouldn't).

eg A: Should I fly or drive?

B: Well, if I were you, I'd fly. I wouldn't drive. Besides, you can fly quickly and cheaply.

1. A:______I buy a new car or fix my old one?

В:____.___. Besides, your old one is in pretty good condi­tion.

2. A:______I study or go to the movies?

B:_____._____. Besides, you want to pass the test,

don't you?

3. A:______I rent or buy?

B:______._______. Besides, you don't have a lot of

money right now.

4. A:_____I take bookkeeping or learn how to use a

computer? _f B:_____._____. Besides, there are a lot of jobs for

200

201

people with computer experience.

5. A:____I make a cake or buy a pie?

B:____.____. Besides, it's easier to buy a pie than to ma­ke a cake.

Arthur's secretary has told him she would like to see him about something personal. She has just come into his office.

Arthur: Sit down, Miss Bradley. It's something personal, you say? Miss Bradley: Yes. You see, I'm going to get married next

month and...

Arthur: Get married? I didn't know that. Congratulations!

Miss Bradley: Thank you, but I'm afraid it means I've got to give in my notice. I'd like to leave at the end of the month. Arthur: Really? I'm very sorry to hear that. Do you

intend to stop working altogether, then? Miss Bradley: Oh, no! My fiance and I want to save up

enough for a house and we wouldn't be able to do that if I stopped working right away. And it isn't that I don't like my job here, either. I'd stay if Terry, that's my fiance, weren't a Cana­dian. Arthur: A Canadian? I'm sorry, I don't understand.

What's that got to do with it? Miss Bradley: Well, we're both going to live in Canada as

soon as we get married. Arthur: Oh, I see. What does your fiance do for a

living, by the way?

Miss Bradley: He's an engineer. He often says he'd earn far more if he were back in Canada. That's why he wants to go back.

Arthur: But engineers are quite well paid here in England.

How much does he earn here, then, if I may ask? Miss Bradley: £120 a week. Arthur: Is that all? That's very poor for a qualified

202

engineer. You ought to tell him he'd get far more if he came and worked for us.

Miss Bradley: Well .er... you see...

Arthur: I mean. I'm sure that if I were a young engineer

and if my salary were low, I'd want to go to Canada, too. Where does he work, by the way?

Miss Bradley: Er... as a matter of fact, he works here in your factory, Mr Tigers. He's in your motor-design department.

д. Questions

1. Why did Miss Bradley decide to give in her notice? 2. Is she going to stop working altogether? 3. Where does her fiance come from? 4. How much does he earn? 5. Why does he want to go back to Canada? 6. What does Arthur say Miss Bradley ought to tell her fiance? 7. Where does he work?

B. Complete the sentences from the conversation.

1. We wouldn't be able to do that if I... 2. He often says... 3. You ought to tell him... 4. I'm sure that if I were a young man and my salary...

C. Without looking at the text, see if you can remember how these phrases were used. Then try to make other sentences of your own with the same words.

a) I'm afraid it means d) for a living

b) my notice e) by the way

c) It isn't that I... f) as a matter of fact

D. Give advice to the following people. Use: "IfI were you, I'd..."

eg A student who doesn't work very hard. Advice: If I were you, I'd work a bit harder.

1. A woman who always goes to bed very late. 2. A friend who smokes more than 50 cigarettes a day. 3. A man who is very thin and unhealthy. 4. A friend with a bicycle that often goes ^Wrong. 5. A man who is very unhappy in his job. 6. Someone with very bad toothache. 7. A friend who has just bought a new ^Car and the car has just broken down. 8. A man who wants a job to Sweden, but can't speak Swedish.

203

E. Situation:

A friend of yours has written to you recently to ask your advice about a problem. The problem is that the friend wants to brush up his (or her) English, but doesn't know whether to go to a school in England for an intensive course or to go to evening classes in his (or her) home town. Write a letter advising the friend what you would do.

David Renton was forty-nine years old. He had worked at the bank for thirty years, and as he stood behind the counter, serving a queue of impatient customers, he thought to himself, "Surely there must be a better way of spending one's time than this."

Outside it was a beautiful spring day. The sky was blue, the birds were singing, the trees were in bud.

That evening David surprised his wife by bringing her a big bunch of daffodils.

"My goodness," she said, "what are these for?"

"How would you like to live in the country?" he asked.

"In the country?"

"How would you feel if I gave up my job?"

"But your pension... you'd lose your pension."

"No, there's an early retirement scheme — I could draw a reduced pension," he said.

"But we couldn't live on that. You'd have to get another job. What could you do?"

"A smallholding," he said, "I'd get a smallholding and grow vegetables."

A. Questions

1. What was David doing, when the idea came into his head? 2. What state were the trees in? 3. How did David surprise his wife? 4. Why do you think he did this? 5. What was his wife's immediate reaction to his suggestion that he should give up his job? 6. How did he reply to this objection? 7. What does David intend to do?

B. David Renton put this question to his wife:

How would you feel, if I gave up my job at the bank?

204

He could have asked her similar questions. What were they? The notes will help you.

1 .How/you/feel/leave/bank

2. What/you/say/change/job

3. How/you/feel/buy/smallholding

4. How/the children/feel/we/go/to live/country

Similarly his wife might have said to him:

1. How/we/live/give up/your job

2. How/you/find/job/we/leave/city

3. Where/we/live/sell/house

4. What/children/do/we/go/away

C. David and his wife were discussing his plan to buy a small­holding. What were the questions she asked? His replies will help you.

l.What...?

I'd concentrate on lettuces, cauliflowers and beans. 2. What animals ... keep?

Pigs, probably. 3.... fruit?

Yes, soft fruits like strawberries, raspberries and gooseberries. 4. How ... produce to market?

I'd get myself a small van. 5.... the bank lend...?

Yes, I'm sure I could borrow a little money from the bank,

if I wanted to. 6.... have to work...?

Yes, I would at first, but later 1 could get some help. 7. Where ... buy the smallholding?

Near some nice little village, in the country.

Why Don't У-ои Statt Smoking?

Harry: You know, Nora, that's the second time breakfast has been late this week. If I don't get my breakfast on time I arrive at work late.

Nora: You're awfully bad-tempered these days, Harry. It must be because you've given up smoking.

205

Harry: Nonsense. Anyhow, who says I'm bad-tempered? Nora: You're never really happy unless you have a cigarette

or a pipe in your mouth. Why don't you start smoking?

I would if I were you. Harry: Certainly not. If I say I'm going to give something

up, I give it up. Nora: Oh, Harry, if only you would smoke again, I'm sure

we should have fewer black looks about the house. Harry: No, Nora. If I start smoking, I shall start that silly

irritating cough again. Good heavens, if that fellow

Smith can give it up, I hope I can. Nora: I see. You just want to show how strong-minded

you are. Well, I guarantee that if you had a packet

of cigarettes in your pocket now you would very

soon find yourself lighting one. Harry: Not at all. Even if I had a hundred cigarettes in every

pocket I still shouldn't give way to temptation. Now,

Nora, if I don't go I shall miss my bus. Nora: Shall I see you at six? Harry: Yes, if I'm not kept at work. Nora: If you pass a stationer's, buy me some envelopes,

will you? Harry: Right. Goodbye, Nora.

(Sound of a match being struck) Nora: Er — Harry, what's that in your mouth? Harry: Good heavens, it's a cigarette. I must have lit it

without thinking. Why, Nora, you put that ciga­rette on the table in front of me. Nora (laughing): Yes, Harry, I can't have you being too

strong-minded.

Note: We do not normally use wouldn’t the /part of the sentence:

eg — Ann wouldn't give me any money if I asked her.

— If I found $100 in the street I would keep it.

Sometimes it is possible to say if... would, especially when you ask someone to do something in a formal way:

— I would be very grateful if you would send me your bro­chure and price list as soon as possible, (from a formal letter)

— "Shall I close the door?" "Yes, please, if you would."

— Oh, Harry, if only you would smoke again, I'm sure we should have fewer black looks about the house.

Д. Questions

1. Why is Harry so bad-tempered these days? 2. Harry is determined to give up smoking, isn't he? 3. Why doesn't Nora approve of Harry's giving up smoking? 4. How does she tempt him to start smoking again?

B. Put the verbs into the correct forms.

1. Now, Nora, if I (not go) I (miss) my bus. 2. Why don't you start smoking? I... if I (be) you. 3. Well, I guarantee that if you (have) a packet of cigarettes in your pocket now you very soon (find) yourself lighting one. 4. If I (not get) my breakfast on time I (arrive) at work late. 5. If you (pass) a stationer's, buy me some envelopes. 6. If I (say) I'm going to give something up, I (give up) it. 7. Even if I (have) a hundred cigarettes in every pocket I still (not give) way to temptation. 8. Shall I see you at six? — Yes, if I (not keep) at work.

9. You (be) never really happy unless you (have) a cigarette or a pipe in your mouth. 10. Oh, Harry, if only you (smoke) again, I'm sure we (have) fewer black looks about the house. 11. If I (start) smoking, I (start) that silly irritating cough again.

C. Give the appropriate English phrases for the following.

1. Если я начну курить, у меня опять начнется этот ужасный кашель. 2. Ты просто хочешь показать свою решительность. 3. Почему ты не начнешь опять курить? На твоем месте я бы сделала это. 4. У тебя скверное настроение в эти дни. 5. Второй раз на этой неделе завтрак запоздал. 6. Я, должно быть, зажег ее, не подумав. 7. Если будешь проходить мимо магазина кан­целярских принадлежностей, пожалуйста, купи мне несколько конвертов. 8. Увидимся в шесть? — Да, если меня не задержат на работе. 9. Если я сейчас не уйду, я опоздаю на автобус.

10. Наверно, это потому что ты бросил курить. 11. Чепуха! 12. Конечно нет 13. Даже если бы у меня была сотня сигарет в каждом кармане, я бы устоял против искушения. 14. Боже мой! О. Give a brief account of the conversation.

E. Roleplay the conversation.

Jenny: Nick, catch the ball! Oh no, look what you've done.

You've broken the lamp. Nick: If you hadn't thrown the ball so high, I wouldn't

have knocked it off the table. It wasn't really my

fault. Jenny: Well, whose fault was it? If you had looked, you

would have seen. Nick: It's too late now. We may be able to stick it together.

Then Mum might not notice. Jenny: It's too risky. She might want to use it. Why don't

we just tell her what happened? Nick: And get my pocket money stopped again? Not likely!

Where's the glue?

A. Complete the sentences with the words in brackets.

Ben: Will you lend me your bike? I have to get to basket­ball training in five minutes.

Nick: The last time I lent it to you, you got a flat tyre and didn't repair it.

Ben: Well, I (not get) a flat tyre if you (put) enough air in it.

Nick: That's not true. You rode straight over some broken glass.

Ben: Well, I (not ride) over the glass if someone (not leave) it all over the road. Besides, I (go) round the glass, if a car (not come) from the other direction.

Nick: Well, you could have stopped.

Ben: I (stop) if the brakes (not fail).

Nick: Well, you should have checked the brakes before you started. I (not lend) you my bike if I (know) that the brakes weren't working.

Bob: What was wrong with you this morning? Debbie: Wrong with me? Sorry, Bob, I don't know what you

mean. Bob: You walked straight past me. You didn't say a word¹

208

Debbie: Really? Where?

Bob: It was just outside the newsagent's in the High Street.

Debbie: I'm terribly sorry, Bob. I just didn't see you.

Bob: Come on, Debbie. You must have done! I was waving!

Debbie: No, honestly. I didn't see you. If I had seen you, I

would have said "Hello".

Exercise 1

She didn't see him. She didn't say "Hello". If she had seen him, she would have 'said "Hello". Do the same.

1. She didn't notice him. She didn't stop. 2. She didn't recognize him. She didn't speak to him. 3. She didn't see him waving. She didn't wave back.

Mrs Lewis: Debbie, have you sent that telex to Geneva?

Debbie: No, I haven't.

Mrs Lewis: Why haven't you done it? It's urgent.

Debbie: Because you didn't ask me to do it.

Mrs Lewis: Didn't I?

Debbie: No, you didn't. If you'd asked me, I'd've sent it!

Exercise 2

Have you sent the telex? If you'd asked me, I would have sent it. Do the same.

1. Have you posted the letters? 2. Have you photo-copied the report? 3. Have you typed the contract?

Gordon: Did you see a letter from Brazil on this desk?

Debbie: Yes, it's here.

Gordon: Oh, good. Where's the envelope?

Debbie: I threw it away. Why?

Gordon: It had some nice stamps on it. I wanted them for my

son. He collects stamps, bebbie: Oh, Gordon! If only I'd known! Gordon: It doesn't matter. Debbie: No, I'd have kept it if I'd known.

209

Exercise 3

I didn't keep it.

I'd have kept it if I'd known.

Do the same.

I.I didn't do it. 2.1 didn't give it to you. 3.1 didn't put it in the drawer.

Debbie: What's the matter, Jefi? You don't look very well. Jeff: No. I've had a terrible cold. I've been in bed all week­end, but it's better today. Debbie: Mm... I had a bad cold last week. Jeff: I know, and you gave itto everyone in the office. I wouldn't have come to work if I'd had a cold like that.

Exercise 4

She had a bad cold, but she came to work.

I wouldn't have come to work if I'd had a cold.

Do the same.

1. She had a headache. She stayed at work.

2. He had a sore throat. He worked all day.

3. She had toothache. She didn't go to the dentist.

Mrs Lewis: Debbie.

Debbie: Yes?

Mrs Lewis: Did you type this letter?

Debbie: Yes. Why? Is there something wrong with it?

Mrs Lewis: Have a look. This should be £400.000. You've

typed £40.000.

Debbie: Oh, yes. I'm ever so sorry. Mrs Lewis: And you've also misspelt the customer's

name. It should be "Swelling" not "Smelling".

Debbie: Hee-hee!

Mrs Lewis: It's not funny, Debbie. If I hadn't noticed it, we could have lost the order.

Exercise 5

She noticed the error. They didn't lose the order.

If she hadn't noticed the error, they could have lost the order. Do the same.

1. She noticed the spelling mistake. They didn't upset the customer.

2. She saw it in time. They didn't send the letter.

3. She checked the letter. They didn't post it.

Ruth: Hi, Debbie. Did you have a good day, today? Debbie: No, I didn't. I'm glad today's over! Everything went

wrong!

Ruth: Really? Debbie: Yes, I made a lot of typing errors, then I forgot to send

a telex and I offended Bob because I ignored him in

the street. Ruth: Why was that? Debbie: It was that party last night. If I hadn't gone to bed

late, it wouldn't have been such an awful day. I'm

having an early night tonight! Exercise 6

I went to a party./1 went to bed late./1 forgot to set the alarm./ I got up late./1 missed the bus./1 was late for work./ I've had a bad day./1 forgot to send a telex./1 made a typing error.

If I hadn't gone to a party, I wouldn't have gone to bed late.

Make eight sentences.

Jenny has asked people if they are influenced by advertising. Here are some of the answers.

Bill: No, I don't think so. I bought this watch last week. I had seen a commercial for it on TV, but it's a good, reliable watch, I would have bought it even if I hadn't seen the commercial.

Rob: Yes, I'm sure that I am. Yesterday I bought these trainers. If I hadn't read about them, I would have chosen a chea­per pair. I wouldn't have paid so much money if the ad hadn't influenced me.

Pat: I think everybody is influenced by advertising. Last week

211

I bought a new shampoo. If I hadn't seen a magazine ad for the product I wouldn't have tried it. Ann: No. I buy whatever is the cheapest. But it's not always a good idea. Last week I bought a cheap red jumper and the colour came out. If I had bought a better jumper, it would have kept its colour.

A. What did they say? Read the sentences and say if they are true or false. Correct the false statements.

eg Bill wouldn't have bought the watch if he hadn't seen a commercial on TV. False. He would have bought the watch anyway.

1. Rob would have bought a cheaper pair of trainers if he hadn't read an ad for the expensive pair.

2. Pat would have tried the new shampoo, even if she hadn't read about it.

3. Ann's juniper would have lost its colour, even if she had paid more.

4. Rob would have bought the expensive trainers anyway.

5. Bill would have bought the watch even if he hadn't seen the commercial.

6. Rob would have paid more money if he hadn't seen the ad.

B. Think of the commercials you have seen and the things you have bought recently. Think of something you bought because you had seen a commercial on TV or an advertisement т а magazine.

If you hadn't seen the products advertised, would you have bought them anyway?

Readers' Letters

Last week we invited readers to write and tell us about things that had happened to them, or things that they had heard about We wanted stories where people just didn't know what to do next Here are the stories that interested us most!

212

I was in a small country pub. I had just sat down with a pint of beer. Suddenly this huge man — he looked like a boxer — came over, picked up my beer, drank it, banged the glass down on the table, stared at me, and then walked away without saying anything. I suppose I should have said something, but I was scared stiff! I didn't know what to do! What would you have done?

Mr Watney

I was on a touring holiday in France. It was a very hot day and I stopped at a small deserted beach. I hadn't got my swimming-costume with me, but it was early in the morning and there were no people or houses in sight. So I took off all my clothes and swam out to sea. I'm a very strong swimmer. I lay on my back, closed my eyes, and relaxed in the water. When I looked back at the beach, a coach had arrived and there were thirty or forty people sitting on the sand having a picnic! What would you have done? Mr Horniman

'

I was told a lovely story about the Bishop of Fleetwood. He'd gone to New York for a church conference. Anyway, when he stepped off the plane there were a lot of journalists and cameramen. The first question one of the journalists asked was "Do you intend to visit any nightclubs in New York?" Well, the Bishop was 85 years old. "Are there any nightclubs in New York?" he answered innocently. The next morning the headline in one of the New York papers was "Bishop's first question on arrival in New York — Are there any nightclubs?" How would you have felt?

Mr Lee

. Say what you would have done if these things had happened to you.

eg Claire saw a man steal something in a shop. She told a shop assistant what she had seen.

213

If I had seen someone steal something, I would have done the same thing.

or

If I had seen someone steal something, I would not have said anything.

1. Jim saw a car accident. He didn't help immediately, but ran into a shop to telephone an ambulance.

2. Mike heard a friend tell a lie. He didn't say anything. Later he asked the friend why he had lied.

3. Susan found a purse in the street. There was only a little mo­ney in it and no important papers or cards. There was no one in the street. She kept the money.

4. A stranger asked Pat for some money in the street. The stran­ger said he had to go somewhere urgently by taxi and had forgotten his wallet. Pat gave him the money and her tele­phone number.

5. A TV reporter was asking passers-by their opinion about TV programmes. David wanted to be on television, so he com­bed his hair and went up to the reporter.

B. What would you say in these situations using the third conditional?

1. You have made some soup for supper. Your brother comes back with three friends. He didn't tell you he was going to do this and you don't have enough soup for everyone. What do you say to your brother?

2. You were in the shower when the telephone rang so you didn't answer it. Your mother told you later that it was her on the phone and wondered why you hadn't answered it. What do you say to her?

3. A friend has just reminded you that there is a party on Satu­rday night. You nearly forgot about it. What do you say to your friend?

4. A friend is upset because when you visited his home town last week you didn't visit him. Unfortunately, you didn t have time. What do you say to him?

5. Your younger sister took a photo of her best friend but unfor tunately she stood too close so the photo wasn't very good What do you say to her?

214

6. A company offered you a job but the salary was very low. You didn't take the job. Your father wonders why. What do you say to him?

James wrote a play for television about an immigrant family who came to England from Pakistan, and the problems they had settling down in England. The play was surprisingly successful, and it was bought by an American TV company.

James was invited to go to New York to help with the production. He lived in Dulwich, which is an hour's journey away from Heathrow. The plane was due to leave at 8.30 a.m., so he had to be at the airport about 7.30 in the morning. He ordered a mini-cab for 6.30, set his alarm for 5.45, and went to sleep. Unfortunately he forgot to wind the clock, and it stopped shortly after midnight. Also the driver of the mini-cab had to work very late that night and overslept.

James woke with that awful feeling that something was wrong. He looked at his alarm clock. It stood there silently, with the hands pointing to ten past twelve. He turned on the radio and discovered that it was, in fact, ten to nine. He swore quietly and switched on the electric kettle.

He was just pouring the boiling water into the teapot when the nine o'clock pips sounded on the radio. The announcer began to read the news... "reports are coming in of a crash near Heathrow Airport. A Boeing 707 bound for New York crashed shortly after taking off this morning. Flight number 2234..." James turned pale. "My flight," he said out loud. "If I hadn't overslept, I'd have been on that plane."

A. Questions

1. What was James's play about? 2. Did everyone expect it to be terribly successful? 3. Who bought it? 4. So what did they invite him to do? 5. Why didn't he wake up at 5.45? 6. Why did his alarm clock stop? 7. How did he discover what the time was? 8- What did he do when he found it was ten to nine? 9. What was the first item on the news? 10. Why did James turn pale?

*•• Look carefully at these third conditional situations arising from he story. Fill in the gaps with would have or wouldn't have.

215

1. If James hadn't written the play, the Americans... bought it

2. If the Americans hadn't bought it, they... invited him to go to New York.

3. If they hadn't invited him to go to New York, he... booked a flight.

4. If he hadn't booked such an early flight, he...had to get up so early.

5. If he hadn't had to get up so early, he... needed to set the

alarm.

6. If he hadn't forgotten to set the alarm, it... gone off.

7. If the mini-cab driver hadn't overslept, he... taken James to the airport.

8. If the mini-cab had taken James to the airport, he... chec­ked in on time.

9. If he'd checked in on time, he... been on that plane. 10. If he'd been on the plane, he ... been killed.

C. Look at this conversation:

"I wouldn't have made it like that." How...? "How would you have made it?"

Reply to the following remarks with a third conditional question.

1.1 wouldn't have typed it like that. How...?

2. You shouldn't have bought it there. Where...?

3. That was a silly thing to do. What...?

4.1 wouldn't have paid as much as that.

How much...? 5.1 wouldn't have told her about it.

Why...? 6. That was a stupid thing to say.

What...? 7.1 wouldn't have gone there.

Where...? 8.1 think you were silly to go by train.

How...? 9.1 wouldn't have gone there on a Sunday.

216

When...? 10. I'd have bought it at Harrods.

Why...?

Tom: I was in love with a girl called Gloria. Eventually I asked her to marry me, but she refused. I was very upset and felt I needed a change so I decided to go abroad for a short holiday. I chose Luzern as I had friends there.

One day I went for a trip on the lake in a little pleasure boat. I was sitting on the deck, when a dark, pretty girl took the seat next to mine. I got into conversation with her, and she told me that she was Spanish, and that she was visiting Switzerland as the companion to an elderly lady from Argentina. She told me that she intended to come to England to learn English, so we exchanged addresses. Her name was Isabel.

When I got home, I wrote to Isabel. She replied, and I found her an au pair job with an English family, not far from where I live, in Surrey. After I'd asked her several times, she agreed to go out with me. Three weeks ago we got married.

A. Note this pat tern:

I was in love with Gloria/I asked her to marry me

If I hadn't been in love with Gloria, I wouldn't have asked

her to marry me.

Use the ideas below to make more sentences:

1. Gloria refused to marry теЯ was upset

2.1 was upset/I decided to go abroad for a holiday

3.1 have friends in Luzern/I chose to go there

4.1 was in Luzern/I decided to go for a trip on the laloe

5.1 decided to go for a trip on the lake/I met Isabel

6. The old lady from Argentina wanted to go to Switzerland/ Isabel went there

7. We met on the boat/She gave me her address

8. She gave me her address/I wrote to her

9. She wrote to теЯ found her the au pair job

10.1 found her the au pair job/She came to England

217

11.1 asked her several times to come out with me/She carne

out with me 12. She came out with me/We got married

B. Situation'

A month ago, you went out without an umbrella, got wet caught a cold, fell ill and lost your job. A week later you found a much better job. How many sentences can you make from this story beginning, "If I hadn't..., ..."? Can you think of a similar story yourself?

Harry: We shall be awfully late home if that No 12 bus doesn't come soon...

Let's stand in this doorway out of the wind. Nora: All right, but we must be careful not to miss the

bus... How did you enjoy the film? Harry: I'd never have gone if I had known it was going to

be so silly.

Nora: Why, what was silly about it? Harry: Well, no sane man would have married that other girl so soon after he had murdered his wife. It was sure to make people suspicious.

Nora: If he had been sane he wouldn't have murdered her! Besides, the girl wouldn't have waited for him if he hadn't asked her immediately. Harry: All the better for him if she hadn't! Nora: Yes, but then he wouldn't have paid for his crime Anyhow, I'd have enjoyed the film much more it Elsa Hollywood had been in it instead of Linda Spangle.

Harry: And I'd have enjoyed it more if we hadn't gone at all Nora (sharply): And I'd have enjoyed it more if you hadn't

been so rude to that woman in front. Harry: Well, I shouldn't have been rude to her if she had

stopped chattering when I asked her. Nora: I wish you'd behave better in public places. Harry: I behave better! I like that! Why, if that woman had. (Sound of a bus starting up)

218

But look, isn't that a No 12 bus just going? Nora: Yes, it is, and we've missed it after all. We should have seen that bus, Harry, if you hadn't been so busy quarrelling.

Harry (in injured tones): Really, Nora, I think it would have been much better if I had stayed at home tonight and let you go to the cinema alone. д. Questions

1. Where have Nora and Harry just been? 2. What are they doing at the moment? 3. What are they talking about? 4. What does Harry think of the film? Why? 5. Did Nora enjoy the film? 6. Why did they miss the bus ?

B. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms.

1. We (see) that bus, Harry, if you (not be) so busy quarrelling. 2.1 wish you (behave) better in public places. 3. And I (enjoy) it more if we (not go) at all. 3. Yes, but then he (not pay) for his crime. 4. We (be) awfully late home if that No 12 bus (not come) soon. 5. I never (go) if I (know) it was going to be so silly. 6. I (not be) rude to her if she (stop) chattering when I asked her. 7. If he (be) sane he (not murder) her. 8.1 (enjoy) the film much more if Elsa Hollywood (be) in it instead of Linda Spangle. 9. No sane man (marry) that other girl so soon after he (murder) his wife. 10. Besides, the girl (not wait) for him if he (not ask) her immediately. 11. And I (enjoy) it more if you (not be) so rude to that woman in front. 12.1 think it (be) much better if I (stay) at home tonight and (let) you go to the cinema alone.

C. Give the appropriate English phrases for the following.

1. Мне бы хотелось, чтобы ты вел себя приличнее в об­щественных местах. 2. В конце концов мы его пропустили. 3. Это должно было наверняка вызвать у людей подозре­ние. 4. Давай постоим в дверях, чтобы не быть на ветру. 5. Мне бы понравилось больше, если бы мы не пошли в кино вообще. 6. Мы поздно попадем домой, если 12-ый автобус ско-Р° не придет. 7. Нам нужно быть внимательными, чтобы не Пропустить автобус. 8. Я бы никогда не пошел, если бы знал, ^Что фильм окажется таким глупым. 9. Что в нем глупого? "• Я бы не нагрубил ей, если бы она перестала болтать,

219

когда я попросил ее об этом, 11. Мы бы увидели тот авто­бус, если бы ты не был так поглощен ссорой. 12. Я думаю, что было бы гораздо лучше, если бы я остался сегодня до­ма и позволил тебе пойти в кино одной. 13. А мне бы фильм понравился больше, если бы ты не нагрубил той женщине, которая сидела впереди нас.

D. Give a brief summary of the conversation.

E. Roleplay the conversation.

Wish and If only

1. Wish and if only + past tense

We can use wish and if only with a past tense to express regret about the present (to say that we would like something to be different).

I wish I had a car. (I do not have a car.)

I wish he wasn't so horrible to me. (He is horrible to me.)

She wishes she could play the guitar. (She cannot play the

guitar.)

If only we knew Maria's address. (We do not know Maria's

address.)

If only is more emphatic than wish.

We often use were instead of was after wish and if only, especially m a more formal style.

I wish he weren't so horrible to me. If only I were better-looking.

2. Wish and if only + would

I wish you would stop making that noise.

We use would after wish and if only when we want something to stop happening, or we want something different to happen

I wish you wouldn't slam the door when you come in It makes me angry.

I wish he wouldn't leave his clothes lying all over the bathroom floor.

If only you would stop complaining! 3. Wish and if only + past perfect

To express regret that something happened or did not happen in the past, we can use wish and if only with the past perfect (had + past participle).

Oh, I'm tired. I wish I'd gone to bed earlier last night. (I did

not go to bed very early last night.)

I wish I hadn't stayed out so late. (I stayed out late.)

If only you had explained the situation to me. (You did not

explain the situation to me.)

As if

a. We use as if before a subject+verb to say how someone or something seems.

You look as if you're cold.

It looks as if it's going to stop raining.

We sometimes use as if+ a past tense to talk about the present. My brother sometimes behaves as if he was my father.

The sentence does not refer to the past here: we use the past (he was my father) because the idea is "unreal" (in fact he is not my father).

We often use were instead of was after as if to express "unreal" ideas, especially in a more formal style.

My brother sometimes behaves as if he were my father. b. We can use as though instead of as if. You look as though you're tired.

My brother sometimes behaves as though he were my father.

^c- In an informal style, like is sometimes used instead of as if/ 'hough.

It looks like it's going to stop raining.

220

221

Practice

I. Rewrite the following using a wish construction (phrases in brackets should be omitted).

1. I'm sorry I haven't got a washing machine. 2. I'm sorry \ don't live near my work. 3. I'm sorry our garden doesn't get any sun. 4. I'm sorry I called him a liar. 5. I'm sorry I don't know Finnish. 6. I'm sorry I didn't book a seat. 7. I'm sorry I haven't got a car. 8. I'm sorry I can't drive. 9. I'd like Tom to drive more slowly, (but I haven't any great hopes of this). 10. I'd like you to keep quiet. (You're making so much noise that I can't think.) 11. I'm sorry we accepted the invitation. 12. I'm sorry that theatre tickets cost so much. 13. It's a pity that shops here shut on Saturday afternoon. 14. It's a pity he didn't work harder during the term. 15. I'm sorry you didn't see it. 16. It's a pity you are going tonight 17. It's a pity I haven't got a car. 18.1 would like it to stop raining (but I'm not very hopeful). 19. I'd like you to wait for me (even though you are ready to start now). 20. I'm sorry I didn't bring a map. 21. I'm sorry I ever came to this country. 22. I'm sorry I left my last job. 23. I'm sorry I didn't stay in my last job. 24. I'd like him to cut his hair (but I don't suppose he will). 25. I'd like him to stop smoking in bed (but I haven't any great hopes). 26. I'm sorry he goes to bed so late. 27. Motorist in fog: It's a pity we don't know where we are. 28. It's a pity we haven't a torch. 29. I'm sorry I didn't know you were coming. 30. I'm sorry you told Jack. 31. I'm sorry I didn't ask 'led to bring his records. 32. I'm sorry I can't swim 33. I'm sorry you aren't coming with us. 34. I'm sorry you aren't going to a job where you could use your English. 35. It's a pity you didn't ask him how to get there. 36.1 would like every country to stop killing whales (but have no real hope of this). 37. I'm sorry I didn't go shopping. 38. I'm sorry I don't know how to dance. 39. It's a pity I don't have enough money to buy this book. 40. I'm sorry I can't go with you. 41. It's a pity Jack didn't come to the party.

II. Supply an appropriate auxiliary in the following.

\. I'm not at home, but I wish I w£is. 2.1 don't know her, but I wish I did. 3.1 can't sing well, but I wish I could. 4.1 didn't go, but I wish I had.

222

5. He won't talk about it, but I wish he would.

6.1 didn't read that book, but I wish_________.

7.1 want to go, but I can't. I wish I________.

8.1 don't have a bicycle, but I wish I_________.

9. He didn't buy a ticket to the game, but he wishes he

10. She can't speak English, but she wishes she________.

11. It probably won't happen, but I wish it________.

12. He isn't old enough to drive a car, but he wishes he______.

13. They didn't go to the movie, but they wish they______.

14.1 don't have a driver's license, but I wish I________.

15. I'm not living in an apartment, but I wish I_______.

16. Bobby didn't tell me the truth, but I wish he______.

17. Dick doesn't live close to school, but he wishes he______.

18.1 didn't study English before I came here, but I wish I

19.1 didn't finish my homework last night, but I wish I

20.1 can't move into a new apartment, but I wish I________.

21. Jane won't come, but I wish she_________.

22. Nick won't join us, but I wish he_________.

II. Complete the following conversations. Use auxiliary verbs in he completions.

1. A: Did you go to the party last night?

B: Yes, I did, but I wish Lhadnlt. It was boring.

2. A: Did you eat breakfast this morning?

В: No,________, but I wish_________. I'm hungry. My

stomach is growling.

3. A: Do you exercise regularly?

B: No,_______, but I wish____________. I always feel

better when I exercise regularly. •. A: Did you study for the test?

B: No,______, but I wish____________. I got an "F"

on it. 5. A: Are you a good artist?

B: No,__________, but I wish________. I'd like to be

able to draw. 6- A: Did you go to the movie last night?

I 223

В: Yes,________, but I wish__________. It was a waste

of time and money.

7. A: Do you have to eat at the student cafeteria?

B: Yes,________, but I wish__________. The food i_s

bad.

8. A: Can you speak Chinese?

B: No,____, but I wish_______.

9. A: Is it hard to learn a second language? B: Yes,________, but I wish_________.

IV. Answer no. Use wish.

A: Can you speak Arabic?

B: No, I can't, but I wish I could.

1. Did you study last night? 2. Did you go to bed early last night? 3. Do you have a car? 4. Are you (a movie star)? 5. Can you speak (language)? 6. Did you eat breakfast? 7. Is (...) here today? 8. Do you know how to dance? 9. Did (...) call you last night? 10. Can you play (a musical instrument)? 11. Are you full of energy today? 12. Do you live in an apartment? 13. Is the weather nice today? 14. Did (...) help you with your homework? 15. Is your family here? 16. Do you have to go to class tomorrow? 17. Can you buy (a Rolls Royce)? 18. Do you know how to type?

V. Make wishes based on the given situations. Try to think of as many possible wishes as you can for each situation.

Example: You're hungry. What do you wish? Response: I wish I'd eaten breakfast.

I wish I had a candy bar.

I wish I could go to (name of a place) and get a

hamburger.

I wish I weren't in class right now.

I wish I didn't have to go to another class after this

one.

I wish the classroom were a restaurant and I had a

steak in front of me instead of my grammar book

1. You're tired. 2. The weather is... today. 3. You live ir (kind of residence). 4. You don't have many talents. 5. This is^a

224

nice classroom but ... 6. You're very busy. You have a lot of thing⁸ to do today. 7. Things about yourself and your life that you would like to change. 8. There are many problems in today's world.

VI. Complete the sentences with words in parentheses.

\. True situation: I don't have enough time.

a) I wish I (have) enough time.

b) If I (have) enough time, I (go) to the park.

2. True situation: I don't have enough money.

a) I wish I (have) enough money.

b) If I (have) enough money, I (fly) home this weekend.

3. True situation: It's cold today.

a) I wish it (be, not) cold today.

b) If it (be, not) cold today, I (go) swimming.

4. True situation: I don't know how to swim.

a) I wish I (know) how to swim.

b) If I (know) how to swim, I (go) to the beach with you.

5. True situation: I don't understand that sentence.

a) I wish I (understand) that sentence.

b) If I (understand) that sentence, I (explain) it to you.

6. True situation: I have to go to class today.

a) I wish I (have to go, not) to class today.

b) If I (have to go, not) to class today, I (go) shopping, or I (visit) my friends.

7. True situation: It isn't Saturday.

a) I wish it (be) Saturday.

b) If it (be) Saturday, I (go) to the beach.

8. True situation: I'm not rich.

a) I wish I (be) rich.

b) If I (be) rich, I (live) on a farm and (raise) horses.

VII. Mention something that is not perfect in your life and then Make a wish.

Example: Not everything in your life is perfect. Tell me some­thing that makes you unhappy about your life. Response: My classes begin at 8 o'clock in the morning. Teacher: What do you wish? Response: I wish my classes didn't begin at eight.

⁸3ак ц iq 225

I wish my classes began at ten.

I wish I didn't have to get up so early. (To the teacher: You may wish to expand the exercise to include an introduction to conditional sentences with if).

Teacher: What would you do if your classes didn' t begm

at eight? Response: If my classes didn't begin at eight, I would sleep

until the middle of the morning.

VIII. Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses.

1. True situation: I didn't have enough time yesterday.

a) I wish I (have) enough time yesterday.

b) If I (have) enough time yesterday, I (go) to the park

2. True situation: I didn't have enough money last night.

a) I wish I (have) enough money last night.

b) If I (have) enough money last night, I (go) to a show.

3. True situation: Mary didn't come to my party last week.

a) I wish she (come) to my party.

b) If she (come) to my party, she (meet) my fiance.

4. True situation: It was cold yesterday.

a) I wish it (be, not) cold yesterday.

b) If it (be, not) cold yesterday, I (go) swimming.

5. True situation: Jack didn't study for the test.

a) Jack wishes he (study) for the test.

b) If he (study) for the test, he (pass) it.

IX. Make sentences with wish and if. Follow the patterns in the examples.

Example: I don't have enough time.

Response: I wish I had enough time. If I had enough time, I

(would/could go shopping this afternoon, etc.) Example: I didn't have enough time. Response: I wish I had had enough time. If I'd had enough

time I (would have/could have gone shopping

yesterday afternoon, etc.).

1.1 don't have enough money. 2.1 didn't have enough money. 3.1 don't have enough time. 4.1 didn't have enough time. 5. The weather isn't nice. 6. The weather wasn't nice. 7. I'm in class

_right now. 8.1 came to class yesterday. 9. My friend isn't at home. 10. My friend wasn't at home. 11.1 don't know how to play the guitar. 12.1 didn't know that my uncle was ill.

%. Using the information т parentheses, complete the sentences _With as if/as though

1. (I wasn't run over by a ten-ton truck.)

I feel terrible. I feel as if (as though) Т had been run over hy a ten-ton truck.

2. (English is not her native tongue.) She speaks English____.

3. (His animals aren't people.)

I know a farmer who talks to his animals____.

4. (You didn't see a ghost.) What's the matter? You look____.

5. (His father is not a general in the army.) Sometimes his father gives orders____.

6. (I didn't climb Mt. Everest.)

When I reached the fourth floor, I was winded. I felt ____ instead of just three flights of stairs.

7. (He does have a brain in his head.) Sometimes he acts____.

8. (We haven't known each other all of our lives.)

We became good friends immediately. After talking to each other for only a short time, we felt____.

9. (A giant bulldozer didn't drive down Main Street.) After the tornado, the town looked____.

10. (I don't have wings and I can't fly.) I was so happy that I felt____.

11. (Tim isn't the boss.) Tim acts____.

12. (The dog isn't a child.) They treat their dog____.

13. (You have many friends.)

You look so depressed. You look____a friend in the world.

14. (The earth didn't stop.)

It was so quiet that it seemed____.

15. (Something happened.)

Craig bumped the other car and then continued

226

227

XI. Complete the sentences with your own words. Examples:

When I walked into the room, I felt as though... When I walked into the room, I felt as though everyone were staring at me.

I got angry at Mary. She talked to me as if... I were a small child who needed discipline.

1. Are you tired? You look as if... 2. George only recently started piano lessons, but he plays as if... 3. He's not very knowledgeable on the subject, but he speaks as though... 4. Ri-chard is very confident. He walks around as though... 5. This meat is terrible. It tastes as if... 6. You're looking at me as if... 7. Bob is extremely pale. He looks as if... 8. After he got knocked over, he got up as if... 9. The child innocently whistled and looked around as though... 10. She's 50 years old, but she looks as if... 11. He's only a receptionist, but he acts... 12. They're quite rich, but they behave as though... 13. He's only got a cold, but he acts as if.. 14. It's my car, but he treats it as if...

XII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms, (self check)

1. Are you sure you won't be able to come with us? I wish you (change) your mind. 2. If only we (have) a phone! I'm tired of queuing outside the public phone box. 3. He walks as if he (have) a wooden leg. 4. He talks as if he (do) all the work himself, but in fact Tom and I did most of it. 5.1 wish I (know) what is wrong with my car. 6.1 wish I (ask) the fishmonger to clean these fish. 7. Bob's mother doesn't like his beard. She wishes he (shave) it off. 8. He always talks as if he (address) a public meeting. 9 He treats us as if we (be) idiots. 10. He needs some money. He wishes his parents (send) him some. 11. The newspaper strike has been going on for two weeks. I wish it (end). 12. If you (tie) the boat up it wouldn't have drifted away. 13.1 wish you (not give) him my phone number. (I'm sorry you gave it to him.) 14. If only he (know) then that the disease was curable! 15. You talk as though it (be) a small thing to leave your country for ever. 16. If only I (be) insured! (But I wasn't insured.) 17.1 wish transistor radios never (be) invented. 18. If only I (keep) my mouth shut! (I sai" something which made matters much worse.) 19. I said "Sunday". — I wish you (not say) Sunday. We'll never be ready by then. 20. But I told you what to do. — I know you did. If only I (take) your advice! 21. That man has brought us nothing but trouble. I wish I never (set) eyes on him. 22.1 wish I (not try) to repair it. I only made it worse. 23. He looks as though he never (get) a good meal, but in fact his wife feeds him very well. 24. My roommate is very messy. I wish she (pick) up after herself more often. 25. We need some help. I wish Alfred (be) here now. If he (be), we could finish this work very quickly. 26. We had a good time in Houston over vacation. I wish you (come) with us. If you (come) with us, you (have) a good time. 27.1 wish it (be, not) so cold today. If it (be, not) so cold, I (go) swimming. 28.1 missed part of the lecture because I was daydreaming, and now my notes are incomplete. I wish I (pay) more attention to the lecturer . 29. A: Do you have enough money to buy that antique lamp? B:

No, but I certainly wish I____. 30. A: Did you study for the

test? B: No, but now I wish I____because I flunked it. 31. A: I

wish we (have, not) to go to class today. B: So do I. I wish it (be) a holiday. 32. A: How long have you been sick? B: For over a week. A: I wish you (go) to see a doctor today. You should find out what's wrong with you. B: Maybe I'll go tomorrow. 33. This evening the surface of the lake is completely still. It looks as if it (make) of glass. 34 Sue says she can't come on the picnic with us. I wish she (change) her mind and (decide) to come with us.

XIII. Translate from Russian into English, (self check)

Wish, if only

1. Жаль, что она так легкомысленна. 2. Жаль, что вы не пришли пораньше. Вы бы встретились с моей сестрой. 3. Я те­перь жалею, что не последовал его совету. 4. Мне бы хоте­лось посмотреть этот фильм еще раз. 5. Жаль, что ее нет с нами. 6. Как бы я хотел, чтобы у меня был телефон. 7. Как бы я хотел, чтобы он не тратил столько времени на спорт. 8. Как хорошо было бы, если бы сейчас была весна. 9. Как жаль, что я не рассказал ему об этом вчера. 10. Как жаль, что вы не зашли к нам вчера. 11. Она жалеет, что не знала об этом раньше- 12. Я жалел, что спросил его об этом. 13. Мне бы хоте-

229

лось, чтобы вы еще раз продумали мое предложение, преж­де чем отвергнуть его окончательно. 14. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы все-таки прочли эту книгу. 15. Если бы только мои роди­тели жили в Минске! 16. Жаль, что я не могу прочесть эту книгу в оригинале. 17. Я очень сожалею, что не смогу пойти завтра на вашу лекцию. 18. Досадно, что у нее вспыльчивый характер. 19. Хорошо бы нам обосноваться здесь навсегда. 20. Ей хотелось бы говорить по-английски. 21. Жаль, что у нее нет чувства долга. 22. Жаль, что я не смогу присоеди­ниться к вам. 23. Он сожалел, что вышел из себя и накричал на них. 24. Жаль, что я не занял тогда денег и не купил сло­варь, теперь его нет в продаже. 25. Если бы ты его видела в тот момент! 26. Как жаль, что идет дождь. Я бы хотел, чтобы была хорошая погода, тогда мы могли бы поехать за город. 27 Если бы сейчас было лето! 28. Я слышал, что вы очень хорошо играете на рояле. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы поиграли мне. 29. Погода была такая плохая, что я пожалел, что вы­шел из дому. 30. Хотелось бы мне, чтобы вы не были таким рассеянным и не задавали один и тот же вопрос несколько раз. 31. Хотелось бы мне, чтобы вы не перебивали меня каж­дую минуту. 32. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы побыли со мной. 33. Как жаль, что я не принял участия в этой экскурсии; говорят, она была очень интересной. 34. Я бы хотел, чтобы вы держали свои вещи в порядке. 35. Хотелось бы воспользоваться тво­им советом, но это невозможно. 36. Они пожалели, что не полетели в Москву самолетом, они бы сэкономили много вре­мени.

As if/ as though

37. У него всегда такой вид, как будто он спешит куда-то.

38. Она вела себя так, как будто ей все было безразлично. 39. У нее такой вид, как будто она болела. 40. Ты обращаешься со мной как с ребенком. 41. Казалось, что письмо было написа­но ребенком. 42. У нее было чувство, как будто она знала его всю жизнь. 43. Казалось, что они были братом и сестрой, а не мужем и женой, так они были похожи. 44. Он представил ее своему брату, как будто они никогда раньше не встреча­лись. 45. Он смотрел на нас, как будто был удивлен тем, что увидел нас там. 46. Дождь шел несколько дней и казалось,

230

что ему не будет конца. 47. Она держала себя так, словно она была хозяйкой дома. 48. Вы так загорели, как будто провели все лето на юге. 49. Он выглядит усталым, как будто давно не отдыхал, 50. Он так говорил по-немецки, словно всю жизнь прожил в Германии. 51. Казалось, будто ничего и не произош­ло. 52. Он говорил по-французски, как настоящий француз. 53. Девушка смотрела на меня с таким удивлением, как буд­то видела меня впервые. 54. У него такой вид, как будто он никогда об этом не слышал.

Fluency

Listen, read and practise.

1. Secretary: Your call from New York's on line one, sir.

Paris has just come through on line two and

I've got a call from Tokyo on line four. Mr Menning: Ask them to ring back tomorrow, Judy.

Tell them... tell them I'm not here. It's far

too late. I wish I wasn't here. I've had

enough today.

Secretary: But sir, they're urgent, all of them. Mr Menning: Do you know something, Judy? I wish I

was at home now, in front of the television

with a cup of cocoa!

2. Paula: Look at that! It's pouring with rain again, and

I've got to walk to the station. Diane: Typical British weather! Paula: It's all right for old Menning. His Rolls-Royce is

downstairs waiting to take him home. Diane: Mmm. I wish I had a chauffeur-driven Rolls. Paula: I wish I had a car, any car. I'm going to get soaked

tonight!

3. Tony: Hello, James, still here?

James: Yes, I'm waiting to see Mr Menning. Tony: You don't usually work in the evenings.

231

James: I wish I wasn't working this evening. There's a

good concert on.

Tony: Oh well. Perhaps he'll call you soon. James: I hope he does!

4. Alan: Haven't you finished yet?

Lorraine: No, I wish I had. I can't go until I've completed

this report.

Alan: Can't you do it tomorrow? Lorraine: I wish I could, but Mr Menning wants it tonight

5. Shirley: Evening, Joan.

Joan: Evening, Shirley. I don't feel like working tonight

Shirley: Neither do 1.1 hate this kind of work.

Joan: Why do you do it then?

Shirley: I wish I didn't have to! But we need the money

My husband's out of work again. Joan: I know what you mean. I wish I'd learnt to type,

or something like that. Shirley: We can all wish! I left school at fourteen. I wish I

hadn't but there was no choice in those days.

Youngsters have so many opportunities nowadays

I wish we'd had the chances. I'd never have ended

up as a cleaner. Joan: Come on Shirley, let's have a cup of tea.

A. Exercise I

1. I wish I was on holiday. I wish I was in Hawaii.

Where do you wish you were now?

Do you wish you were in bed?/ at home?/ on the beach'

2. I'm a student.

I wish I was an actor.

What do you wish you were?

Exercise 2

I haven't got a car. I wish I had a car. Make Jive sentences.

232

Exercise 3

— It's raining.

I wish it wasn't raining.

— He's working.

He wishes he wasn't working. Continue,

1. The phones are ringing.

2. It's snowing.

3. She's sitting in an office.

4. He's waiting.

Exercise 4

He hasn't finished yet. He wishes he had finished. I didn't learn to type. I wish I had learnt to type!

Continue.

1. They haven't done their homework.

2. She left school at fourteen. 3.1 haven't seen that film.

4. He lost his wallet.

1. My brother thought I was crazy when I bought this car. He told me that if I bought this car, I'd probably have lots of problems with it.

I didn't follow his advice... and I'm really sorry I didn't. Since I bought this car two months ago, I've had to take it to the garage for repairs seven times.

I wish I had listened to my brother. If I had listened to him, I never would have bought such a "lemon"!

2. My ski instructor insisted that I was ready to try skiing down the mountain. I told him that I was really scared and that I thought I needed much more practice. He told me I was worrying too much, and that skiing down the mountain wasn't very dangerous.

I decided to take his advice. I began to ski down the mountain, but after a few seconds, I lost my balance and crashed into a tree.

233

I wish I hadn't listened to my ski instructor. If I hadn't listened to him, I wouldn't be lying here in the hospital with my leg in a cast.

A. Do you remember a time when you had to make an important decision and people gave you lots of advice⁷

Talk with other students about the advice people gave you and the decision you made:

What did people tell you?

Why did they tell you that?

Did you follow their advice?

What happened? Did you make the right decision? Why

or why not?

B. Have you ever done something and then regretted it? Tell about something you wish you had done differently, and why.

The Anderson family lives in the suburbs, but they wish they li\ ed in the city. If they lived in the city, Mr Anderson wouldn't have to spend all his spare time mowing the lawn and working around the house. Mrs Anderson wouldn't have to spend two hours commuting to work every day. Their son Michael would be able to take the bus to the baseball stadium. Their daughter, Jennifer, would be living close to all of her favourite book stores. And their other son, Steven, could visit the zoo more often. It would be very difficult for the Anderson family to move to the city now, but perhaps some day they'll be able to. They certainly hope so.

A. Fill in the missing words.

The Burton family lives in the city, but they wish they____in

the suburbs. If they____in the suburbs, Mrs Burton____be

able to plant a garden and grow vegetables. Mr Burton____have

to listen to the noisy city traffic all the time. Their son, Ken,

_____a backyard to play in. Their daughters, Betsy and Kathy,

____to share a room. And their cat, Tiger,_____to go outside

and roam around and play with the other cats. It_____very

difficult for the Burton family to move to the suburbs now, but perhaps some day_____. They certainly hope so.

B. Do you wish you lived someplace else? Where? Why?

234

UNIT 4

TOPIC: FAMILY MATTERS. LOVE AND MARRIAGE

Listen, read and practise.

(after Somerset Maugham)

George Meadows, the master of a prosperous farm, was now a man of fifty, and his wife was a year or two younger. Their three daughters were lovely and their two sons were handsome and strong. They were merry, industrious and kindly. They were happy and deserved their happiness. But the real master of the house was not George, it was his mother. She was about 70, tall, with grey hair and though her face was wrinkled, her eyes were dark, bright and shrewd.

I knew the story of George's mother and his uncle, whose name was also George. About fifty years ago uncle George and his younger brother Tom had courted Mrs Meadows when she was Emily Green. George was a good-looking fellow, but not so steady as his brother, that's why Emily chose Tom. George had gone away to sea. For twenty years now and then he sent them presents. Then there was no news of him. When Tom died Mrs Meadows wrote George about it but they never got an answer and decided that he must be dead...

Some days ago to their greatest surprise they got a letter, which informed them that George Meadows, who was ill and felt that he had not much longer to live wanted to see the house in which he had been born. I was invited to come and see him. It goes without saying that I accepted the invitation. I found the whole family in the kitchen. I was amused to see that Mrs Meadows wore her best silk dress. I was introduced to the old captain. He was very thin and his skin hung on his bones like an old suit that was too large for him. He had lost nearly all his teeth. It was strange to see those two old people and to think that half a century ago he had loved her and she had loved another.

235

"Have you ever been married, Captain Meadows?" I asked.__

"Not me," he said and added, "I said I would never marry anyone but you, Emily, and I never have." There was some satisfaction in his voice.

"Well, you might have regretted if you had," Mrs Meadows said smiling. I talked a little with the old man about China.

"There's not a port in China that I don't know better than you know your coat pocket. Where a ship can go I've been. I could keep you sitting here all day for six months and not tell you half the things I've seen in my day."

"Well, there's one thing you've not done, George," said Mrs Meadows, the smile still in her blue eyes, "and that's to make a fortune."

"I'm not the man to save money. But one thing I can say for myself: if I had a chance to go through my life again I'd take it. And not many men can say that."

"No, indeed," I said.

I looked at him with admiration and respect. He was a toothless, penniless old man, but he had made a success of his life, for he had enjoyed it.

When I came to see him the next day I learned that Captain Meadows had died in his sleep. Mrs Meadows told me that he had talked about all the things that had happened to him in his long life. He was happy to be back and boasted he would live another twenty years. But death had put the full stop in the right place.

"Well I'm glad he came back," said Mrs Meadows with a faint smile, "after I married Tom and George went to sea I was never sure that I had married the right man."

A. Questions

1. How old were George Meadows and his wife? 2. How many children did they have? 3. What were they like? 4. Was the farm prosperous? 5. Who was the real master of the farm? 6. What did Mrs Meadows look like? 7. What was the story of George's mother and his uncle? 8. Why did Emily choose Tom? 9. What did George do? 10. When and why did he come back? 11. Did the writer see George Meadows? 12. What was he like? 13. Had he ever been married? 14. Was the Captain satisfied with his life? 15. Why was Mrs Meadows glad that George had come back?

236

g. Retell the text.

C. Special Difficulties

I. Join each pair of sentences using who for people and that for things.

eg That's the woman. She works in the post office. That's the woman who works in the post office.

1. He is the man. He painted my house. 2. What is the name of the boy? He telephoned you. 3. What's happened to the money? It was on my desk. 4. They're the people. They offered Sue a job. 5. The car has now been found. It was stolen. 6. She's the person. She gives me a lift to work every day. 7. The lock has now been repaired. It was broken. 8. Most of the people are very nice. They work in Peter's office.

П. Complete the sentences using who for people and that for things; if it is possible to leave out who or that, write (who) or (that) — in brackets.

Note: We often leave out who, that or which when they are the objects in defining relative clauses.

I can't find the envelopes (that) I bought this morning. Have you seen the film that is on TV tonight?

1. John Murray is the man ... owns the Grand hotel. 2. The man ... we spoke to wasn't very nice. 3. This is the sweater ... I bought on Saturday. 4. What is the name of the company ... you work for? 5. A bi-lingual person is someone ... can speak two languages equally well. 6. Who's that boy ... Sally is dancing with? 7. Are these all the letters ... came in this morning's post? 8. Have you found the money ... you lost? 9. The people ... used to live in that house have moved. 10.1 don't like films ... are very violent.

III. Join each pair of sentences using whose.

eg I know someone. His mother is an opera singer. I know someone whose mother is an opera singer.

1. She's the woman. Her husband teaches at Annie's school.

237

2. He's the man. His flat was broken into. 3. They're the couple. Their children were injured in the accident. 4. That's the girl. Her friend lent me the money. 5. I'm the person. My credit cards were stolen. 6. Are you the one? Your mother phoned the police.

IV. Complete the sentences using where, when or why. eg This is the church where Ken and Kate were married.

1. Did they tell you the reason... they wanted you to do that? 2.What's the name of the restaurant... you had lunch? 3. I can remember a time... there was no television. 4. Is that the hospital... you had your operation? 5. I don't understand the reason... he was late. 6. Do you remember the time... your car broke down on the motorway?

V. Complete the sentences using who, that or which, but only where-necessary — leave a blank if possible.

1. Is that the song... we heard yesterday? 2. Maria,... has only been in Britain for a few weeks, speaks excellent English. 3. Who was the girl ... you were speaking to just now? 4. My sister, ... wasn't feeling very hungry, didn't want to go to the restaurant. 5. I've lost all the money... you gave me. 6. This is the letter ... came in today's post. 7. Mr and Mrs Woods,... live next door to us, have gone on holiday. 8. Brighton,... is a tourist centre on the south coast of England, is about 85 kilometres from London.

VI. Join each pair of sentences without using who, whom or which.

eg The restaurant was in West Street. We went to it. The restaurant we went to was in West Street.

1. The woman is a good friend of mine. I borrowed the money from her. 2. The man is Sue's husband. I introduced you to him. 3. The hotel overlooked the sea. We stayed at it. 4. The shop is closed. I bought the shoes from it. 5. The people like him very much. He works with them.

VII. Join each pair of sentences using (i) who or which, and (u) a preposition + whom or which, as in the example.

238

Mr Jones is a teacher at Annie's school. I was talking to him a moment ago.

(i) Mr Jones, who I was talking to a moment ago, is a teacher at Annie's school.

(ii) Mr Jones, to whom I was talking a moment ago, is a tea­cher at Annie's school.

1. Peter's party is next Saturday evening. We are all invited to it. 2. Mr Mason apologized for the mistake. We complained to him. 3. The film "Family Life" is showing next week. I've heard good reports about it.

VIII. Complete the following sentences using must expressing deduction.

eg "Is he British?" "Yes, he..." "Yes, he must be British."

1 ."Are they married?" "Yes, they..." 2. "Were they in a hurry?" "Yes, they..." 3. "Does Ann know a lot of people?" "Yes, she..." 4. "Did Tom know about the plan?" "Yes, he..." 5. "Are they waiting for somebody?" "Yes, they..." 6."Have they been waiting long?" "Yes, they..." 7. "Have they seen Mary?" "Yes, they..." 8."Is Mary still working?" "Yes, she..." 9."Has Brian come?" "Yes, he..."

IX. Express unreal present or future condition. Put the verbs into the correct forms.

eg Sarah would like to write to her friend, Alan, but she has lost Alan's address. She says, "If I knew his address, I would write to him."

1. Simon would like to buy some new clothes, but he hasn't got much money. He says, "If I (have) more money, I (buy) some new clothes." 2. You would like to buy some shoes, but you think they are too expensive. You say, "I (buy) them if they (not be) so expensive." 3. Peter is thinking of buying a new record. Sally thinks the record isn't very good. She says, "I (not buy) it if I (be) you." 4. Andrew's elder brother, Simon, still lives at home. Andrew says, "If I (be) Simon's age, I (not live) at home." 5. Mike lives in London, but he doesn't like living there. You ask him, "Where (you/live) if you (can) live anywhere?"

239

X Read the situation. Then make a sentence with if. Express unreal past condition.

eg I was tired. I didn't go to the party.

If I hadn't been tired, I would have gone to the party.

1 . She was ill. She didn't go to work. 2. It rained all morning We didn't go out. 3. She didn't have enough money. She couldn't buy the shoes. 4. 1 wasn't hungry. I didn't have breakfast. 5. The accident happened because the driver in front stopped so suddenly. 6. 1 didn't wake George up because I didn't know he wanted to get up early. 7. 1 was able to buy the car because Jim lent me the money. 8. She wasn't injured in the crash because she was wearing a seat-belt. 9. You're hungry now because you didn't have breakfast. 10. She didn't come because nobody had told her.

XL Complete the sentences with said, told or talked.

1. Jack ... me that he was enjoying his new job. 2. Tom ... that it was a nice restaurant but I didn't like it much. 3. The doctor ... that I would have to rest for at least a week. 4. Mrs Taylor ... us she wouldn't be able to come to the next meeting. 5. Ann ... Tom that she was going away. 6. George couldn't help me. He ... to ask Jack. 7. At the meeting the chairman ... about the problems facing the company. 8. Jill ... us all about her holiday in Australia. 9. When we last met he ... a lot about his son.

XII. Make up sentences using

a) the conjunction "for"

eg We rarely stay at hotels for we can't afford it.

b) the word combination "that's why"

eg We were tired, that's why we didn't go out.

c) the word combination " It goes without saying".

eg She asked me to help her move to her new house. It goes without saying that I agreed (to).

In the Far, Middle and Near East and in parts of Africa, South America and Europe, the first thing most Western people notice is the respect everyone has for the old. Older men and women

240

live with their married children and are important members of the family. They look after the children, help with the cooking, give advice and often rule family life. Living in an extended family has advantages for everyone. A small child, for example, knows many people from the very beginning, not just his mother and father. When his mother goes out, it doesn't matter. He'll stay with someone who loves him — an aunt or sister or grandmother. For a young mother and father there are also advantages. They can go out to work and grandmother will look after the house and the children.

This is especially important in farming communities, where both men and women work in the fields.

And the older woman, for example, has something important to do. She sees her children and grandchildren grow up. She is needed and loved. The nuclear family is the product of the West. The typical family consists of mother, father and two children. If the mother goes out to work, she must leave them with a stranger — someone who looks after them as a job, for money. If there is a divorce or separation the child's life will change completely.

As for the old, too many older people live alone — in special flats or homes. They hardly ever see their children and grandchildren. They have nothing important to do. They are often poor and lonely. In the winter many old people die of cold or from falls in the house — because there is no one to look after them. Nobody cares.

In the USA many old people go to Florida when they retire and live in large parks. Often these parks are for old people only. Neither children nor pets can live there.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak on nuclear and extended families.

In the nineteenth century in the United States, it was not unusual for extended families of uncles, aunts, cousins, and grandparents to live together in the same home. Then, in this century, nuclear families became popular. Only the parents and their children lived together. Recently, in the United States, many parents and children have begun living with grandparents again. Often, parents and

241

children don't want to send their parents and grandparents to a special nursing home for older people. They think it is better to take care of the elderly person at home.

Of course, there can be problems when people of three generations live in the same house. Grandparents are often more permissive than parents, and they let children do what they want. But most American parents feel that it is better to be strict; they feel that children should follow rules. Parents think that grandparents who don't make children mind (=obey) will spoil them. Then the children won't obey anyone as they are growing up.

But having grandparents in the home can also be fun. For example, everyone enjoys the stories the older people tell and the interesting things that they can teach the other family members. Americans are learning that having elderly people in the home can be a wonderful experience.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak on the changes in the American family.

C. Speak on the advantages and disadvantages of living with parents and grandparents.

D. Do you think these statements about family life are true or false? Decide in pairs, then compare your answers with other pairs.

1. Old people should live with their children.

2. Old people should live in special places (nursing homes) with other old people.

3. Everyone can learn a lot from older people.

4. Young couples must live away from their parents.

Many single people in the United States have trouble finding a marriage partner. In the past, sometimes friends would help by beco­ming matchmakers. They would introduce a man and woman, and sometimes the man and woman would fall in love and get married. But today, many people pay companies called dating services to help them find partners. And even if the dating service does

242

_not always find them someone to marry, it at least finds them someone to date.

Getting married has changed in some ways. In the past, the man proposed to the woman. But now sometimes the woman asks the man to many her. After the couple decides to marry, the man gives the woman a ring. She wears it on her left hand to show that they are engaged. Sometimes the man and woman elope. When they run away and get married privately, their parents are often disappointed because they wanted their children to have a big wedding.

When they are married, both newlyweds often work because they need two paychecks to pay their bills. But sometimes they still have money problems. And sometimes the parents find that they just aren't compatible. So, for many people, marriage ends in divorce. Yet, some people stay together long enough to celebrate their fiftieth or seventy-fifth wedding anniversary.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak about marriage in the United States.

C. 1 . Do people become engaged in your country? 2. Do you give rings in your country? 3. Have you got dating services in your country? 4. Do many marriages end in divorce in your country? 5. Do many women work after marriage?

Young people in Britain may have several girlfriends or boyfriends from their teens onwards. They go to the cinema, go dancing, play sports or eat out together and do not necessarily intend to get mar­ried. However, each year about 350,000 British couples become husband and wife. Marriage is legal from the age of sixteen but most people wait until their mid to late twenties. Of those who get married, about seventy per cent prefer a traditional church wedding to a registry office wedding. However, by the age of forty, one Woman in twenty and one man in eleven will still be single.

One in four children are born outside of marriage but these are ⁿot all in single-parent families; sixty per cent of unmarried parents have stable relationships. Thirty-seven per cent of marriages end

243

in divorce and cost the country more than £1.4 billion a year. Although over thirty per cent of women depend financially on their husbands, women ask for seventy per cent of all divorces. Three out often divorced women married as teenagers.

Marriage does seem to be more popular now than could be imagined thirty years ago. Is it since research has shown that married people generally live longer than the single?

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak about marriage in Britain.

C. 1. What do you think is the best age to get married? 2. Children should have married parents. Discuss.

D. Did you use to fight with your brothers and sisters when you were young? How do you get on with them now?

Discuss which THREE of the following are the most harmful to children.

— having a favourite child

— wanting children to do well at school

— wanting them to be attractive/or popular

— not giving enough discipline

— not spending enough time with them

— being too protective

Now write three paragraphs giving у our opinion. The phrases below may be useful.

I think/don't think having a favourite child is ...

I think it's quite natural for parents to ...

To give you an example, when I was a little child...

When Adrian Hutton and Carla Leene get married they will move into a new house that they have bought. But what sort of life will they have? What can they expect in modern Britain? Every year the British government publishes statistics about social trends. Their findings show definite patterns in the British way of life. In most marriages there are some marked differences between husbands and wives. Working wives, for example, sleep (on

average) one hour more a day than working husbands. Hou­sewives, on the other hand, sleep only about three hours more every week than their working husbands. And what about housework? The government survey showed that only 1% of men do the household chores — like cleaning and ironing. But they do usually keep household accounts and it is always men who do repairs or improvements in the house. 30% of all marriages end in divorce. The government survey also looked at leisure activities. They found that the two most popular leisure activities in Britain are watching television (the average family spends 20 hours a week in front of the TV set) and going for walks. Swimming is an especially popular activity among British women.

Carla and Adrian's life, though, will probably be different from the average marriage. In the first place Carla has always kept her own accounts and Adrian has always done his own housework. Neither of them like watching television very much and they both like swimming.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak on social trends in the British way of life.

Men are lazy in the home, according to an official survey published today.

They have about six hours'a week more free time than wives, but play very little part in cooking, cleaning, washing, and ironing, according to the Social Trends Survey by the Central Statistical Office.

Nearly three quarters of married women claimed to do all or most of the housework, and among married men the proportion who admitted that their wives did all or most of the housework was only slightly lower.

The survey showed that washing and ironing was the least popular task among men, with only one per cent performing this duty, compared with 89 per cent of women, and 10 per cent sharing equally. Only 5 per cent of men prepare the evening meal, 3 per cent carry out household cleaning duties, 5 per cent household shopping, and 17 per cent wash the evening dishes.

But when household gadgets break down, repairs are carried out by 82 per cent of husbands.

The survey says that, despite economic problems, the majority of Britons are substantially better than a decade ago. We're healthier, too — eating healthier foods and smoking less.

The average Briton, not surprisingly, is more widely travelled than a decade ago. Most people are going abroad for holidays, with Spain the favourite destination.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. Speak on the Social Trends Survey by the Central Statistical Office.

C. Do you agree with these statements?

1. Fathers should feed children and change their nappies.

2. Men should do more work about the house.

3. Mothers with young children should not work.

D. What are the results of the Social Trends Survey in your country? Perhaps you 've got some information on this problem. Tell your friends what you 've read or heard.

Conversation Practice Listen, read and practise. -.

Jim and Karen are relaxing in Jim's room. They have been telling each other about their lives.

Karen: Did you live with both parents when you were little?

Jim: No, my father died when I was very young, so I grew up in a single-parent family.

Karen: Did your mother work?

Jim: Yes, she worked in an office to support my brother and me.

Karen: It must have been difficult for her.

Jim: It was. After a long day at her job, she came home and cooked our dinner and helped us with our home­work. And taking care of us wasn't easy.

246

Karen: Didn't your mother have anyone to help her with

the cooking and cleaning? Jim: No, she did it all by herself. She must have been

tired a lot, but she never neglected us. In fact, she

spent almost all her free time with us. Karen: You didn't have any grandparents or aunts or uncles

who could have helped? Jim: We had relatives, but they lived in other states, so

our mother had to do everything alone.

A. Questions

1. Did Jim grow up in a two-parent or a single-parent family? 2. Did his mother work? 3. Did Jim's mother have to work hard?

4. Did anyone help her to look after the house and the family?

5. Why didn't Jim's relatives help her?

B. Special difficulties

I. Join these simple sentences to make compound sentences. Use the words in brackets.

1. The taxi stopped at the station. Two men got out of it. (and) The taxi stopped at the station and two men got out of it.

2. We got ready to get on the train. It didn't stop, (but)

3. No one was in when we called. We left a message, (so)

4. We didn't want to get home after the film. We went straight back, (so)

5. The old lady was nervous. She wasn't used to strangers cal­ling late at night, (for)

6. I've always wanted to live in the country. My parents prefer to live in town, (but)

7. The letter has been lost. The postman has delivered it to the wrong address, (or)

8. For a moment the top of the mountain was visible. A cloud covered it. (and then)

9. Jane was a successful career woman. Her mother wanted her to be a housewife, (yet)

10. Tom phoned. He left a message, (and)

11. Your mother phoned this morning. She didn't leave a mes­sage, (but)

12. Go at once. You will miss your train, (or)

247

13. She seldom visits us. She lives in the country, (for)

14. There was little time left. I took a taxi, (so)

II. Rephrase the following sentences. Use must instead of modal words.

eg Surely they have left already. They must have left already.

1. Her shoes evidently pinch her, she can hardly walk. 2. Surely the boy recognized you at once. 3. It was undoubtedly raining when you left. 4. She is probably good at chemistry. 5. They were probably having dinner when I phoned them. 6. Surely she has finished typing by this time. 7. Surely he is looking for his glasses again. 8. No doubt you are run down, you look pale. 9. Su­rely she is still typing. 10. She is probably in her office now.

III. Supply the correct reflexive pronouns in the following.

eg I enjoyed... very much at the party. I enjoyed myself very much at the party.

1.1 see you've cut... again. Won't you ever learn how to shave⁹ 2. How did Tom dry...? — He used your towel. 3. She has no reason to blame... for what has happened. 4.1 think that poor dog has hurt... 5. "One prides ... on one's patience," the boss said, in his usual pompous manner. 6. We amused ... playing football on the beach. 7. Our new neighbours knocked at our door and introduced ... 8. Sheila prides ... on her ability to judge people's characters. 9. Bill had to absent... from work when his baby was bom. 10. Strictly between..., she's wrong. 11. She's very certain of... 12. Granddad doesn't like living by... (= without help, alone) 13. Jimmy tied his shoelaces all by... (= without help, alone) 14. She -made the dress by ... (= without help, alone) 15. Harry knows how to take care of... 16. I've cut... with the bread knife. 17. Take care of...! 18. You saw what happened... 19. They ... saw what happened. 20. Just among ..., he is stupid.

IV. Supply gerund forms for the words in brackets.

eg ... is fun. (dance) Dancing is fun.

248

wmj?

** 1. ... tall is an advantage, (be) 2. ... tall is an advantage, (not be). 3 ... makes me tired, (drive) 4. ... able to drive is a disad­vantage, (not be) 5. ... keeps you fit. (jog) 6. ... is a difficult profession, (act) 7. ... about other cultures is interesting, (learn) g.... a cold isn't much fun. (have) 9.... tennis is fun. (play) 10.... alone at night in this part of the city is dangerous, (walk) 11. Is ... a motorcycle easy? (ride) 12. ... a soft-boiled egg takes three minutes, (cook) 13. Is ... a second language difficult? (learn) 14.... good friends is important, (have)

V. Respond using negative interrogative.

eg A: I talked to Tom.

B: Didn't you talk to Jack too?

1.1 helped Bill. 2.1 thanked George. 3.1 paid Peter. 4.1 congra­tulated Andrew. 5.1 fined Paul. 6.1 met Arthur. 7.1 wrote to Bill. 6.1 saw Ann. 9.1 photographed Oliver. 10.1 sent a card to Hugh. 11.1 got a ticket for Mary. 12.1 kept a seat for Bob. 13.1 asked George. 14.1 invited Margaret. 15.1 forgave Alec. 16.1 offered a lift to Bill. 17.1 stopped Peter. 18.1 warned Hugh.

C. Speak about Jim s life.

D. Roleplay the conversation.

E. Speak about your life. Was it hard?

Jan and Audrey, who are roommates, are sitting in a church. They are waiting for their friend Margo to be married.

Jan: The music's starting to play! Audrey: Yeah, the wedding's about to begin. It's hard to believe that Marge's getting married.

(A few minutes later) Jan: Doesn't Margo look beautiful? Audrey: Yes, she is a lovely bride. Jan: Have you met the guy she's marrying? Audrey: No, I don't know the groom. But he looks like a nice

person. Jan: Well, we'll get a chance to meet him in an hour or so.

249

Audrey: You must be kidding. We won't have a chance to get acquainted with him at the reception. He'll be too bu­sy cutting the wedding cake and having his picture taken with Margo.

Jan: Yeah. You're right about that.

Audrey: I know what we could do, though. Why don't we take them out for dinner next week when they get back from their honeymoon?

A. Questions

\. Who is getting married? 2. Do Jan and Audrey know the guy she's marrying? 3. Will they have a chance to get acquainted with him at the wedding reception? 4. What are they going to do to get acquainted with him?

B. Special Difficulties

I. Make up sentences with "be about to " to talk about things which are going to happen in the very near future.

eg I'm about to leave for the station. The train leaves

in twenty minutes.

eg I think it's just about to start raining, eg Robert was about to pay for the vase when he noticed

a small crack in it.

II. Express surprise or admiration using negative interrogative.

eg Doesn't Margo look beautiful? eg Isn't she lovely?

III. Paraphrase the following sentences using could to express suggestion.

eg Why not go to the park? We could go to the park.

1. Let's go for a walk. 2. What about playing a game of cards? 3. Shall we go for a swim? 4. Why don't we lie in the sun? 5. How about visiting Peter? 6. Why not go to the cinema? 7. What about going to a restaurant? 8. Why not spend the weekend in Brighton? 9. Why don't we dine out? 10. How about buying a garage?

250

IV. Make up sentences. Do it as in the examples.

eg She is busy packing.

eg When I came they were busy writing a composition.

V. Roleplay the conversation "A Lovely Bride. "

VI. Tell other students about your own wedding or the last wedding you went to.

A student wants to write an article about Alexander Cliff. She is calling Cliff at home.

Student: Mr Alexander Cliff, please.

Cliff: This is Alex Cliff.

Student: Mr Cliff, my name is Silvia Rios. I'm a student at the University of California. Mr Cliff, I wrote an article about you recently for the school newspaper, but I wasn't able to include any details about you personally — about your family... or your interests.

Cliff: Yes.

Student: Well, would you mind if I asked you a few questions? Cliff: I'd be happy to answer your questions, Ms Rios.

Go ahead.

Student: Well, sir, ah, let's see, how many children do you have? Cliff: I have two daughters. Tricia, my elder daughter, is a doctor. My younger daughter, Lana, is also a stu­dent at the University of California. She's studying business. Perhaps you know her. She plays the piano in the university orchestra. Student: No, sir, I don't think I do, buLthe university is a big

place.

Cliff: I guess it is.

Student: Ah, what does your wife do, Mr Cliff? Cliff: My wife works as a volunteer for Readers of Ame­rica. She helps teach adults to read and write. Student: I understand you are a lawyer. Cliff: Yes, I've been a lawyer for over twenty years. Student: Do you have any interests or hobbies that vou cnnlH

251

tell me about?

Cliff: Well, as you know, I write novels — mostly stories about crime and the law. I also play golf and I jog every morning with my wife. And, of course, I read a lot. You have to read a lot in my profession. And I play the piano... not well... but I enjoy it,

Student: Well, all that's very interesting, sir. I'm sure the other students at the university will be interested in kno­wing a little more about you, too.

Cliff: Well, I'm glad I could answer your questions. Good luck with your article.

Student: Thank you very much. And good luck to you too, sir.

A. Questions

1 . Why is Silvia calling Mr Cliff? 2. How many children does Mr Cliff have? 3. What do they do? 4. What does Mr Cliffs wife do? 5. What is Mr Cliff's job? 6. What are his interests and hobbies?

B. Speak about Mr Cliff and his family.

C. Interview a classmate. Ask him/her about his/her family.

(I = Interviewer; R = Raj)

I: How old were you when you met your husband, Raj?

R: Mm.... I was erm, sixteen.

Г. And what were you doing at the time?

R: Oh I was at home. I had left school, and I was having pri­vate tuition actually, at home, to prepare me for my exams

I: And your father arranged your marriage, is that right?

R: Yes, that's right.

I: Could you tell me how he did that?

R: Yes. He looked around for a suitable husband. He asked friends and relatives if they knew anybody, and found out about their education, their background, and most importantly, the family's background. He got all the infor­mation about them, you know.

I: And did this take a long time?

252

R: In my case, no, but it depends you see, erm... sometimes a father can see up to a hundred men before he chooses one. My elder sister... for my elder sister my father saw over a hundred men. You know, sometimes it can be diffi­cult to decide. But for my brother he saw only one girl. ll: And for you?

R: He saw only two, one in the morning and one in the eve­ning, and er... he chose the second one.

I: My goodness! Tell me about that day.

R: Yes... well, in the morning the first man came. He was very wealthy, but er... not very well educated, but he had a lot of money. And he was well-dressed, and he had very good manners.

I: And the other one?

R: He wasn't terribly wealthy, but he was well-educated, and he came from a good background. His family owned a village, and were like princes. And all his relatives were suitable. He was twenty-two, and studying law.

I: And your father chose him?

R: Yes.

I: Why, do you know?

R: I think he thought that money wasn't everything. He didn't want the... you know, he didn't want the family money. Education was more important. If he's well-educated, he'll earn it later. Actually, Shyam, that's my husband's name, didn't want to get married. He wanted to wait, but you know his father persuaded him. You know when he came to my house to meet my father, he was very badly dressed because he wanted my father to refuse him, so he could say to his father "Look, they didn't like me". But luckily my father did like him and—erm — so he had to say "yes".

I: And did you meet him that day?

R: Yes. First my family spoke to him, and then they called me in, and we talked for four, four or five minutes. My father decided immediately.

I: And did you agree?

R: Of course. My father had decided.

I: And what happened next?

R: Well, after a certain time, there was a special day when I went to see his family and he came to see my family. It

253

was a sort of engagement party. But we — you know — we used to be on the phone every day, we'd see each other regularly, but never without a chaperon. We were married ten months later.

I: And how long have you been married?

R: Oh for twenty-two years now.

Г. And ... it's been a successful marriage? Have you been pleased with your father's choice?

R: Oh ... yes, of course.

I: Do you think that the system of arranged marriages is a good one? How common is this system of arranged mar­riages?

R: Well, most marriages in India are still arranged in this way, and generally it is a system that works. Of course it depends a lot on the family choosing the right person, but one reason it works is that the couple enter the marriage not expecting too much, if you see what I mean. Actually, there are many more divorces between couples who thought that they were marrying for love and who then find that it isn't there. Arran­ged marriages seem to last, and that is a good thing.

I: And is sixteen the age when girls get married?

R: It is usually sixteen or seventeen.

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

B. What do you think of arranged marriages? At what age do young people usually get married in your country?

Listening

Ann was a very romantic girl who often dreamed of love and marriage. She was especially attracted to a young man called Michael, who worked in the same office as she did, and he was very keen on her too. They became friendly and one day Michael asked her to go out with him. Their first date was a visit to the cinema, and they both enjoyed the evening so much that they decided to go out together regularly. Michael was a bit untidy and rather young, and Ann's parents didn't approve of him at first, but Ann was a sensible, mature

254

girl and they had confidence in her. For a year or so everything went well, but then somehow they slowly began to drift apart, until finally they decided to break off their relationship.

A. Questions

1 . What sort of 'girl was Ann? 2. Who did she become friendly with? 3. Did Ann's parents approve of Michael? 4. Did Ann and Michael get married?

One evening, although he was nervous, Joe decided to propose to his girlfriend, Linda. She accepted his proposal, they became engaged and he gave her a ring. After a year they had saved enough money to get married (they were both over 1 8 so they did not need their parents' consent). Some people have a religious ceremony with a priest, but Joe and Linda decided on a civil ceremony in a registry office. On the day of the wedding Linda, the bride, was very calm, but Joe, the bridegroom, was nervous. Afterwards, at the reception, speeches were made and the guests drank a toast to the happy couple, who finally left for a honeymoon in Spain.

A. Questions

1 . Why was Joe nervous one evening? 2. Did Linda accept his proposal? 3. How old were the young people when they got married? 4. Did they have a religious or a civil ceremony? 5. Where did the newly married couple go after the wedding reception?

Win, 42, tells how she met her husband:

I remember I was about 19.1 went to a dance at the village hall. I went with my best friend, Marjorie. Marjorie was very pretty and all the boys liked her. They all wanted to dance with her. I didn't enjoy dances much. I was always very shy.

I sat at a table in the corner of the dance hall. No one asked me to dance. After about an hour, Marjorie came up and said, "Go and ask one of the boys to dance! You can't just sit there!"

255

It was awful. I hated every minute of it. In the end she told one of her boyfriends to go and ask me for a dance. I was so embarrassed! Anyway, the boy came up and we danced. His name was Mick and he was very nice. He asked me to go to the cinema with him the next day. That was the start of it. I went out with him for a year, and then he asked me to marry him. My parents were a bit surprised. They liked him, but they said we were too young. They told us to wait. We waited nine months and then, on my 21st birthday, we got married. We now have three children and we're very happy. I still see Marjorie quite often. She always says, "You mustn't sit and wait for things to happen. You must go out and make them happen." I think she is right.

A. Questions

1. Where did Win meet her husband, Mick? 2. How old was she then? 3. Who was she with? 4. What was her friend like? 5. Why didn't Win enjoy dances? 6. Why wasn't she happy at first at this dance? 7. What did Marjorie do? 8. Who asked Win to dance? 9. What happened later on? 10. What does Marjorie always say?

Susan Brown and Tom Smith first met at a Christmas party at a friend's house. He was then a student at a university and she had just left school. That was more than two years ago. During this time they have become very close friends, and now they are engaged to be married. Tom is a very nice boy — and Susan loves him very much. He is clever too. He did well at the University and now he has a good job at a cycle factory near Bishopton, where he is making excellent progress. Learning to be a manager is interesting work and Tom enjoys it. Although he is not earning a very large salary at the moment, he hopes to be a manager himself soon. Susan's father and mother like Tom and are glad that their daughter is going to marry him.

The young people have not made any arrangements for the wedding yet. Getting married is very expensive and they will have to save some money first, so they do not mind if they have to put off the wedding for a little while. They will want to find a house, too, and this is not easy. Many young married people toda>

256

live with the boy's or with the girl's family, but it is better for them to have a house of their own. So Tom and Susan will have to work hard, save as much money as they can and look for a house before they can get married. But as Tom is only twenty-two and Susan is only twenty, this does not matter very much.

Susan is very proud of her engagement ring. Buying an engagement ring is a serious matter; it is something that does not happen often, so they spent a day in London together for the event. They looked in many jewellers' windows before Susan made up her mind. At last they saw what they wanted in a shop in Regent Street. But they did not buy it at once; no woman ever does this! The assistant brought tray after tray of rings, some of them very expensive. Susan enjoyed trying on rings costing many hundreds of pounds and comparing one with another, even though she knew that she and Tom could not afford them. At last she asked for the diamond ring in the window which she and Tom had liked and this was the ring they bought.

When Susan got to the office the next morning, all the girls at once noticed the ring on the third finger of her left hand, and said how pleased they were. But Mr Robinson, the manager, to whom Susan is secretary, did not notice it for three days, and he only noticed it then because Susan waved it in front of his eyes. Susan thought that her brother David would make fun of her when he saw the ring, but to her surprise he kissed her and said, "Very nice too!" Susan was so pleased, she nearly cried.

When Mr Carter, the manager of Tom's factory, heard that Tom and Susan were engaged, he sent for him and told him he was going to ask the directory to raise his salary. "You'll need it when you are married, as you'll soon find out," he said.

A. Questions

1. Where did Susan and Tom first meet? 2. What were they doing at that time? 3. What is Tom like? 4. Are Susan's parents for or against their daughter's marriage? 5. Why will the young people have to put off their wedding? 6. What did the young people buy when they got engaged? 7. How did their colleagues react to the news of their being engaged?

93ак 1110

257

The first time Michael saw Helen, he fell in love with her. It was love at first sight. The problem was how to win her love for him. First he tried to impress her. He asked her to fly to Cannes with him for the Film Festival. She refused. Then he asked her to come to Rome with him. But she said no. "Perhaps she likes the simple life," he thoughfSo he asked her to spend a weekend with him in the country. She refused that too. "Food. I'll try food," he thought and asked her to eat with him at Mason's, one of the best restaurants in London.

"No, thank you," she said and lowered her lovely blue eyes. "She's so beautiful," he thought. "I will try one last question." And he asked her to marry him.

"Yes," she said. "I will. Mason's, Rome, Cannes, the country — what an exciting life we will have."

A. Questions

1. What are the things Michael asked Helen to do? 2. What did Helen say?

(after O. Henry)

One dollar and eighty-seven cents. That was all. Three times Delia counted it. And tomorrow was Christmas. She sat down on the sofa and burst into tears. She had saved every penny for months and this was the result. Twenty dollars a week doesn't go far. Only $1.87 to buy a present for Jim. Her Jim. She had spent hours planning to buy something nice for him.

She went to the mirror and let down her hair. She let it fall to its full length, below her knees. '

There were two possessions of which the Dillinghams were very proud. One was Jim's gold watch, which had been his grandfather's. The other was Delia's hair.

She put her hair up again nervously and cried a little again. Then she put on her old brown jacket, her old brown hat and went down the stairs to the street.

She stopped at a sign which read: "Madame Sofronie. Hair Goods of all Kinds." She ran up the stairs.

"Will you buy my hair?" asked Delia.

"Take your hat off," said Madame Sofronie, "and let me look

at it."

She let her hair down.

"Twenty dollars," said Madame.

"Give it to me quickly," said Delia and the woman began to cut off Delia's beautiful long hair.

For the next two hours Delia searched for a present for Jim. Then she found it. It was a platinum chain for Jim's watch. As soon as she saw it, she knew it was right for Jim. It was just like him. Quiet and valuable. It cost $21.

When Delia got home, she started to curl her hair. After half an hour, her head was covered in small curls.

At seven o'clock the front door opened and Jim came in. Delia whispered to herself, "Please God, make him think I am still pretty." Jim looked thin and serious. Poor Jim! He was only twenty-two! His eyes fixed upon Delia and there was an expression on his face which frightened her.

"Jim, darling, don't look at me like that. My hair will grow again. I cut it off and sold it because I wanted to buy you a present. I've got a beautiful present for you."

"You've cut off your hair," said Jim slowly.

"Yes, but I'm still me without my hair, aren't I?"

"Your hair is gone," he said again, almost like an idiot. He took a package from his coat pocket and threw it on the table. Delia tore at the string and paper. First, an ecstatic scream. Then, hysterical tears.

For there lay the combs—the set of beautiful hair combs which she had wanted for so long. She knew they were expensive. She hugged them closely and said, "My hair grows very fast, Jim." Then she jumped up and gave him her present. The platinum watchchain flashed in the light.

"Isn't it beautiful, Jim? Give me your watch. I want to see how it looks on it."

Jim sat down on the sofa and smiled. "Dell," he said, "let's put our Christmas presents away and keep them for a while. They're too nice to use at present. I sold the watch to buy your combs. Now let's have supper."'

A. Ask and answer questions on the text.

259

Reading

In Japan both men and women go to university and both men and women study arts subjects such as English. But very few women study science, medicine or engineering. In engineering classes of thirty or forty students, there may be only one or two women Men and women both go to university in order to get good jobs, men want to work for a big company, be successful, earn a lot of money and support a family; women, on the other hand, want to work for a big company because they have a better chance of meeting a successful man and getting married. This is changing, however, and Japanese women are beginning to think about themselves. They are beginning to look for a job because they like it rather than because they hope to find a good husband.

Men have a job for the whole of their lives and usually stay with the same company. A woman may work for up to ten years, but after that she usually marries. Most women are married by the age of 27, then they stay at home and look after the children. A man might not mind if his wife goes to work, but she must look after everything in the house as well. A man does not cook or look after the children. When he comes home his meal must be ready The woman may go out in the afternoon, shopping with her friends or just to have a chat, but she must be home by four o'clock to prepare the meal. Then she may have to wait for a long time for hei man to come home. Often he has to go out for a drink after work; if he doesn't he may not rise very high in the company. The man does not come home until eleven o'clock or later. After her children are grown up, a woman can go back to work, but it is not easy. If her old company takes older women back, she might be lucky. But most women find it difficult to get a good job when they are older.

A. Compare the situation with women s education and employment in your country and Japan.

In this extract from his novel "Sons and Lovers" (1913), the writer David Herbert Lawrence describes a scene between Mr Morel, a

260

pit worker, and his wife and children, especially his young son, Paul.

He was shut out from all family affairs. No one told him anything. The children, alone with their mother, told her all about the day's happenings, everything. Nothing had really taken place in them until it was told to their mother. But as soon as the father came in, everything stopped. He was like the scotch in the smooth, happy machinery of the home. And he was always aware of this fall of silence on his entry, the shutting off of life, the unwelcome. But now it was gone too far to alter.

He would dearly have liked the children to talk to him, but they could not. Sometimes Mrs Morel would say: "You ought to tell your father."

Paul won a prize competition in a child's paper. Everybody was highly jubilant.

"Now you'd better tell your father when he comes in," said Mrs Morel. "You know how he carries on and says he's never told anything."

"All right," said Paul. But he would almost rather have forfeited the prize than have to tell his father.

"I've won a prize in a competition, Dad," he said. Morel turned round to him.

"Have you, my boy? What sort of a competition?" "Oh not­hing — about famous women."

"And how much is the prize, then, as you've got?"

"It's a book."

"Oh, indeed!"

"About birds."

"Hm —hm!"

And that was all. Conversation was impossible between the father and any other member of the family. He was an outsider.

The only time when he entered again into the life of his own people was when he worked, and was happy at work. Sometimes, in the evening, he cobbled the boots or mended the kettle or his pit-bottle. Then he always wanted several attendants, and the children enjoyed it. They united with him in the work, in the actual doing of something, when he was real self again.

261

I always believed that if a woman made up her mind to marry a man, nothing but immediate escape could save him.

Once a friend of mine, understanding this, decided to go on a journey for some time. So he got aboard the ship, with only a tooth-brush as his luggage and spent a year travelling round the world. He thought that the girl would forget him — out of sight, out of mind.

But when he landed at the port, the first person he saw, was the little lady from whom he had fled.

And only once I knew a man who managed to escape. His name was Roger Charing. He fell in love with Ruth Barlow at first sight. She was a dark-eyed, fair-haired little lady. When Roger told me that he wanted to marry her I wished him happiness.

"I hope you'll be good friends," he said. "You do like her, don't you?" "Yes," I said. I couldn't say less. I considered her stupid but I couldn't tell Roger about it. Roger introduced her to his friends, he took her everywhere. Their marriage was fixed for the near future. Then, all of a sudden, he fell out of love. I didn't know why. Maybe he understood that Ruth had made up her mind to marry him for his money. But he knew that she wouldn't release him if he simply asked her. So he thought of a plan. He didn't show Ruth that his attitude towards her had changed. He sent her flowers, they dined together and went to the theatre together. They had made up their minds that they would be married as soon as they found a house that suited them. And they started looking for it. They visited house after house but always Roger found a fault that made the house unsuitable. Sometimes they were too small or too large or too expensive or too gloomy.

Ruth began to grow tired. They looked at hundreds of houses and Ruth felt worn-out. Once she said angrily, "If you can't find a house soon I won't marry you." "Don't say that," answered Roger. "We are sure to find a proper house and in less than no time we'll get married."

They had been looking for a house for two years. Finally Ruth was dead tired. "Do you want to marry me or don't you?" she asked. "Oh, of course, I do," was the cheerful answer. But Ruth did not feel well enough to look at any more houses. She didn't want to see Roger.

262

In a week he got a letter. "I don't think you really love me. So I have found a man who will take good care of me and I'll be married to him today. Ruth."

Soon she got a letter from Roger, "I am very unhappy, but the most important thing for me is your happiness. I am sending you several addresses and I am sure that you'll find among them a decent house. Roger."

(after Stephen Leacock)

I think it's a very good idea to celebrate once a year "Mother's Day". So we decided to have a special celebration of Mother's Day. We thought it a fine idea.

We decided to make it a great day, a holiday for all the family and a happy day for our Mother. Father decided to take a holiday from his office, my sister Anne and I stayed home from college classes, and Mary and my brother Will stayed home from High School.

Our plan was to make the day just like any big holiday. So we decided to decorate the house with flowers. We asked Mother to arrange the decorations because she always does it on holidays. The two girls wanted to dress in their very best for such a big occasion, and so they both got new hats. Mother trimmed both the hats and they looked fine. Father had bought new ties for himself and us boys. We wanted to buy a new hat for Mother too, but she said she liked her old grey hat better than a new one, and both the girls said that it was awfully becoming to her.

Well, after breakfast we decided to hire a car and take Mother for a beautiful drive away into the country. Mother is hardly ever able to go to the country because she is busy in the house nearly all the time.

But on the very morning of the day we changed the plan a little bit. Father decided to take mother fishing. It turned out that he had just got a new rod the day before and he said that Mother could use it too.

Well, when the car came to the door, we saw that there was no room in it for us all. Father said he could stay at home and work in the garden though he hadn't had a real holiday for three years. Of course we didn't want to let Father stay at home. Then the two girls Anne and Mary said that they could stay at home and

263

help the maid to cook. Only it was such a pity to stay at home on such a fine day. As to us boys, we couldn't cook.

So in the end it was decided that Mother would stay home and just have a lovely restful day round the house and get the dinner. It turned out anyway that Mother didn't care for fishing, and also it was just a little bit cold and fresh out of doors, though it was lovely and sunny, and Father was afraid that Mother might catch cold if she came. So we said good-bye to Mother and drove away.

Well, we had a very happy day up among the hills. Father caught a lot of fish. Will and I fished too but were not so lucky. The two girls met a lot of people that they knew. So we all had a good time.

It was quite late when we came back, about seven o'clock in the evening. Mother had kept the dinner ready and hot for us. The dinner was like on New Year's Day. Mother had to get up many times during the meal fetching things back and forward.

The dinner lasted a long time, and it was great fun. When it was over all of us wanted to help Mother to wash the dishes. But Mother said that she could do it herself, and so we let her because we wanted to please her.

It was quite late when it was all over, and when we all kissed Mother before we went to bed she said it had been the most wonderful day in her life, and I think there were tears in her eyes. So we all felt awfully repaid for all that we had done.

Self check

I. Put the verbs into the correct tense forms.

Dear Mum,

It (not seem) like 6 months since I (arrive) here, but time (flow). I now (adjust) almost completely to the way of life here, but I must say it (be) difficult to get used to things at the beginning. I (have to) work hard here, and some evenings I (be) so tired out that I (go) straight to bed . But I (be) glad I (come). I (not save) as much as I wanted to, but never mind, I at least (save) something. Next week I'm off for a weekend's skiing, and I really (look forward) to going. I (be) a bit scared because I never (ski) before, but I (get by) somehow — don't worry. Just think, this time next week I (ski).

By the way, when you (come) to visit me? I can put you up in my spare room. If you can't come next month, at least try to come the month after. If you (come), could you bring me some marmalade? I (ran out). Now, what other news is there? My French (be) quite good now, in fact I (pick up) a lot since I (arrive). At the end of my stay here I (speak) French very well.

Oh, something I (forget) to tell you in my last letter, and that is that my firm might transfer me to their branch in the Netherlands. If they (do), it (not be) for another six months. I (wonder) what Holland (be) like? Anyway, if you can't visit me here, I (see) you in four months' time because I've got a week off then, and I (come) home for the week. Well, give my regards to everyone.

Love, Mary

II. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct forms. Study and practise the text.

(A Fairy Tale)

One winter evening a poor peasant sitting near the fire was talking with his wife about one of their neighbours who was a rich man.

"If only I (have) money, I (open) my own shop."

"I (not be) satisfied with that," answered his wife. "I (be) happy if I (live) in a big house, and then , if I (see) people like ourselves, I (help) them and (make) them happy."

"But what's the use talking, we are no longer in the time of fairies," the man said.

"It (not be) bad if they (exist)," the woman said, "Then I (may) meet one of them and ask her to grant me my wishes. If she (pro­mise) to grant me something, I (know) what to ask her."

Hardly had she said these words when a young lovely woman appeared in their room and told them that she was a fairy. She was willing to grant them the first three wishes and no more than three wishes. Then the beautiful lady disappeared.

At first the two peasants were too surprised to speak. But then they began discussing the first wish that it (be) best to have. They were arguing and quarrelling for a long time and finally decided to wish nothing for a while and put it off till the next day.

264

265

Some time later the woman looking at the bright fire said without thinking. "Oh, I wish we (have) a sausage for our supper." She had hardly finished these words when a thick sausage fell on their table from above.

The husband got angry and began scolding his wife, "Isn't that a fine wish! A sausage! Now we have only two wishes left. I'm so angry that I wish this sausage (stick) to your nose!"

This was hardly said when the sausage jumped and stuck to the poor woman's nose.

"What have you done?" cried the frightened woman.

The husband understood that he himself had been even more foolish than his wife. He tried to tear the sausage off his wife's nose but he couldn't.

"It is your fault," said the husband. "It is yours," replied his wife and they continued quarrelling.

"If you (not, wish) to have this sausage, I (not, wish) it to stick to your nose," said the husband.

Finally they understood that they had only one wish left. What could they wish? They thought for a long time and at last agreed to have their last wish. They wished the sausage (fall) on the table which it did.

The only good thing these poor people had got from the fairy was the sausage which they ate at dinner with great appetite.

UNITS GRAMMAR: GERUND

Gerund as subject

James : In my book it says I have to ask my friends about their hobbies so that I can make a graph. Matthew: Collecting stamps is my favourite hobby and wat­ching television is my second. James : Watching television sounds a bit boring. You must like something else! Matthew: Eating sausages and chips is another of my favou­rite activities, and you could mention ice-cream.
gerund Swimming Smoking Sitting here Parachuting Jogging	verb keeps is is getting looks sounds	other information you in good health, dangerous very boring exciting an easy way to keep m shape.

When we want to form a Gerund, in most cases we take an infinitive and put -ing on the end.

eat + ing Eating can be a wonderful experience, sleep + ing Sleeping makes you look younger, work + ing Working too much can cause a nervous breakdown.

To make a negative gerund we use not before it:

Not understanding teenagers is the first sign of middle age. The gerund can be:

a) the subject of a sentence: Swimming is my favourite sport.

b) the complement of subject + BE: My favourite sport is swimming.

267

Verb + gerund

Jennifer: Do you fancy getting some food from a take-away this evening? I really can't stand cooking ano­ther meal tonight. I'm too tired.

John: OK. I don't feel like cooking either. I suggest trying that Chinese take-away in the High Street. It would make a change.

If these verbs are followed by another verb, the structure is usually verb + gerund:

1. admit He admitted stealing the money.

2. advise She advised waiting until tomorrow.

3. anticipate I anticipate having a good time on

vacation.

4. appreciate I appreciated hearing from them.

5. avoid He avoided answering my question.

6. complete I finally completed writing my term

paper.

7. consider I will consider going with you.

8. delay He delayed leaving for school.

9. deny She denied committing the crime.

10. discuss They discussed opening a new business.

11. dislike I dislike driving long distances.

12. enjoy We enjoyed visiting them.

13. excuse Excuse my interrupting you.

14. fancy I don't fancy going out this evening.

15. feel like(=want) I don't feel like eating anything

16. finish Have you finished doing your homework?

17. forget I'll never forget visiting Napoleon's tomb.

18. give up I gave up smoking a month ago.

19. go on(=continue) He had a short rest and then he went

on studying.

20. can't help I can't help worrying about it.

21 imagine I can't imagine George ndmg a motorbike.

22 involve My work involves looking after the

children.

23 keep or keep on I keep hoping he will come.

(=continue) She kept (on) interrupting me while I was speaking.

268

24. mind Would you mind helping me with this?

25. miss I miss being with my family.

26. postpone Let's postpone leaving until tomorrow.

27. practise The athlete practised throwing the ball. 28.put off(=postpone) Don't put off visiting them.

29. quit He quit trying to solve the problem.

30. recall I don't recall meeting him before.

31. recollect I don't recollect meeting him before.

32. recommend She recommended seeing the show.

33. regret I regret telling him my secret.

34. remember I can remember meeting him when I was

a child.

35. resent I resent her interfering m my business.

36. resist I couldn't resist eating the dessert.

37. risk She risks losing all her money.

38. can't stand (=* bear) She can't stand (bear) watching detectives.

39. stop She stopped going to classes when she

got sick.

40. suggest She suggested going to a movie.

41. tolerate She won't tolerate cheating during an examination.

42. understand I don't understand his leaving school.

Note the passive form (being done/being seen/being told etc.): I don't mind being told what to do.

When you are talking about finished actions, you can also say having done/having stolen etc. But it is not necessary to use this form. You can also use the simple -ing form for finished actions:

He admitted stealing (or having stolen) the money. They now regret getting (or having got) married.

With some of the verbs in this unit (especially admit, deny, regret and suggest) you can also use a that... structure:

He denied that he had stolen the money, (or denied stealing)

He admitted (that) he'd broken the window. They suggested (that) we met at two o'clock.

269

Verb + preposition + -ing

a) Many verbs have the structure verb(V) + preposition(P) + object.

For example, talk about

We talked about the problem, (the problem is the object) If the object is another verb, it ends in -ing:

We talked about going to America. (V+P+ -ing)

Here are some more verbs which have the structure (V+P+ -ing):

succeed in think about/of dream of approve/disapprove of look forward to insist on decide against apologise for

Has Tom succeeded Are you thinking I've always dreamed She doesn't approve I'm looking forward He insisted We decided He apologised

in finding a job? of(about) buying a house? of being rich, of gambling, to meeting her. on buying me a drink, against moving to London, for keeping me waiting.

We say "apologise to someone for something":

He apologised to me for keeping me waiting, (not "he apologised me")

With some of these verbs you can also use the structure verb + preposition + someone + -ing. For example:

We are all looking forward to Peter coming back, (informal) We are all looking forward to Peter's coming back, (for­mal)

She doesn't approve of her son staying out late at night, (informal)

She doesn't approve of her son's staying out late at night, (formal)

They insisted on me staying with them, (informal) They insisted on my staying with them, (formal)

b) These verbs have the structure verb+object+preposition+ -ing

270

accuse	They accused	me	of	telling lies.
suspect	Did they suspect	the man	of	being a spy?
congratu-	I congratulated	Ann	on	passing the
late				exam.
prevent	What prevented	him	from	coming to the wedding?
stop	We stopped	everyone	from*	leaving the building.
thank	I thanked	her	for	being so helpful.
forgive	Please forgive	me	for	not writing to you.
warn	They warned	us	against	buying the car.

* Note: After stop you can leave out from. So you can say:

We stopped everyone leaving (отfrom leaving) the building. Some of these verbs are often used in the passive:

I was accused of telling lies.

Was the man suspected of being a spy?

We were warned against buying it.

Adjective + preposition + -ing

The farmer had been sleeping in the field for about an hour. He was tired of working. In fact he had never been keen on doing anything at all at midday when the sun was hottest. By resting a little at this time he would be able to do more in the afternoon. Anyway, he wasn't used to working more than four hours at a time. Suddenly he woke up. He looked over towards the trees. His heart began to beat in fear...

The Gerund is often used after these adjectives'.

afraid	of	He was afraid of catching cold.
busy	in	They were busy in packing their things.
capable	of	Do you think he's capable of doing that?
(incapable)
disappointed	at	We were disappointed at having lost the game.
engaged	in	He is engaged in writing a book.
excited	about	The children were excited about going on holiday.
fond	of	Are you fond of playing chess?
good	at	She is good at dancing.
		271

guilty of He was found guilty of stealing.

indignant at He was indignant at hearing that.

interested m Are you interested in working for us?

keen on He is keen on fishing

pleased at She was not pleased at my coming.

(displeased)

proud of She is proud of being so pretty.

responsible for You are responsible for losing the match.

tired of I'm tired of waiting.

sure of He is sure of winning the race.

surprised at We were surprised at seeing him.

After some adjectives both the Gerund and the Infinitive are used.

— I was disappointed at not finding them at home. I was disappointed not to find them at home.

— She is proud of being so pretty. She is proud to be so pretty.

— I was surprised at seeing her there. I was surprised to see her there.

— She was pleased at getting such an expensive present. She was pleased to get such an expensive present.

Be afraid to do and be afraid of doing

I am afraid to do something = I don't want to do something because it is dangerous or the result could be unpleasant:

-— The streets in this city are not safe at night. Many people are afraid to go out alone. (= they don't want to go out because it is dangerous)

— She was afraid to tell her parents that she had broken the neighbour's window. ( = she didn't want to tell her parents because she knew they would be angry)

I am afraid of something happening = there is a possibility that something bad will happen.

— We walked along the path very carefully because it was icy and we were afraid of falling, (not "afraid to fall")

— I don't like dogs. I'm always afraid of being bitten.(ио/ "afraid to be bitten")

So, you are afraid to do something because you are afraid of something happening as a result. Compare:

— The boys were afraid to play football in the garden be­cause they were afraid of breaking a window.

— I was afraid to stay in the sun because I was afraid of getting burnt.

Be/get used to something (I'm used to...)

a) Study this example situation:

Jane is American but she has lived in Britain for three years. When she first drove a car in Britain, she found it very difficult because she had to drive on the left instead of on the right. Driving on the left was strange and difficult for her because:

She wasn't used to it.

She wasn't used to driving on the left.

But after a long practice, driving on the left became less strange:

She got used to driving on the left. Now after three years, driving on the left is no problem for

her.

— She is used to driving on the left.

I'm used to something = it is not new or strange for me:

— Frank lives alone. He doesn't mind this because he has lived alone for 15 years. So he is used to it. He is used to living alone.

•— My new shoes felt a bit strange at first because I wasn't used to them.

— Our new flat is on a very busy street. I expect we'll get used to the noise but at the moment we find it very distur­bing.

— Fred has a new job. He has to get up much earlier — at 6.30. He finds this difficult at present because he isn't used to getting up so early.

272

273

b) Notice that we say "She is used to driving on the left." (not "she is used to drive"). To in be/get used to is a preposition, not part of the infinitive. So we say:

— Frank is used to living alone, (not "is used to live")

— Jane had to get used to driving on the left.(not "get used to drive")

c) Do not confuse / am used to doing (be/get used to) with/ used to do. They are different in structure and in meaning.

I am used to (doing) something = something isn't strange for me:

— I'm used to the weather in this country. (I'm accustomed to it.)

— I'm used to driving on the left because I've lived in Britain for a long time. (I'm accustomed to driving on the left now.)

We use used to+ infinitive to talk about past habits which are now finished.

— I used to drive a Mercedes, but now I drive a Citroen. (= I drove a Mercedes regularly in the past, but I do not drive a Mercedes now.)

— These days I usually stay in bed until late. But when I had a job, I used to get up early.

Noun + preposition + -ing

The Gerund is also used after nouns followed by prepositions, most often the preposition of.

— There are different ways of solving this problem.

— They discussed different methods of teaching foreign languages.

— Have you any reason for being late?

— He has no intention of marrying her.

— He has no objection to being sent there.

— He expressed his surprise at hearing it.

After such nouns as astonishment, disappointment, surprise, intention, necessity, possibility, way both the Gerund and the Infinitive are used.

274

— I have no intention of going there. = I have no intention to go there.

— There are different ways of doing it. = There are different ways to do it.

Chance and opportunity

a) Chance of-ing

We say: "someone has a (good) chance of doing something" (passing an examination, winning a match etc.):

— Do you think I have a chance of passing the examina­tion?

— We have a very good chance of winning the match.

You can also say any/no/little/much chance:

— I don't think I have much chance of finding a job.

— He has no chance of passing the examination.

You can also say "stand a chance of doing something":

— He doesn't stand a chance of passing the examination.

You can also say "What are the chances of something (hap­pening)?":

— What are the chances of success?

— What are my chances of passing the examination?

You can also say "there is a chance of something happening" or "there is a chance that something will happen":

— Is there any chance of you lending me some money until tomorrow?

— There is a chance that I'll be late home this evening.

b) Chance to do something

We use "chance to do something" when chance = time or opportunity to do something.

('Chance of-ing" is less usual with this meaning.)

— "Have you read the book I lent you?" "No, I haven't had a chance to look at it yet." (= I haven't had time/an opportu­nity to look at it.)

275

•— We didn't have much chance to talk to each other when we last met. (= we didn't have much time/opportunity to talk)

— These days I don't get much chance to watch television. I'm too busy.

c) Opportunity

We normally say "opportunity to do something" (opportunity of-ing is also possible):

— I have the opportunity to study in the United States for a year. Do you think I should go? (= the chance to study)

— After the lecture there will be an opportunity to ask questions.

You can also say any/no/much/plenty of/more opportunity:

— Do you have much opportunity to speak English? (=much chance to speak)

—We live near the mountains, so we have plenty of oppor­tunity to go skiing.

Do not say "possibility to do something":

— I had the opportunity to study in Canada, (not "possi­bility to study")

Preposition + -ing

a) You can use -ing with before, after, on, in, at to express time.

— Before going out I phoned Ann. You can also say: "Before I went out I..."

— What did you do after leaving school? You can also say "... after you left school."

— After working all evening, John felt tired. You can also say: "after he'd worked all evening..."

— On hearing the news, they left at once. (As soon as they heard the news...)

276

-— In reciting the poem she missed a line. (When she was reciting the poem...)

— Clare turned at hearing her footsteps. (... when she heard her footsteps.)

Using the-ing form to express time is a little formal. In speech vve often use a clause with a subject.

b) You can use by -ing to say how something happened.

— They got into the house by breaking a kitchen window and climbing in.

— You can improve your English by doing a lot of reading.

c) You can use -ing after without.

— Tom left without finishing his dinner.

— She ran five miles without stopping.

— He climbed through the window without anybody seeing him. (or "...without being seen.")

— She needs to work without people disturbing her. (or "...without being disturbed.")

— It's nice to go on holiday without having to worry about money.

d) You can use -ing after in spite of to express contrast.

— John went to work in spite of feeling ill.

— Arm can't find a job in spite of doing well at school.

e) You can use -ing after the preposition^cr to express purpose.

— This knife is only for cutting bread.

— Schools are for learning.

— The hall was used for dancing.

— A ruler is used for measuring things.

Need to do and need -ing

Ineed to do something = it is necessary for me to do something.

— He needs to work harder.

— We've got plenty of time. We don't need to hurry. need- ing- need to be done (so the meaning is passive):

277

— The batteries in this radio need changing. (=need to be changed)

— This jacket is rather dirty. It needs cleaning. (= needs to

be cleaned)

— Do you think the grass needs cutting? (= needs to be

cut)

As you can see after need we can also use to be +past participle in the same passive meaning.

— My car needs to be serviced.

— These trousers need to be cleaned.

Expressions + -ing

When these expressions are followed by a verb, the verb ends in

-ing: